Physics (M.allam) Classified Mechanics P2&4&6

Physics
O.L
Mechanics
Part 1
Dr. Mustafa Allam

Mechanics 1
1. Introduction & Measurements
June
2000
Question 1
Variant 1
N 93
OV
Question 1
Variant 1
N 96
OV
Question 1
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Paper 2 - Variant 1 Dr. Mostafa Allam
Mechanics 2
N 94
OV
Question 1
Variant 1
N 95
OV
Question 3
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 3
N 95
OV
Question 5
Variant 1
June
94
Question 1
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 4
8 The diagram shows the level of liquid in a measuring cylinder.
cm3
30 June2002
Question 1
Variant 1
liquid
20
What is the volume of the liquid?
A 24 cm3 B 28 cm3 C 29 cm3 D 32 cm3
9 A cylindrical can is rolled along the ruler shown in the diagram.
starting position final position
can rolled
mark on
can
0 cm 5 10 15 20 25 30 cm
The can rolls over twice.
What is the circumference (distance all round) of the can? June2002
Question 2
Variant 1
A 13 cm B 14 cm C 26 cm D 28 cm
Physics O.L
Mechanics 5
10 A pendulum is set in motion and timed. The time measured for 20 complete swings is 30 s.
What is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?

N 12
OV
Question 1
A 0.67 s B 0.75 s C 1.5 s D 3.0 s Variant 1
11 A student uses a ruler to measure the length and the width of a small rectangular metal plate.
metal plate
N 13
OV
Question 1
Variant 1
length width
0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5
cm cm
What is the area of the plate?
A 14.0 cm2 B 14.7 cm2 C 16.0 cm2 D 16.8 cm2

Introduction &
Physics O.L
Mechanics 6
12 Diagram 1 shows a measuring cylinder containing water.
Five identical steel balls are now lowered into the measuring cylinder. Diagram 2 shows the new
water level in the cylinder.
cm3 cm3
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
N 14
OV
Question 1
60 60 Variant 1
50 50
40 40
30 30 steel ball
20 20
10 10
diagram 1 diagram 2
What is the volume of each steel ball?
A 6 cm3 B 14 cm3 C 30 cm3 D 70 cm3
Physics O.L
Mechanics 7
13 A geologist compares the volumes of three rocks, X, Y and Z. Three measuring cylinders contain
different volumes of water. He places each rock into one of the measuring cylinders.
The diagrams show the measuring cylinders before and after the rocks are put in.
to find the to find the to find the

volume of X volume of Y volume of Z
cm3 cm3 cm3 cm3 cm3 cm3
100 100 100 100 100 100
90 90 90 90 90 90
80 80 80 80 80 80
70 70 70 70 70 70
60 60 60 60 60 60
50 50 50 50 50 50
40 40 40 40 40 40
30 30 X 30 30 Y 30 30 Z
20 20 20 20 20 20
10 10 10 10 10 10
before after before after before after
Which row shows the volumes of X, Y and Z in order, from largest to smallest?
largest smallest
volume volume
A X Z Y
B Y X Z June
15
Question 1
C Y Z X Variant 1
D Z Y X
Physics O.L
Mechanics 8
14 Which option contains only apparatus that could be used to determine the volume of a small
block of unknown material?
A measuring cylinder, metre rule

B measuring cylinder, stopwatch
N 15
OV
C metre rule, balance Question 1
Variant 1
D metre rule, stopwatch
15 What is the most accurate and precise method to measure the thickness of a coin?
A Use a micrometer screw gauge.

B Use a ruler and look at the scale perpendicularly. June
17
Question 1
C Use a top pan balance. Variant 1
D Use the displacement method with water in a measuring cylinder.
16 A student measures the volume of a cork.

He puts some water into a measuring cylinder and then one glass ball. He puts the cork and then
a second, identical glass ball into the water as shown.
cm3 cm3 cm3

100 100 100
80 80 80
glass ball
60 60 60
40 40 40 cork
20 20 20
glass ball glass ball
diagram 1 diagram 2 diagram 3

N 17
OV
Diagram 1 shows the first water level. Question 1
Variant 1
Diagram 2 shows the water level after one glass ball is added.
Diagram 3 shows the water level after the cork and the second glass ball are added.
What is the volume of the cork?
A 30 cm3 B 40 cm3 C 50 cm3 D 100 cm3
Physics O.L
Mechanics 9
17 A length of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.
cotton
cm 1 2 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
When the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.
six turns of cotton

pen
June
18
Question 1
Variant 1
What is the distance once round the pen?
A 2.2 cm B 2.6 cm C 13.2 cm D 15.6 cm
18 The diagram shows part of a micrometer screw gauge.

45
012 40
mm
35
N 18
OV
Question 1
Variant 1
30
What is the smallest reading that can be achieved using this micrometer screw gauge?
A 0.0001 mm B 0.01 mm C 0.1 mm D 1 mm
Physics O.L
Mechanics 10
19 Two identical measuring cylinders containing different liquids are placed on a simple balance.
They balance as shown.
liquid X
volume = 200 cm3 liquid Y
volume = 100 cm3
How does the density of X compare with the density of Y?

1
A density of X = 2
× density of Y
B density of X = density of Y
NOV
08
C density of X = 2 × density of Y Question 7

Variant 1
D density of X = 4 × density of Y
20 A metre rule is used to measure a length.
Which reading is shown to the nearest millimetre?
June
09
Question 1
Variant 1
A 0.7 m B 0.76 m C 0.761 m D 0.7614 m
Physics O.L
Mechanics 11
Mark Scheme
1. B
2. B
3. D
4. C
5. A
6. B
7. A
8. B
9. A
10. C
11. B
12. A
13. B
14. A
15. A
16. A
17. A
18. B
19. A
20. C
Physics O.L
Mechanics 12
1 Drops of water are dripping steadily from a tap (faucet). The diagram shows a measuring cylinder
which has collected 120 drops of water.
June
12
Question 2
Variant 2
cm3
10
4 water
How many drops in total will have been collected when the measuring cylinder reads 10 cm3?
A 48 B 60 C 180 D 300
2 A student measures the length of a rod XY by holding it next to a metre rule.
X Y
99 98 97 96 95 94
cm
The student writes down the length as 94.8 cm.
Which statement is correct?
June
13
Question 1
Variant 2
A The value is correct.

B The value is incorrect because it should be 95.2 cm.
C The value is incorrect because it should be in millimetres.
D The value is incorrect because the student should subtract the reading for end Y from the
reading for end X.
Physics O.L
Paper 2 - Variant 2&3 Dr. Mostafa Allam
Mechanics 13
3 A cyclist rides round a track three times.
N 13
OV
Question 1
Variant 3
Her friend uses a stopwatch to record the time at the start of the ride, after one circuit, and at the
end of the three circuits. The readings from the stopwatch are shown.
at the after at the end of

start one circuit three circuits
What is the average time for one circuit of the track?
A 174 s B 180 s C 198 s D 200 s
4 A student wishes to measure accurately the volume of approximately 40 cm3 of water. She has
two measuring cylinders, a larger one that can hold 100 cm3, and a smaller one that can hold
50 cm3. The water forms a meniscus where it touches the glass.
top of
meniscus
June
14
Question 4
bottom of Variant 3
meniscus
Which cylinder should the student use and which water level should she use to ensure an
accurate result?
cylinder water level
A larger one bottom of meniscus

B larger one top of meniscus
C smaller one bottom of meniscus
D smaller one top of meniscus
Physics O.L
Mechanics 14
5 A stopwatch is used to time a runner in a race. The diagrams show the stopwatch at the start and
at the end of a lap of the race.
0 : 50 : 10 1 : 40 : 10
N 14
OV
Question 1
Variant 3
start of lap end of lap
How long did the runner take to finish the lap of the race?
A 50.00 seconds
B 50.10 seconds
C 90.00 seconds
D 100.10 seconds
6 A student uses a measuring cylinder to measure the volume of some water. The diagram shows
part of the measuring cylinder. The top and bottom of the meniscus are labelled.
cm3
50
top of
meniscus
45 M 15
arch
Question 1
bottom Variant 2
of meniscus
40
What is the volume of the water?
A 47.0 cm3 B 47.5 cm3 C 49.0 cm3 D 49.5 cm3
Physics O.L
Mechanics 15
7 The diagram shows four identical spheres placed between two wooden blocks on a ruler.
sphere
wooden block
0 5 10 15 cm June
15
Question 1
Variant 2
What is the diameter of one sphere?
A 1.0 cm B 2.0 cm C 3.0 cm D 4.0 cm
8 A cook wants to prepare some food to be cooked by 1.15 p.m. He uses an oven with an
automatic timer that can be set to switch on and off at certain times. The oven needs to be
switched on for 2 hours 10 minutes.
At which time does the oven need to switch on?

June
15
Question 1
Variant 3
A 11.05 a.m. B 11.25 a.m. C 3.05 p.m. D 3.25 p.m.
9 The diagram shows a measuring cylinder used to measure the volume of a small stone.
cm3 cm3
50 50
40 40
N 15
OV
30 30 Question 1
Variant 2
20 20
10 10 stone
What is the volume of the stone?
A 8 cm3 B 9 cm3 C 14 cm3 D 26 cm3
Physics O.L
Mechanics 16
10 A student uses a measuring cylinder to measure the volume of a quantity of water.

Which action would make her result less accurate?
A making sure her eye is level with the water surface

B making sure the cylinder is vertical N 15
OV
Question 1
C reading the bottom of the meniscus Variant 3
D using the largest measuring cylinder possible
11 The diameter of a copper wire is thought to be approximately 0.3 mm.
Which instrument should be used to obtain a more accurate measurement of the diameter of the
wire?
A measuring tape
B metre rule
M 16
arch
C micrometer Question 1
Variant 2
D ruler
12 The diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. It is being used to measure
the length of a small feather.
June
16
Question 1
Variant 2
10 20 30
mm
cm 1 2 3
What is the length of the feather?
A 19 mm B 29 mm C 19 cm D 29 cm
Physics O.L
Mechanics 17
13 The diagram shows the height of a stack of identical coins.
stack of
coins
2.40 cm M 17
arch
Question 1
Variant 2
What is the thickness of one coin?
A 0.20 mm B 2.0 mm C 0.24 cm D 2.0 cm
14 A pendulum is swinging. Five students each measure the time it takes to swing through ten
complete swings.
Three students measure the time as 17.2 s. Another student measures it as 16.9 s, and the fifth
student measures it as 17.0 s.
What is the average period of the pendulum? June

17
Question 2
Variant 3
A 1.69 s B 1.70 s C 1.71 s D 1.72 s
Physics O.L
Mechanics 18
15 A measuring cylinder contains some water. A small metal block is slowly lowered into the water
and is then removed.
Finally a piece of plastic is attached to the metal block and the block is again slowly lowered into
the water.
The diagrams show the measuring cylinder at each stage of this process.
1 2 3
cm3 cm3 cm3
100 100 100
90
80
90
80
90
80
N 17
OV
Question 1
70 70 70 Variant 3
60 60 60
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20 plastic
10 10 10
metal block metal block
What is the volume of the piece of plastic?
A 10 cm3 B 25 cm3 C 70 cm3 D 80 cm3
16 Which instrument is used to measure accurately the diameter of a thin metal wire?
A 30 cm ruler
B measuring tape M 18
arch
C metre rule Question 1

Variant 2
D micrometer screw gauge
Physics O.L
Mechanics 19
Mark Scheme
1. D
2. D
3. C
4. C
5. A
6. A
7. B
8. A
9. A
10. D
11. C
12. A
13. B
14. C
15. A
16. D
Physics O.L
Mechanics 20
2. Density
June
2000
Question 7
Variant 1
N 93
OV
Question 4
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 21
2. Density
June
95
Question 4
Variant 1
4 A shop-keeper places two identical blocks of cheese on a set of scales and notices that their
combined mass is 240 g. Each block measures 2.0 cm x 5.0 cm x 10.0 cm.
June
2002
Question 7
Variant 1
What is the density of the cheese?
A 0.42 g / cm3 B 0.83 g / cm3 C 1.2 g / cm3 D 2.4 g / cm3
Physics O.L
Mechanics 22
2. Density
5 A cube of side 2.0 cm is placed on a balance.
2.0 cm
balance
7.2 g
June
11
Question 6
Variant 1
What is the density of the cube?
6 The diagrams show four blocks with the same mass.

Which block is made from the least dense material?
A B
N 11
OV
Question 1
Variant 1
8 cm 3 cm
1 cm 3 cm
2 cm 2 cm
C D
5 cm
2 cm
4 cm
3 cm
2 cm
2 cm
Physics O.L
Mechanics 23
2. Density
7 The diagrams show an empty rectangular box, and the same box filled with liquid.
The box has a mass of 60 g when empty. When filled with liquid, the total mass of the box and the
liquid is 300 g.
N 16
OV
Question 5
empty box box filled with liquid Variant 1
60 g 300 g
The density of the liquid is 1.2 g / cm3.
What is the volume of the liquid in the box?
A 50 cm3 B 200 cm3 C 250 cm3 D 300 cm3
8 A measuring cylinder containing only water is placed on an electronic balance. A small, irregularly
shaped stone is now completely immersed in the water.
The diagrams show the equipment before and after the stone is immersed.
measuring cm3 cm3

cylinder 100 100
90 90
80
70
80
70
June
17
Question 5
60 60 Variant 1
50 50
40 40 stone
water 30 30
20 20
10 10
balance
g g
before the stone after the stone

is immersed is immersed
What is the density of the material of the stone?
Physics O.L
Mechanics 24
2. Density
9 A liquid has a volume of 0.040 m3 and a mass of 30 000 g.

What is the density of the liquid?
N 18
OV
Question 5
Variant 1
A 0.075 kg / m3 B 7.5 kg / m3 C 750 kg / m3 D 7500 kg / m3
Physics O.L
Mechanics 25
2. Density
Mark Scheme
1. C
2. C
3. B
4. C
5. A
6. C
7. B
8. C
9. C
Physics O.L
Mechanics 26
2. Density
1 A measuring cylinder containing liquid is placed on a top-pan balance. The apparatus is left
overnight and some of the liquid evaporates. The diagrams show the readings.
cm3
252 cm3 244
251 243
250 242
liquid
249 liquid 241
248 240
measuring
cylinder
g g
June
13
Question 6
Variant 2
before liquid after liquid
evaporates evaporates
2 A student is given four different objects and a metre rule.

Each object has a known mass. She is asked to determine the densities of the materials from
which the four objects are made.
The objects are a copper cylinder, a glass cube, a steel spanner and a stone tile.
copper glass steel stone
Using only the metre rule, she is able to find the densities of only three of the four materials.
Which three materials are these?
A copper, glass and steel

B copper, glass and stone N 13
OV
C copper, steel and stone Question 6
Variant 3
D glass, steel and stone
Physics O.L
Mechanics 27
2. Density
3 A person measures the length, width, height and mass of a metal block with rectangular sides.
Which of these measurements must be used in order to calculate the density of the metal?
A mass only
B height and mass only
C length, width and height only
M 15
arch
Question 5
Variant 2
D length, width, height and mass
4 Two cylinders are made of the same metal. Both cylinders have the same cross-sectional area
but one is longer than the other.
cylinder 1 cylinder 2
Which quantity is the same for both cylinders?
A density
B mass
C resistance
N 15
OV
Question 5
Variant 2
D volume
5 The mass of a piece of metal is 1200 g.
A measuring cylinder contains 150 cm3 of water.
The piece of metal is put into the measuring cylinder. The water level rises to 250 cm3 and covers
the metal.
N 15
OV
What is the density of the metal? Question 5
Variant 3
3 3 3 3
A 3.0 g / cm B 4.8 g / cm C 8.0 g / cm D 12.0 g / cm
Physics O.L
Mechanics 28
2. Density
6 The diagram shows a cuboid block made from a metal of density 2.5 g / cm3.
M 16
arch
Question 5
Variant 2
2.0 cm 10 cm
2.0 cm
What is the mass of the block?
A 8.0 g B 16 g C 50 g D 100 g
7 A student uses a measuring cylinder and a balance to find the density of oil. The diagram shows
the arrangement used.
empty measuring
measuring cylinder containing
cylinder volume V of oil
oil
N 16
OV
Question 5
Variant 2
m1 m2
g g
Which calculation gives the density of the oil?
A V B V C
m2
D
(m 2 − m1)
m2 (m2 − m1) V V
Physics O.L
Mechanics 29
2. Density
8 The diagrams show an empty container, and the same container filled with liquid.
The empty container has a mass of 120 g. When filled with the liquid, the total mass of the
container and the liquid is 600 g.
N 16
OV
Question 5
Variant 3
empty container container filled with liquid

120 g 600 g
The volume of liquid in the container is 600 cm3.
9 The masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid into it are shown in the
diagram.
cm3 cm3
200 200
100 100
June
17
Question 5
liquid Variant 2
mass = 80 g mass = 180 g
A 100 g / cm3 B 100 g / cm3 C 180 g / cm3 D 180 g / cm3

120 140 120 140
Physics O.L
Mechanics 30
2. Density
10 A steel ball bearing has a mass of 24 g and a density of 8.0 g / cm3. It is lowered into a measuring
3
cylinder containing 12 cm of water.
June
17
Question 5
What is the new water level in the cylinder? Variant 3
A 3.0 cm3 B 4.0 cm3 C 15 cm3 D 16 cm3
11 A student investigates the rate of flow of oil through a funnel.
The diagrams show the experiment and the volume of oil in the measuring cylinder at the start of
the experiment, and one minute later.
80 80
cm3 cm3
60 60
40 40
N 17
OV
20 20 Question 1
Variant 2
initial after 1.0

measurement minute
What is the rate of flow of oil through the funnel during the one minute?
A 0.73 cm3 / s B 0.80 cm3 / s C 44 cm3 / s D 48 cm3 / s
Physics O.L
Mechanics 31
2. Density
12 A measuring cylinder contains 30 cm3 of a liquid.
cm3
50
40
30
M 18
arch
Question 6
Variant 2
20
10
balance
Some more of the liquid is added until the liquid level reaches the 50 cm3 mark.
The reading on the balance increases by 30 g.
13 The diagram shows four blocks of different metals. Each block has a mass of 12 g.
Which metal has the largest density?
A B
1 cm
1 cm
2 cm
1 cm N 18
OV
2 cm 2 cm Question 5
Variant 2
C D
1 cm
1 cm
2 cm
1 cm
3 cm 3 cm
Physics O.L
Mechanics 32
2. Density
14 A student carries out experiments to find the mass and the volume of four samples of rock.
The graph shows the results.
sample P sample Q
200
mass / g
N 18
OV
sample R sample S Question 5
Variant 3
100
0
0 50 100
volume / cm3
Which pair are samples of the same type of rock?
A P and Q B P and S C R and Q D Q and S
Physics O.L
Mechanics 33
2. Density
Mark Scheme
1. A
2. B
3. D
4. A
5. D
6. D
7. D
8. B
9. B
10. C
11. B
12. C
13. A
14. C
Physics O.L
Mechanics 34
3. Speed & Acceleration
1.
June
2000
Question 4
Variant 1
2.
N 94
OV
Question 2
Variant 1
3.
N 95
OV
Question 1
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 35
4.
June
94
Question 2
Variant 1
5. A snail crosses a garden path 30 cm wide at a speed of 0.2 cm/s.
movement
30 cm
of snail
snail June2002
Question 4
Variant 1
How long does the snail take?
A 0.0067 s B 6.0 s C 15 s D 150 s
Physics O.L
Mechanics 36
6 A tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.40 s later hears the echo from a wall.
June
11
Question 3
Variant 1
The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
How far away is the player from the wall?
A 66 m B 132 m C 264 m D 825 m
7 A child is standing on the platform of a station.
A train travelling at 30 m / s takes 3.0 s to pass the child.
What is the length of the train?

N 11
OV
Question 3
Variant 1
A 10 m B 27 m C 30 m D 90 m
Physics O.L
Mechanics 37
8 A car is moving downhill along a road at a constant speed.

Which graph is the speed / time graph for the car?
A B
speed speed
June
12
Question 2
Variant 1
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
9 In a race, a car travels 60 times around a 3.6 km track. This takes 2.4 hours.
What is the average speed of the car?
June
12
Question 3
Variant 1
A 1.5 km / h B 90 km / h C 144 km / h D 216 km / h
Physics O.L
Mechanics 38
10 The speed-time graph shown is for a bus travelling between stops.

Where on the graph is the acceleration of the bus greatest?
C
speed
B
N 12
OV
Question 3
Variant 1
A D
time
11 Which person is experiencing an acceleration?
A a driver of a car that is braking to stop at traffic lights

June
13
Question 2
Variant 1
B a passenger in a train that is stationary in a railway station
C a shopper in a large store ascending an escalator (moving stairs) at a uniform rate
D a skydiver falling at constant speed towards the Earth
12 A car travels at various speeds during a short journey.
The table shows the distances travelled and the times taken during each of four stages
P, Q, R and S.
stage P Q R S
distance travelled / km 1.8 3.6 2.7 2.7

time taken / minutes 2 2 4 3
June
13
Question 3
Variant 1
During which two stages is the car travelling at the same average speed?
A P and Q B P and S C Q and R D R and S
Physics O.L
Mechanics 39
13 A small steel ball is dropped from a low balcony.
Ignoring air resistance, which statement describes its motion?
A It falls with constant acceleration.

B It falls with constant speed.
N 12
13
OV
C It falls with decreasing speed. Question 3
Variant 1
D It falls with increasing acceleration.
14 A man stands by a railway track.
A train travelling at 40 m / s takes 2.0 s to pass the man.
What is the length of the train?

N 14
OV
Question 3
Variant 1
A 20 m B 38 m C 40 m D 80 m
15 The graph represents the motion of a car.
20
speed
m/s
10
0
0 5 10
10 15 20 25 30
N 15
OV
Question 2
time / s Variant 1
What is the distance travelled by the car while it is moving at a constant speed?
A 100 m B 150 m C 250 m D 300 m
Physics O.L
Mechanics 40
16 A car travels along the route PQRST in 30 minutes.
5 km
Q 10 km
T
5 km
10 km
R N 15
OV
P Question 3
Variant 1
What is the average speed of the car?
A 10 km / hour B 20 km / hour C 30 km / hour D 60 km / hour
17 The speed-time graph shown is for a car moving in a straight line.
15
speed
m/ s
10
June
16
Question 2
5 Variant 1
0
0 20 40 0
6 80
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car when the time is 40 s?
A 0 m / s2 B 15 − 3 m / s2 C 15 m / s2 D (15 – 3) m / s2
40 40
Physics O.L
Mechanics 41
18 Two runners take part in a race.
The graph shows how the speed of each runner changes with time.
runner 1
speed
runner 2
June
16
Question 3
Variant 1
0
0 t time
What does the graph show about the runners at time t ?
A Both runners are moving at the same speed.

B Runner 1 has zero acceleration.
C Runner 1 is overtaking runner 2.
D Runner 2 is slowing down.
19 The graph shows how the distance travelled by a vehicle changes with time.
S
distance
Q R
0
0
P
time
N 16
OV
Question 1
Variant 1
Which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?
P to Q Q to R R to S
A constant zero constant

B constant zero decreasing
C increasing constant decreasing
D increasing zero constant
Physics O.L
Mechanics 42
20 A car travels along a horizontal road in a straight line. The driver presses the accelerator to
increase the speed of the car.
The speed-time graph for the car is shown.
30
speed
m/s
20
N 16
OV
Question 3
Variant 1
10
0
0 5 10 15 20
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car?
A 0.50 m / s2 B 1.00 m / s2 C 1.50 m / s2 D 2.00 m / s2
21 On Earth, a ball is dropped and falls 2.0 m in a vacuum.
The acceleration of the ball at 1.0 m is 10 m / s2.
0m ball
0.5 m
June
17
Question 2
1.0 m Variant 1
1.5 m
2.0 m
What is the acceleration of the ball at 0.5 m?
A 5.0 m / s2 B 10 m / s2 C 15 m / s2 D 20 m / s2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 43
22 Four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.
Air resistance may be ignored.
Which ball has the smallest average speed?
A B C D
1.0 kg
2.0 kg
3.0 kg N 17
OV
Question 2
4.0 m
4.0 kg Variant 1
3.0 m
2.0 m
1.0 m ground
23 A car is moving along a straight, level road, with a constant acceleration.
Which graph shows the motion of the car?
A B
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
June
18
Question 3
Variant 1
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
Physics O.L
Mechanics 44
24 A small, light ball is dropped from the top of a tall building.

Which graph shows how the speed of the ball changes with time?
A B
speed speed
0 0
N 18
OV
Question 2
0 time 0 time Variant 1
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
25 A runner runs 300 m at an average speed of 3.0 m / s. She then runs another 300 m at an average
speed of 6.0 m / s.
What is her average speed for the total distance of 600 m? N 18

OV
Question 3
Variant 1
A 2.0 m / s B 4.0 m / s C 4.5 m / s D 8.0 m / s
Physics O.L
Mechanics 45
26 Two stones of different weight fall at the same time from a table. Air resistance may be ignored.
N 12
OV
Question 2
Variant 1
What will happen and why?
what will happen why
A both stones hit the floor at the same time acceleration of free fall is constant
B both stones hit the floor at the same time they fall at constant speed
C the heavier stone hits the floor first acceleration increases with weight
D the heavier stone hits the floor first speed increases with weight
Physics O.L
Mechanics 46
Mark Scheme
1. B
2. D
3. C
4. D
5. D
6. A
7. D
8. C
9. B
10. B
11. A
12. B
13. A
14. D
15. A
16. D
17. A
18. A
19. A
20. A
21. B
22. A
23. D
24. C
25. B
26. A
Physics O.L
Mechanics 47
1 A student wishes to measure the speed of sound in air. She plans to measure the time between
making a sound and hearing the echo from a cliff.
cliff
N 11
OV
Question 3
Variant 3
student
She will use the equation: speed = distance .

time
Which type of sound should she make and which distance should she use in her calculation?
type of sound distance to use

distance to cliff
A continuous sound 2
B continuous sound distance to cliff × 2
distance to cliff
C short, sharp sound 2
D short, sharp sound distance to cliff × 2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 48
2 A heavy metal ball falls vertically downwards through air past four equally spaced levels J, K, L
and M.
metal ball
level J
level K
June
13
Question 2
level L Variant 2
level M
The times taken to fall from one level to the next are measured.
Where is the speed of the ball greatest and which time is shortest?
speed is time is
greatest between shortest between
A J and K J and K
B J and K L and M
C L and M J and K
D L and M L and M
3 The graph shows how the distance travelled by a vehicle changes with time.
distance
Q R
N 13
OV
Question 2
Variant 3
P S
0
0 time
Which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?
P to Q Q to R R to S
A constant zero constant

B constant zero decreasing
C increasing constant decreasing
D increasing zero decreasing
Physics O.L
Mechanics 49
4 Which distance / time graph represents the motion of an object moving at constant speed?
A B
distance distance
June
14
Question 2
Variant 2
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
5 An aeroplane flies from town X to town Z, stopping for 1 hour at town Y to pick up more
passengers. The distances between the towns are shown in the diagram.
300 km 200 km Z N 13
OV
Question 3
Variant 3
The total time taken between leaving X and arriving at Z is 3 hours.
What is the average speed of the aeroplane in the air?
A 500 km / h B 500 km / h C 500 km / h D 500 km / h

4 3 2 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 50
6 The graph represents the motion of a train travelling between two stations.
20
M 15
arch
speed Question 2
m/s Variant 2
10
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
time / s
Which statement about the train is correct?
A Its acceleration takes a longer time than its deceleration.

B It travels at constant speed for less than half of its journey time.
C It travels 2000 m in the first 100 s.
D It travels 10 000 m at constant speed.
7 A car travels 6.0 km along a main road in 6.0 minutes. It then travels 2.0 km along a minor road in
6.0 minutes.
minor
road
6.0 km
2.0 km
M 15
arch
Question 3
6.0 minutes
6.0 minutes Variant 2
main
road
Which calculation of average speed for the whole journey is correct?
A 8.0 ÷ 12.0 = 0.67 km / minute
B 12.0 ÷ 8.0 = 1.5 km / minute

C 8.0 + 12.0 = 20 km / minute
D 8.0 × 12.0 = 96 km / minute
Physics O.L
Mechanics 51
8 What does the area under a speed-time graph represent?

A acceleration
B average speed
June
15
C deceleration Question 2
Variant 2
D distance travelled
9 A car travels 100 km. The journey takes two hours. The highest speed of the car is 80 km / h, and
the lowest speed is 40 km / h.
June
15
Question 3
Variant 2
What is the average speed for the journey?
A 40 km / h B 50 km / h C 60 km / h D 120 km / h
10 The diagram shows the distance-time graph for a car.
At which labelled point is the car moving with constant speed?
distance B D N 15
OV
Question 2
Variant 3
C
0
0 time
11 Which is a unit of acceleration?
M 16
arch
Question 2
Variant 2
3 2
A g / cm B m/s C m/s D N/m
Physics O.L
Mechanics 52
12 An object is released from rest and falls to Earth. During its fall, the object is affected by air
resistance. The air resistance eventually reaches a constant value.
Which description about successive stages of the motion of the object is correct?
A constant acceleration, then constant deceleration

B constant deceleration, then zero acceleration
M 16
arch
C decreasing acceleration, then constant deceleration Question 3
Variant 2
D decreasing acceleration, then zero acceleration
13 A car travels along a straight road.
The speed-time graph for this journey is shown.
During which labelled part of the journey is the resultant force on the car zero? June
16
Question 2
Variant 2
speed
C
B
D
0
0 time
14 Below are four statements about acceleration.
Which statement is not correct?
A Acceleration always involves changing speed. June

16
Question 5
B Changing direction always involves acceleration. Variant 2
C Changing speed always involves acceleration.

D Circular motion always involves acceleration.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 53
15 An object moves at a constant speed for some time, then begins to accelerate.
Which distance-time graph shows this motion?
A B
June
16
distance distance Question 2

Variant 3
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
16 A heavy object is released near the surface of the Earth and falls freely. Air resistance can be
ignored.
Which statement about the acceleration of the object due to gravity is correct?
A The acceleration depends on the mass of the object. June

16
Question 3
B The acceleration depends on the volume of the object. Variant 3
C The acceleration is constant.

D The acceleration is initially zero and increases as the object falls.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 54
17 The speed-time graph for an object is shown.
speed X Y
20
m/s
N 16
OV
Question 3
W P Variant 2
Z
0
0 5 15 25
time / s
Below are four statements about the acceleration of the object.
A The acceleration in the first 5 s is given by area P.

B The acceleration increases between W and X.
C The acceleration is negative between Y and Z.
D The deceleration between Y and Z is (20 ÷ 25) m / s2.
18 The speed-time graph for an object is shown.
speed X Y
10
m/s
N 16
OV
Question 3
W Variant 3
Z
0
0 10 30 50
time / s
Below are four statements about the acceleration of the object.
Which statement is true?
A The acceleration in the first 10 s is (10 ÷ 10) m / s2.

B The acceleration increases between W and X.
C The acceleration decreases between Y and Z.
D The deceleration between Y and Z is (10 ÷ 50) m / s2.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 55
19 Four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.
P Q R S
1.0 kg
2.0 kg M 17
arch
Question 2
Variant 2
3.0 kg
4.0 m
4.0 kg
3.0 m
2.0 m
1.0 m ground
Which statement about the balls is correct?
A Ball P has the greatest acceleration.

B Balls Q and R take the same time to fall to the ground.
C The acceleration of ball R is half the acceleration of ball P.
D Ball S has the greatest average speed.
20 An object is travelling in a straight line. The diagram is the speed-time graph for the object.
At which labelled point is the object accelerating at a changing rate?
speed
C M 17
arch
Question 3
m/s Variant 2
B
D
A
0
0 time / s
Physics O.L
Mechanics 56
21 A student determines the average speed of a bubble rising through a liquid at constant speed.
When the student starts the stopwatch the bubble is at position P.
After 2.0 s the bubble is at position Q.
bubble
June
17
18 Question 2
Q Variant 2
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
P
26
cm
27
bubble
What is the speed of the bubble between P and Q?
A 3.2 cm / s B 3.7 cm / s C 6.4 cm / s D 7.4 cm / s
Physics O.L
Mechanics 57
22 The diagram shows the speed-time graph for a toy car travelling in a straight line.
4.0
speed
m/s 3.0
2.0 June
17
Question 3
Variant 2
1.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car during the first two seconds and what is the total distance that
it travels?
acceleration total
m / s2 distance / m
A 0.50 10
B 0.50 20
C 2.0 10
D 2.0 20
23 Which distance-time graph represents a body whose speed is decreasing?
A B
distance distance June

17
Question 3
Variant 3
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
Physics O.L
Mechanics 58
24 Four balls with different masses are dropped simultaneously from the heights shown.
Which ball hits the floor last?

N 16
OV
A B C D Question 2
Variant 2
4.0 kg
3.0 kg
2.0 kg
2.0 m
1.0 kg
1.5 m
1.0 m
0.5 m ground
25 The curved line on the graph shows the motion of a car.
12.0
speed M 18
arch
10.0 Question 3
m/s
Variant 2
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car at the time of 4.0 s?
A 0.33 m / s2 B 0.44 m / s2 C 2.3 m / s2 D 3.0 m / s2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 59
26 A sprinter runs a 100 m race in a straight line. The table shows how his speed changes with time
for the first 5.0 s of the race.
speed
m/s
0 1.7
1.7 4 June
18
Question 3
time / s 0 1
1.0
.0 2 Variant 3
What is the average acceleration of the sprinter between time 2.0 s and time 3.0 s?
A 1.6 m / s2 B 1.9 m / s2 C 4.1 m / s2 D 5.7 m / s2
27 The speed-time graph shows the motion of a car.
At which time is its acceleration greatest?
speed
N 18
OV
Question 2
Variant 2
0
0 A B C D
time
28 An athlete runs at a speed of 8 m / s for 10 s, and then at a speed of 6 m / s for 12 s.
Which calculation gives the average speed of the athlete in m / s?
A 8+6
2
(8 ×10) + (6 ×12)
B
22
C
(8 ÷ 10) + (6 ÷ 12) N 18
OV
22 Question 3
Variant 2
(10 ÷ 8) + (12 ÷ 6)
D
22
Physics O.L
Mechanics 60
29 An object falls in a gravitational field with air resistance.
Which distance-time graph shows this motion?
A B N 18
OV
Question 2
Variant 3
distance distance
fallen fallen
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
distance distance
fallen fallen
0 0
0 time 0 time
30 A boy runs 400 m at an average speed of 4.0 m / s.
He runs the first 200 m in 40 s.
N 18
OV
Question 3
Variant 3
How long does he take to run the second 200 m?
A 60 s B 66.7 s C 80 s D 140 s
Physics O.L
Mechanics 61
Mark Scheme
1. D 17. C
2. D 18. A
3. A 19. D
4. D 20. B
5. C 21. B
6. B 22. C
7. A 23. C
8. D 24. D
9. B 25. D
10. A 26. A
11. C 27. B
12. D 28. B
13. B 29. A
14. A 30. A
15. C
16. C
Physics O.L
Mechanics 62
4. Force, Weight ( Scalar & Vector )
June
2000
Question 6
Variant 1
N 93
OV
Question 5
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 63
N 96
OV
Question 4
Variant 1
N 94
OV
Question 3
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 64
N 98
OV
Question 4
Variant 1
June
95
Question 6
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 65
7 The weight of an object is to be found using the balance shown in the diagram.
N 11
OV
Question 4
Variant 1
object
The object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan.
These are the results.
weights in the right-hand pan effect
0.1 N, 0.1 N, 0.05 N, 0.02 N balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side
0.2 N, 0.1 N, 0.01 N balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side
What is the best estimate of the weight of the object?
A 0.27 N B 0.29 N C 0.31 N D 0.58 N
8 Two stones of different weight fall at the same time from a table. Air resistance may be ignored.
What will happen and why?
N 12
OV
Question 2
Variant 1
what will happen why
A both stones hit the floor at the same time acceleration of free fall is constant
B both stones hit the floor at the same time they fall at constant speed
C the heavier stone hits the floor first acceleration increases with weight
D the heavier stone hits the floor first speed increases with weight
Physics O.L
Mechanics 66
9 A parachutist inside an aeroplane has a mass of 70 kg.
N 12
OV
Question 5
Variant 1
What is his mass after he has jumped from the aeroplane?

A 0 kg
B between 0 kg and 70 kg
C 70 kg
D greater than 70 kg
10 A car moves along a level road.

The diagram shows all of the horizontal forces acting on the car.
800 N
air resistance
2000 N force
500 N from engine
friction
A The car is slowing down.

B The car is speeding up.
June
13
Question 7
Variant 1
C The car is moving at a constant speed.
D The car is moving backwards.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 67
11 A cup contains hot liquid.
Some of the liquid evaporates.
What happens to the mass and to the weight of the liquid in the cup?
mass weight
A decreases decreases
B decreases stays the same N 13
OV
Question 5
C stays the same decreases Variant 1
D stays the same stays the same
12 Which properties of a body can be changed by applying a force to the body?
A mass, motion and shape

B mass and motion, but not shape
N 14
OV
C mass and shape, but not motion Question 8
Variant 1
D motion and shape, but not mass
13 The mass of an object is measured on Earth. The mass is 5.0 kg.

The object is taken to the Moon. The mass of the object is measured on the Moon.
What is the mass of the object on the Moon?
A 0 kg
B more than 0 kg, but less than 5.0 kg N 15
OV
Question 4
C 5.0 kg Variant 1
D more than 5.0 kg
Physics O.L
Mechanics 68
14 A scalar quantity has
A magnitude and direction.

B no magnitude and no direction.
June
16
C magnitude but no direction. Question 8

Variant 1
D direction but no magnitude.
15 A stone falls freely from the top of a cliff. Air resistance may be ignored.
Which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?
A B
acceleration acceleration
N 16
OV
Question 2
Variant 1
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
Physics O.L
Mechanics 69
16 A spaceship approaches the Earth from deep space. Near the Earth, a force on the spaceship
causes it to have weight. This causes it to change its speed and direction.
Which type of force causes the spaceship’s weight, and which property of the spaceship resists
its change in speed and direction?
force that property that resists change in

causes weight speed and direction
A gravitational mass
N 16
OV
Question 4
Variant 1
B gravitational volume
C magnetic mass
D magnetic volume
17 A skydiver reaches terminal velocity. Then he opens his parachute.
What happens to the skydiver as the parachute opens?
A There is a decrease in weight.

B There is acceleration upwards. June
17
Question 3
C There is an increase in speed. Variant 1
D There is movement upwards.
18 A piece of steel is taken from the Earth to the Moon for an experiment. The gravitational field
strength on the Moon is smaller than on the Earth.
Which statement about the piece of steel is correct?
A It has less mass on the Moon than on the Earth.

B It has more mass on the Moon than on the Earth.
June
17
C It weighs less on the Moon than on the Earth. Question 4

Variant 1
D It weighs more on the Moon than on the Earth.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 70
19 A boat is travelling at a steady speed in a straight line across the surface of a lake.
Which statement about the boat is correct?
A The resultant force on the boat is in the direction of motion.

B The resultant force on the boat is in the opposite direction to its motion. June
17
Question 6
C The resultant force on the boat is vertically downwards. Variant 1
D The resultant force on the boat is zero.
20 An ice crystal falls vertically from a cloud.
What happens to the acceleration of the ice crystal as it falls?
A It decreases because of air resistance.

B It decreases because of gravity.
N 17
OV
Question 3
Variant 1
C It increases because of air resistance.
D It increases because of gravity.
21 Which object has the greatest weight?
A an object of mass 10 kg in a 15 N / kg gravitational field

B an object of mass 15 kg in a 13 N / kg gravitational field
N 17
OV
C an object of mass 20 kg in a 9.0 N / kg gravitational field Question 5
Variant 1
D an object of mass 50 kg in a 3.0 N / kg gravitational field
22 When does an object falling vertically through the air reach terminal velocity?
A when the acceleration of the object becomes negative

B when the acceleration of the object is equal to g
June
18
C when the air resistance equals the weight of the object Question 2
Variant 1
D when the air resistance is greater than the weight of the object
Physics O.L
Mechanics 71
23 Diagram 1 shows a beam balance. A beaker with a wire loop balances the standard masses.
The beaker is then removed and hung from a spring. The spring extends by 5.0 cm, as in
diagram 2.
diagram 1 diagram 2
beam beaker with spring

standard balance wire loop
masses
attached
beaker with
wire loop
attached
The experiment is repeated with the same apparatus on the Moon, where the acceleration of free
fall is less than on Earth.
Which statement describes what happens on the Moon?
A The beam balance is balanced and the spring extends by 5.0 cm.
B The beam balance is balanced and the spring extends by less than 5.0 cm. June
18
Question 4
C The right-hand balance pan is higher and the spring extends by 5.0 cm. Variant 1
D The right-hand balance pan is higher and the spring extends by less than 5.0 cm.
24 An object always has mass but does not always have weight.
What must be present and acting on the mass for it to have weight?
A a gravitational field
B a set of scales
June
18
C displaced water Question 5

Variant 1
D friction due to air resistance
25 A force acting on a moving ball causes its motion to change. This force stays constant.
What makes the force produce a greater change in the motion of the ball?
A decreasing the total mass of the ball
B increasing the temperature of the ball
June
18
Question 6
Variant 1
C using a ball with a hollow centre but the same mass
D using a different material for the ball so that it has a lower density but the same mass
Physics O.L
Mechanics 72
26 A car is moving in a straight line on a level road. Its engine provides a forward force on the car. A
second force of equal size acts on the car due to resistive forces.
Which statement describes what happens?
A The car changes direction.

B The car moves at a constant speed.
June
18
Question 8
Variant 1
C The car slows down.
D The car speeds up.
27 A helium balloon is tied to a top-pan balance. A metal block of mass 100 g is placed on the
balance. The reading on the balance is 91 g.
helium balloon
metal block
N 18
OV
Question 4
Variant 1
91 g
Which statement can be deduced from this experiment?
A The balloon exerts a downward force of 0.09 N on the top-pan balance.

B The helium has a mass of –9 g.
C The helium has a mass of +9 g.
D The resultant downward force on the top-pan balance is 0.91 N.
28 Which quantities are both vectors?
A acceleration and force

B acceleration and pressure
N 18
OV
C density and force Question 7
Variant 1
D density and pressure
Physics O.L
Mechanics 73
Mark Scheme
1. B
2. B
3. B
4. A
5. D
6. C
7. B
8. A
9. C
10. B
11. A
12. D
13. C
14. C
15. D
16. A
17. B
18. C
19. D
20. A
21. B
22. C
23. B
24. A
25. A
26. B
27. D
28. A
Physics O.L
Mechanics 74
1 Two blocks of metal X and Y hang from spring balances, as shown in the diagrams.
N N
June
13
Question 4
0 0 Variant 2
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
X
Y
What does the diagram show about X and Y?
A They have the same mass and the same volume but different weights.
B They have the same mass and the same weight but different volumes.
C They have the same mass, the same volume and the same weight.
D They have the same weight and the same volume but different masses.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 75
2 A child sits on a rubber ball and bounces up and down on the ground.
June
13
Question 7
Variant 2
What stays the same when the ball hits the ground?
A the acceleration of the ball

B the mass of the ball
C the shape of the ball
D the velocity of the ball
3 A customer goes to a market and buys some rice. The stallholder pours rice into a dish that
hangs from a spring balance. He records the reading on the spring balance.
0 1 spring balance
6
5
4 3
2
June
14
Question 4
Variant 2
rice
dish
The customer then buys some pasta and the stallholder notices that the reading on the spring
balance, with just pasta in the dish, is the same as it was with just rice in the dish.
The rice and the pasta must have the same
A density.
B temperature.
C volume.
D weight.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 76
4 Two metal blocks P and Q have identical dimensions. They hang on identical spring balances.
N N
0 0
1 1
2 2
M 15
arch
Question 4
3 3 Variant 2
4 4
5 5
6 6
P
Q
What can be deduced about P and Q?
A They have different volumes and different weights.

B They have different volumes, but equal masses.
C They have equal volumes and equal weights.
D They have equal volumes, but different masses.
5 A concrete post is carried up a very high mountain. At the top of the mountain, the gravitational
field is slightly weaker than at the bottom.
What is the effect of this weaker field on the mass and on the weight of the post at the top of the
mountain?
mass weight
A is less is less
M 16
arch
B is less is unchanged Question 4
Variant 2
C is unchanged is less
D is unchanged is unchanged
Physics O.L
Mechanics 77
6 Which is the value of a vector quantity?
A 200 V
B 100 kg / m3 M 16
arch
C 20 m / s, east Question 8
Variant 2
D 50 J / (kg °C)
What happens to the mass and what happens to the weight of the liquid in the cup?
mass weight
A decreases decreases June

16
B decreases stays the same Question 4

Variant 2
C stays the same decreases

8 The engine of a car produces a driving force of 5000 N on the car. Resistive forces R also act on
the car, as shown.
R 5000 N
June
16
Question 8
Variant 2
The car has a mass of 800 kg and an acceleration of 1.0 m / s2.
What is the value of R?
A 800 N B 4200 N C 5800 N D 8000 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 78

What happens to the mass and what happens to the weight of the liquid in the cup?
mass weight
June
16
B decreases stays the same Question 4

Variant 3
C stays the same decreases

10 Which list contains only vector quantities?
A energy, force, velocity

B speed, acceleration, force June
16
Question 7
C velocity, energy, acceleration Variant 3
D velocity, force, acceleration
11 Which list contains only vector quantities?
A acceleration, energy, force, mass

B acceleration, force, momentum, velocity N 16
OV
Question 9
C distance, energy, mass, speed Variant 2
D distance, momentum, power, speed
Physics O.L
Mechanics 79
12 An astronaut on the Moon weighs less than on Earth.
What is the reason for this difference, and how does his mass on the Moon compare with his
mass on Earth?
reason for weight difference mass on Moon

the Moon has a weaker
A less than on Earth
gravitational field
N 16
OV
same as on Earth Question 4
B gravitational field Variant 3

C less than on Earth
magnetic field
D same as on Earth
magnetic field
13 Which list contains only scalar quantities?
A acceleration, energy, force, mass

B acceleration, force, momentum, velocity N 16
OV
Question 9
C distance, energy, mass, speed Variant 3
D distance, momentum, speed, velocity
14 An object in a space probe above the Earth weighs 3.5 N. The gravitational field strength at the
height of the space probe is 7.0 N / kg.
The gravitational field strength on the Earth’s surface is 10 N / kg.
What are the mass and the weight of the object on the Earth’s surface?
mass / kg weig / N M 17
arch
Question 5
Variant 2
A 0.50 3.5
B 0.50 5.0
C 2.0 3.5
D 2.0 20
Physics O.L
Mechanics 80
15 A skydiver jumps from a stationary helicopter and reaches a steady vertical speed. She then
opens her parachute.
Which statement about the falling skydiver is correct?
A As her parachute opens, her acceleration is upwards.

B As she falls at a steady speed with her parachute open, her weight is zero. M 17
arch
C When she accelerates, the resultant force on her is zero. Question 6

Variant 2
D When she falls at a steady speed, air resistance is zero.
16 In which pair are both quantities measured in newtons?
A force and pressure

B force and weight
June
17
C mass and pressure Question 4

Variant 2
D mass and weight
17 A car travels forwards along a straight horizontal road. Only the horizontal forces acting on it are
shown.
air resistance
and friction
driving force
June
17
Question 7
Variant 2
The length of each arrow represents the size of each force.
How do these forces affect the motion of the car?
A The car moves at constant speed.

B The car moves backwards.
C The car slows down.
D The car’s forward speed increases.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 81
18 The diagram shows an object being acted upon by two forces.
6.0 N 3.0 N
June
17
Question 6
Variant 3
What is the size of the resultant force on the object?
A 2.0 N B 3.0 N C 9.0 N D 18 N
19 The gravitational field strength on the Earth is greater than the gravitational field strength on the
Moon. The Earth has an atmosphere, but the Moon does not.
Which speed-time graph represents the motion of a light ball dropped from a great height near
the surface of the Earth and near the surface of the Moon?
A B
Earth
Moon
speed speed
Moon
Earth N 17
OV
Question 3
Variant 2
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
Earth
Earth
speed speed
Moon Moon
0 0
0 time 0 time
Physics O.L
Mechanics 82
20 A body of mass m has a weight W in a location where the gravitational field strength is g.
Which statement about these quantities is correct?
A m and W are both forces.

B m and W are both vector quantities. N 17
OV
C m and W are related by the equation W = g. Question 5
m Variant 2
D m and W have the same unit.
21 Each diagram shows a metal plate with four parallel forces acting on it. These are the only forces
acting on the plates.
In which diagram is the plate in equilibrium? N 17

OV
Question 7
A B Variant 2
1.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N 1.0 N
2.0 N 1.0 N 1.0 N 2.0 N
C D
1.0 N 1.0 N 2.0 N 1.0 N
2.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 83
22 The diagram shows the vertical forces acting on a ball as it falls vertically through the air. The ball
does not reach terminal velocity.
air resistance
N 17
OV
Question 3
Variant 3
weight
Which row describes what happens to the resultant force on the ball and what happens to the
acceleration of the ball as it falls through the air?
resultant force acceleration
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
23 A spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.
spring
N 17
OV
Question 4
Variant 3
metal
Which name is given to the force that stretches the spring?
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight
Physics O.L
Mechanics 84
24 On the Moon, all objects fall with the same acceleration.

Which statement explains this?
A On the Moon, all objects have the same weight.

B The Moon has a smaller gravitational field strength than the Earth. N 17
OV
Question 5
C The weight of an object is directly proportional to its mass. Variant 3
D The weight of an object is inversely proportional to its mass.
25 A parachutist is falling through the air at terminal velocity.
M 18
arch
Question 2
Variant 2
Which statement about the parachutist is correct?
A Every force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his acceleration is equal to zero.
B Every force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his velocity is equal to zero.
C The resultant force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his acceleration is equal to
zero.
D The resultant force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his velocity is equal to zero.
26 The gravitational field strength on the Moon is 1.6 N / kg.
An astronaut has a mass of 75 kg.
M 18
arch
Question 5
Variant 2
What is the weight of the astronaut on the Moon?
A 47 N B 75 N C 120 N D 750 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 85
27 A ball is dropped in an evacuated tube. A series of photographs is taken at equal time intervals
from the time of release. Another ball of the same size but twice the mass is also dropped in the
same evacuated tube and photographed.
Which diagram shows the motion of the heavier ball?

June
18
heavier ball (mass ×2) Question 3

Variant 2
first ball A B C D
28 Which statement about the mass and the weight of an object is correct?
A They are both affected by changes in the acceleration of free fall.

B They are both forces.
C They have different units.
June
18
Question 4
Variant 2
D Weight is calculated by dividing mass by the acceleration of free fall.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 86
29 Which statement about the mass of an object is correct?
A It is equal to the density divided by the volume.

B It is equal to weight multiplied by the gravitational field strength.
C It is the effect of a gravitational field on the object.
June
18
Question 5
Variant 2
D It is the property that resists a change in velocity.
30 A person steps onto a bathroom scales.
The bathroom scales records both mass and weight.
Which row shows the readings on the scales?

June
18
Question 4
mass weight Variant 3
A 60 N 600 kg
B 60 kg 600 N
C 600 kg 60 N
D 600 N 60 kg
31 An object has a weight of 7600 N in a gravitational field of strength 100 N / kg.
June
18
Question 5
What is the mass of the object? Variant 3
A 76 kg B 760 N C 7600 g D 76 000 N
32 An astronaut orbits the Earth in a space station.
Which is a vector quantity?
A the mass of the astronaut

June
18
Question 8
Variant 3
B the speed of the satellite
C the temperature inside the satellite
D the weight of the astronaut
Physics O.L
Mechanics 87
Mark Scheme
1. B 17. C
2. B 18. B
3. D 19. C
4. D 20. C
5. C 21. C
6. C 22. A
7. A 23. D
8. B 24. C
9. A 25. C
10. D 26. C
11. B 27. B
12. B 28. C
13. C 29. D
14. B 30. B
15. A 31. A
16. B 32. D
Physics O.L
Mechanics 88
5. Centripetal Force
1 A satellite orbits the Earth above the atmosphere at a constant speed.
The diagram shows the satellite at one point in its circular orbit around the Earth.
Which labelled arrow shows the direction of the resultant force on the satellite at the position
shown?
direction of rotation
of satellite
A June
16
Question 4
Variant 1
D B
Earth
satellite
C
2 An object travels in a circular path at constant speed.
Which statement about the object is correct?
A It has changing kinetic energy.

B It has changing momentum. N 16
OV
Question 6
C It has constant velocity. Variant 1
D It is not accelerating.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 89
Mark Scheme
1. D
2. B
Physics O.L
Mechanics 90
1 The diagram shows an object moving at a constant speed in a circular path in the direction
shown.
A force acts on the object to keep it in the circular path.
In which labelled direction does this force act, when the object is in the position shown?
object
A
M 16
arch
D B Question 6
Variant 2
path of
object
2 An object moves in a circle at constant speed.

Which statement about the force needed on the object is correct?
A A force away from the centre of the circle keeps the object moving in the circle.
B
C
A force in the direction of motion of the object keeps it moving in the circle.
A force towards the centre of the circle keeps the object moving in the circle.
June
16
Question 5
Variant 3
D No force is needed to keep the object moving at constant speed in the circle.
3 A car moves in a circular path as it turns a corner on a horizontal road.

The car moves at constant speed.
path of car
car
direction
of travel M 17
arch
Question 7
Variant 2
Which description of the forces acting on the car is correct?

A All the forces are balanced as the car is moving at constant speed.
B The forces are unbalanced and the resultant force acts away from the centre of the circle.
C The forces are unbalanced and the resultant force acts towards the centre of the circle.
D The forces are unbalanced and the resultant force is in the direction of travel of the car.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 91
Mark Scheme
1. B
2. C
3. C
Physics O.L
Mechanics 92
6. Hooke's Law
N 96
OV
Question 6
Variant 1
N 94
OV
Question 5
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 93
6. Hooke's Law
3 The table shows the length of a wire as the load on it is increased.
load / N 0 10 20 30
length / cm 50.0 52.1 54.1 56.3

June2002
Question 8
Variant 1
Which subtraction should be made to find the extension caused by the 20 N load?
A 54.1 cm – 0 cm
B 54.1 cm – 50.0 cm
C 54.1 cm – 52.1 cm
D 56.3 cm – 54.1 cm
4 Objects with different masses are hung on a spring. The diagram shows how much the spring
stretches.
10 cm
20 cm
June
17
Question 7
30 cm Variant 1
100 g
The extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it.
What is the mass of object M?
A 110 g B 150 g C 200 g D 300 g
Physics O.L
Mechanics 94
6. Hooke's Law
5 A student adds weights to an elastic cord. He measures the length of the cord for each weight.
He then plots a graph from the results, as shown.
N 11
OV
Question 9
Variant 1
0
0 1 2 weight / N
Which length has he plotted on the vertical axis?
A measured length
B original length
C (measured length – original length)
D (measured length + original length)
spring
metal N 17
OV
Question 4
Variant 1
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight
Physics O.L
Mechanics 95
6. Hooke's Law
Mark Scheme
1. D
2. C
3. B
4. C
5. C
6. D
Physics O.L
Mechanics 96
6. Hooke's Law
1 The diagrams show a steel spring and a graph of its length against the load applied to it.
16
14
length / cm
12
N 13
OV
Question 7
10 Variant 3
steel spring
length 8
6
load
4
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
load / N
What is the extension of the spring when a load of 20 N is applied to it?
A 3.0 cm B 4.5 cm C 5.0 cm D 8.0 cm
2 Different weights are hung from a spring. The diagram shows the original length of the spring,
and the lengths when different weights are added.
15 cm
25 cm
June
15
Question 7
35 cm Variant 2
20 N
W
The extension of the spring is directly proportional to the weight hung from it.
What is the weight of W?
A 30 N B 35 N C 40 N D 45 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 97
6. Hooke's Law
3 The extension-load graph for a spring is shown. The unstretched length of the spring is 17.0 cm.
3
extension / cm
June
15
Question 7
2 Variant 3
0
0 1 2 3 4
load / N
When an object is hung from the spring, the length of the spring is 19.2 cm.
What is the weight of the object?
A 1.4 N B 1.6 N C 2.6 N D 3.0 N
4 A spring obeys Hooke’s law.

Which graph is obtained by plotting the extension of the spring against the load applied?
A B
extension extension
0 0
0 load 0 load
C D
M 16
arch
extension extension Question 7
Variant 2
0 0
0 load 0 load
Physics O.L
Mechanics 98
6. Hooke's Law
5 The diagrams show a spring and a graph of the length of the spring against the load applied to it.
8
7
length / cm
6
N 16
OV
5 Question 7
spring Variant 2
length 4
3
load
2
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
load / N
What is the extension of the spring when a load of 40 N is applied to it?
A 1.5 cm B 2.5 cm C 4.0 cm D 6.5 cm
6 Different loads are hung on a spring. The diagram shows the length of the spring with and without
the loads attached.
20 cm
40 cm
65 cm
N 16
OV
Question 7
200 N Variant 3
400 N
What is the extension of the spring when the load is 400 N?

A 5 cm B 25 cm C 40 cm D 45 cm
Physics O.L
Mechanics 99
6. Hooke's Law
7 A spring which obeys Hooke’s Law has an unstretched length of 10 cm.

A load of 20 N is hung from the spring.
The new length of the spring is 36 cm. June

17
Question 6
What is the spring constant k of the spring? Variant 2
A 0.56 N / cm B 0.77 N / cm C 1.3 N / cm D 1.8 N / cm
spring
N 17
OV
Question 4
metal Variant 2
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight
9 A load is hung from a steel wire. The load is increased.
The length of the wire increases until the limit of proportionality is reached.
The load is now increased slightly.
What happens? June

18
Question 6
A The extension of the wire increases and the wire no longer obeys Hooke’s law. Variant 3
B The extension of the wire decreases and the wire no longer obeys Hooke’s law.
C The extension of the wire increases and it obeys Hooke’s law.
D The extension of the wire decreases and it obeys Hooke’s law.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 100
6. Hooke's Law
10 The graph shows how the length of a spring changes when the stretching force is increased.
30
length of 25
spring / cm
20 N 18
OV
Question 6
Variant 2
15
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
force / N
In the Hooke’s law region, what is the spring constant for this spring?
A 0.20 N / cm B 0.22 N / cm C 0.28 N / cm D 0.33 N / cm
Physics O.L
Mechanics 101
6. Hooke's Law
Mark Scheme
1. A
2. C
3. D
4. A
5. A
6. D
7. B
8. D
9. A
10. D
Physics O.L
Mechanics 102
7. Moment
June2000
Question 8
Variant 1
June2000
Question 9
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 103
7. Moment
June
94
Question 6
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 104
7. Moment
June
95
Question 5
Variant 1
5 A child tries to push over a large empty oil drum.
Where should the drum be pushed to topple it over with least force?
June2002
A B C D Question 9
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 105
7. Moment
6 The diagram shows a balance being used to find the weight of a baby. The weight of the basket
can be ignored.
At equilibrium, the pivot is nearer to the weight W than to the baby.
centre of mass
of beam
pivot
W
baby
June
11
Question 5
Variant 1
basket
What is the weight of the baby?
A less than W
B more than W
C W
D impossible to tell
7 A uniform rod rests on a pivot at its centre. The rod is not attached to the pivot. Forces are then
applied to the rod in four different ways, as shown. The weight of the rod can be ignored.
Which diagram shows the rod in equilibrium?
A B
100 N 100 N 100 N
100 N
C D N 11
OV
Question 7
Variant 1
100 N
100 N 100 N 100 N 100 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 106
7. Moment
8 The diagram shows a handle with three forces, each 100 N, applied to it. The handle is free to
move.
100 N
June
12
100 N Question 8
Variant 1
100 N
handle
pivot
What is the effect of the forces on the handle?
A The handle will move downwards.

B The handle will not move.
C The handle will turn anticlockwise (to the left).
D The handle will turn clockwise (to the right).
9 The diagram shows a force being applied to a lever to lift a heavy weight.
force
pivot lever
heavy weight
Which change would enable the heavy weight to be lifted with a smaller force?
A Move the force to the right.

B Move the heavy weight to the right.
June
13
C Move the force to the left. Question 8

Variant 1
D Move the pivot to the left.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 107
7. Moment
10 The diagrams show three uniform beams P, Q and R, each pivoted at its centre.
The two forces acting on each beam are also shown.
2.0 m 1.0 m
P
4.0 N 4.0 N
4.0 m 2.0 m
Q
2.0 N 5.0 N
June
16
Question 6
Variant 1
2.0 m 4.0 m
R
1.5 N 1.0 N
Which beams rotate clockwise?
A P and Q only
B P and R only
C Q and R only
D P, Q and R
11 The diagram shows a uniform bridge, 4.0 m long and weighing 10 000 N.
The bridge is pivoted at one end. A force at the other end gradually increases until the bridge
begins to lift.
lifting
bridge force
pivot
June
17
4.0 m Question 8
Variant 1
What is the lifting force as the bridge starts to move upwards?
A 2500 N B 5000 N C 10 000 N D 20 000 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 108
7. Moment
12 A uniform beam XY is 100 cm long and weighs 4.0 N.
80 cm
60 cm
10 cm
X Y
centre
pivot
of beam F
8.0 N
The beam rests on a pivot 60 cm from end X.

N 17
OV
Question 6
Variant 1
A load of 8.0 N hangs from the beam 10 cm from end X.
The beam is kept balanced by a force F acting on the beam 80 cm from end X.
What is the magnitude of force F ?
A 8.0 N B 18 N C 22 N D 44 N
13 A balloon and a mass are attached to a rod that is pivoted at P.
balloon
45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5
P
cm
mass
The balloon is filled with helium, a gas less dense than air, so that it applies an upward force on
the rod.
The rod is horizontal and stationary.
Which action causes the rod to rotate clockwise?
A Move both the balloon and mass 10 cm to the left. June

18
Question 7
Variant 1
B Move both the balloon and mass 10 cm to the right.
C Move both the balloon and mass to the 25 cm mark.
D Move the balloon to the 20 cm mark and the mass to the 30 cm mark.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 109
7. Moment
Mark Scheme
1. A
2. D
3. A
4. D
5. A
6. A
7. C
8. C
9. C
10. C
11. B
12. C
13. B
Physics O.L
Mechanics 110
7. Moment
1 A wooden bar is pivoted at its centre so that it can rotate freely. Two equal forces F are applied to
the bar.
In which diagram is the turning effect greatest?
A B
pivot
June
14
Question 6
Variant 2
F F F
F
C D
pivot F
F
F
F
2 The diagram shows a non-uniform beam of weight 120 N, pivoted at one end. The beam is kept in
equilibrium by force F.
20 cm 60 cm
June
16
Question 6
Variant 2
pivot
centre of
mass of beam
weight F
120 N
What is the value of force F?

A 30 N B 40 N C 360 N D 480 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 111
7. Moment
3 A long plank XY lies on the ground. A load of 120 N is placed on it, at a distance of 0.50 m from
end X, as shown.
End Y is lifted off the ground. The upward force needed to do this is 65 N.
load 65 N
June
16
Question 6
Variant 3
X Y
0.50 m 1.5 m 2.0 m ground

120 N W
In the diagram, W is the weight of the plank, acting at its mid-point.
What is the value of W ?
A 35 N B 47 N C 100 N D 133 N
4 The diagram shows a wooden beam of weight 20 N. The centre of mass of the beam is labelled
M.
There is a pivot at one end of the beam. The beam is kept horizontal by an upward force, F.
2.0 m
1.2 m June
17
pivot Question 8
Variant 2
M wooden beam
20 N
What is the magnitude of F ?
A 12 N B 20 N C 30 N D 33 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 112
7. Moment
5 The diagram shows a man holding a sack and barrow stationary. He applies a vertical force to
the handle.
The centre of mass and the weight of the sack and barrow are shown. The wheel acts as a pivot.
force
exerted
by man
June
17
centre of mass Question 7

Variant 3
of sack and barrow
20 cm
80 cm
15 cm 45 cm
weight of
sack and barrow
200 N
What is the magnitude of the vertical force exerted by the man?
A 38 N B 50 N C 67 N D 200 N
6 An object is pivoted at point P. A student ties a length of string to a peg on the object. He pulls
the string with a force F.
string
s t N 17
OV
Question 6
peg Variant 2
r
q P
object
What is the moment of the force F about the point P?
A F×q B F×r C F×s D F×t
Physics O.L
Mechanics 113
7. Moment
7 A pair of cutters is used to cut a rope.
blade
handle
P
Q N 17
OV
Question 6
R Variant 3
S
blade
handle
Where should the rope be positioned and at which labelled points should the hands be positioned
to produce the greatest cutting force?
rope hands
positioned positioned
A P R
B P S
C Q R
D Q S
8 A uniform rod XY of weight 2.0 N has a length of 80 cm.

The rod is suspended by a thread 20 cm from end X. A weight of 5.0 N is suspended from end X.
thread
20 cm uniform rod
M 18
arch
X Y Question 8
Variant 2
80 cm
5.0 N
A student hangs a 6.0 N weight on the rod so that it is in equilibrium.
What is the distance of the 6.0 N weight from end X?

A 6 cm B 10 cm C 26 cm D 30 cm
Physics O.L
Mechanics 114
7. Moment
9 A beam is pivoted at one end, as shown.
40 cm beam
X
pivot
June
18
Question 7
Variant 2
6.0 N
The beam weighs 6.0 N and its weight acts at a point X, 40 cm from the pivot.
A force of 4.0 N is applied to the beam causing it to balance horizontally.
In which direction and where is the 4.0 N force applied?
A downwards at 20 cm to the left of X

B downwards at 20 cm to the right of X
C upwards at 20 cm to the left of X
D upwards at 20 cm to the right of X
10 The diagram shows a uniform metre rule pivoted at the 30 cm mark.
metre rule
0 cm 30 cm 70 cm 100 cm June
18
Question 7
Variant 3
pivot
6.0 N 2.0 N
The rule balances when a weight of 6.0 N is hanging from the zero mark and a weight of 2.0 N is
hanging from the 70 cm mark.
What is the weight of the rule?
A 2.0 N B 5.0 N C 6.0 N D 13.0 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 115
7. Moment
11 The diagram shows a uniform bar of length 120 cm and weight W. The bar is pivoted at a point
40 cm from the left end of the bar.
A load of W is suspended from the right-hand end of the bar.

2
A downward force F is applied to the left-hand end of the bar to keep it in equilibrium.
0 40 cm 60 cm 120 cm
pivot bar N 18
OV
Question 7
F bar’s weight Variant 3
W
W
2
What is the magnitude of force F ?
A W B W C 3W D 2W
2 2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 116
7. Moment
Mark Scheme
1. A
2. A
3. C
4. A
5. B
6. C
7. D
8. D
9. D
10. B
11. C
Physics O.L
Mechanics 117
8. Center of Mass & Stability
N 95
OV
Question 6
Variant 1
N 94
OV
Question 6
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 118
June
94
Question 5
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 119
4 Passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses.
upper deck
lower deck
Why is this?
A They would cause the bus to become less stable. June

12
Question 7
B They would cause the bus to slow down. Variant 1
C They would increase the kinetic energy of the bus.

D They would lower the centre of mass of the bus.
5 The diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass of
each object has been marked with a cross.
Which object is the most stable?
A B C D
N 12
OV
Question 7
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 120
6 A plane lamina with centre of mass X touches the ground at point P.

Which diagram shows the lamina in equilibrium?
A B
June
14
Question 6
Variant 1
X
X
70°
20°
P P
C D
X X
45° 45°
P P
7 In which situation is no resultant force needed?
A a car changing direction at a steady speed

B a car moving in a straight line at a steady speed N 14
OV
Question 7
C a car slowing down Variant 1
D a car speeding up
Physics O.L
Mechanics 121
8 Four objects are each acted on by only two forces, as shown.
Which object is in equilibrium?
June
15
Question 6
Variant 1
A B C D
1.0 N 2.0 N 3.0 N 4.0 N
2.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N 4.0 N
9 The diagrams show four table lamps resting on a table. The position of the centre of mass of
each lamp is labelled X.
Which lamp is the most stable?
A B C D
X X
X XX
X
N 17
OV
Question 7
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 122
10 The diagram shows a bird in flight.
In which direction does the weight of the bird act?
June
07
Question 4
Variant 1
A C
11 A force acts on a moving rubber ball.
How many of the following changes could happen to the ball because of the force?
• a change in direction
• a change in shape June

07
Question 8
• a change in mass Variant 1
• a change in speed
A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4
12 What are the correct units for force and for weight?
force weight
A kg kg
B kg N
N 07
OV
Question 4
Variant 1
C N kg
D N N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 123
13 A light aircraft stands at rest on the ground. It stands on three wheels, one at the front and two
further back.
Which point could be its centre of mass?
C D
June
07
A B Question 9
Variant 1
14 An empty glass is placed on a join between two tables as shown. The glass remains stable.
Which point is the centre of mass of the glass?
N 07
OV
Question 8
B Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 124
Mark Scheme
1. A
2. B
3. C
4. A
5. A
6. B
7. B
8. B
9. B
10. D
11. C
12. D
13. B
14. C
Physics O.L
Mechanics 125
1 Which combination of forces produces a resultant force acting towards the right?
N 11
OV
Question 6
Variant 2
A B C D
5N 4N 6N 5N
10 N 5N 10 N 7N
2N 3N 4N 3N
2 On which ball is a non-zero resultant force acting?
A B
a ball moving at constant a ball at rest on a bench
speed on a smooth surface
June
12
direction of Question 8
Variant 2
movement
C D
a free-falling ball which a ball floating on water
has just been released
water
direction of
movement
Physics O.L
Mechanics 126
3 The diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass of
each object has been marked with a cross.
Which object is the most stable?
A B C D
N 12
OV
Question 7
Variant 3
4 The diagram shows a uniform, flat metal sheet hanging freely from a nail at point A. A weight also
hangs freely on a string tied to A.
One of the labelled points is at the centre of mass of the metal sheet.
Which point is at the centre of mass?
nail N 14
OV
A Question 8
Variant 3
metal sheet
weight
Physics O.L
Mechanics 127
5 The diagrams show four solid cones. The centre of mass of each cone is marked by a point
labelled M.
Which cone is the most stable?

N 15
OV
A B C D Question 7
Variant 2
M M M M
6 A heavy truck on wheels has a platform attached to it.
A man stands on the platform.
The truck does not fall over.
Which position A, B, C or D could be the centre of mass of the whole system (truck, platform and
man)?
man
N 15
OV
Question 7
Variant 3
truck D
platform
C
B
A
Physics O.L
Mechanics 128
7 The lamp in the diagram is not very stable and falls over easily.
shade
N 17
OV
Question 7
Variant 3
stem
base
Which row shows changes that would definitely make the lamp more stable?
base centre of gravity
A narrower higher
B narrower lower
C wider higher
D wider lower
8 The diagram shows a bird in flight. The bird is flying in a horizontal direction to the right.
In which direction does air resistance act on the bird?
M 18
arch
Question 4
Variant 2
D B
Physics O.L
Mechanics 129
9 A wooden plank rests in equilibrium on two rocks on opposite sides of a narrow stream.
Three forces P, Q and R act on the plank.
P R
plank
M 18
arch
Question 9
Variant 2
How are the sizes of the forces related?
A P+Q=R
B P+R=Q
C P=Q=R
D P=Q+R
10 A spacecraft is travelling in space with no resultant force and no resultant moment acting on it.
Which statement about the spacecraft is correct?
A Its direction is changing.

B It is in equilibrium. June
18
Question 8
C Its speed is decreasing. Variant 2
D Its speed is increasing.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 130
11 Point X is the centre of mass of a lamina in the shape of a triangle with sides of equal length. The
top of the triangle is cut off along the dotted line shown.
N 18
OV
Question 7
Variant 2
What happens to the centre of mass, X?
A moves towards the bottom of the page

B moves to the left
C moves to the right
D moves towards the top of the page
Physics O.L
Mechanics 131
Mark Scheme
1. B
2. C
3. A
4. C
5. D
6. B
7. D
8. D
9. B
10. B
11. A
Physics O.L
Mechanics 132
9. Momentum & Impulse, Collision
1 An object of mass 50 kg accelerates from a velocity of 2.0 m / s to a velocity of 10 m / s in the same

direction.
What is the impulse provided to cause this acceleration?

June
16
A 250 N s B 400 N s C 850 N s D 2500 N s Question 7

Variant 1
2 Two cars, P and Q, have different masses and different speeds as shown.
mass mass
1000 kg 500 kg
speed speed
10 m / s 20 m / s
car P car Q
Which row correctly compares the momentum and the kinetic energy of P with the momentum
and the kinetic energy of Q?
momentum kinetic energy
A P greater than Q P equal to Q

B P equal to Q P equal to Q
N 16
OV
Question 8
Variant 1
C P equal to Q P less than Q
D P less than Q P greater than Q
3 A bullet of mass 0.10 kg travels horizontally at a speed of 600 m / s. It strikes a stationary wooden
block of mass 1.90 kg resting on a frictionless, horizontal surface.
The bullet stays in the block.
What is the speed of the bullet and the block immediately after the impact?
June
17
Question 9
Variant 1
A 30 m / s B 32 m / s C 60 m / s D 134 m / s
Physics O.L
Mechanics 133
4 A tennis ball of mass 0.060 kg travels horizontally at a speed of 25 m / s. The ball hits a tennis
racket and rebounds horizontally at a speed of 40 m / s.
racket
ball
25 m / s 40 m / s
N 17
OV
Question 9
Variant 1
before hitting racket after hitting racket

The ball is in contact with the racket for 50 ms.
What force does the racket exert on the ball?
A 0.018 N B 0.078 N C 18 N D 78 N
5 Which expression gives the momentum of an object?

A mass × acceleration
June
18
B mass × gravitational field strength Question 9

Variant 1
C mass × velocity
D 1
× mass × (velocity)2
6 A resultant force of 4.0 N acts on an object of mass 0.50 kg for 3.0 seconds.
What is the change in velocity caused by this force? N 18

OV
Question 6
Variant 1
A 4.0 m / s B 6.0 m / s C 12 m / s D 24 m / s
7 A moving ball with a momentum of 25 kg m / s collides head-on with a wall.

wall
ball
N 18
OV
Question 8
Variant 1
It rebounds from the wall with the same speed but in the opposite direction. The time of collision
is 50 ms.
What is the average force exerted on the wall by the ball during the collision?
A 0.50 N B 1.00 N C 500 N D 1000 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 134
Mark Scheme
1. B
2. C
3. A
4. D
5. C
6. D
7. D
Physics O.L
Mechanics 135
1 A gas molecule strikes the wall of a container. The molecule rebounds with the same speed.
wall wall
gas molecule gas molecule
June
16
Question 8
Variant 3
before hitting the wall after hitting the wall
What happens to the kinetic energy and what happens to the momentum of the molecule?
kinetic energy momentum
A changes changes
B changes stays the same
C stays the same changes
2 A girl of mass 50 kg runs at 6.0 m / s.
What is her momentum?

N 16
OV
Question 8
Variant 2
A 300 J B 300 kg m / s C 900 J D 900 kg m / s
3 A vehicle of mass 900 kg is travelling with a velocity of 20 m / s.
What is the momentum of the vehicle?

N 16
OV
Question 8
Variant 3
A 45 kg m / s B 450 kg m / s C 18 000 kg m / s D 180 000 kg m / s
Physics O.L
Mechanics 136
4 A moving body undergoes a change of momentum.
What is a unit for change of momentum? M 17

arch
Question 8
Variant 2
A Nm B N/m C Ns D N/s
5 A ball of mass 2.0 kg is travelling at a speed of 12 m / s. It moves towards an object of mass 3.0 kg
which is at rest.
12 m / s
3.0 kg June
17
2.0 kg at rest Question 9

Variant 2
The ball hits the object and sticks to it.
Which row gives the total momentum, and the speed of both objects immediately after the
collision?
total momentum speed

kg m / s m/s
A 0 4.8
B 0 8.0
C 24 4.8
D 24 8.0
Physics O.L
Mechanics 137
6 A ball has a mass of 0.30 kg. It moves horizontally with a speed of 3.0 m / s in the direction shown.
The ball hits a wall.
wall wall
ball ball
3.0 m / s 2.0 m / s
N 17
OV
Question 9
Variant 2
before hitting the wall after hitting the wall
The ball rebounds from the wall with a horizontal speed of 2.0 m / s.
What is the change in momentum of the ball?
A 0.30 kg m / s B 1.0 kg m / s C 1.5 kg m / s D 5.0 kg m / s
7 An object has a mass of 60 kg.
It decelerates from 50 m / s to 20 m / s when a resultant force of 300 N acts on it.
For how long does the force act? N 17

OV
Question 9
Variant 3
A 0.071 s B 0.17 s C 6.0 s D 14 s
8 A stone of mass 0.12 kg is fired from a catapult. The velocity of the stone changes from 0 to
5.0 m / s in 0.60 s.
What is the average resultant force acting on the stone while it is being fired?
M 18
arch
Question 7
Variant 2
A 1.0 N B 2.5 N C 3.6 N D 8.3 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 138
9 A ball of mass 0.16 kg is moving forwards at a speed of 0.50 m / s. A second ball of mass 0.10 kg
is stationary. The first ball strikes the second ball. The second ball moves forwards at a speed of
0.50 m / s.
What is the speed of the first ball after the collision?

M 18
arch
Question 10
Variant 2
A 0.0 m / s B 0.19 m / s C 0.31 m / s D 0.50 m / s
10 A student cycles along a level road at a speed of 5.0 m / s.
The total mass of the student and bicycle is 120 kg.
The student applies the brakes and stops. The braking distance is 10 m.
M 18
arch
What is the average braking force? Question 12

Variant 2
A 150 N B 300 N C 15 000 N D 30 000 N
11 An object decelerates from 25.0 m / s to 5.0 m / s in a time of 4.0 s.
It has a mass of 50 kg. June

18
Question 6
What is the resultant force on the object? Variant 2
A 0.63 N B 10 N C 250 N D 4000 N
12 A car of mass 1000 kg travelling at 8.0 m / s collides with a lorry of mass 3000 kg that is travelling
at 2.0 m / s in the same direction. After colliding, the two vehicles stick together.
June
18
Question 9
What is their speed after the collision? Variant 2
A 2.0 m / s B 2.5 m / s C 3.5 m / s D 5.0 m / s
Physics O.L
Mechanics 139
13 A visitor to a fairground throws a soft object of mass 0.12 kg at a coconut of mass 0.48 kg. The
soft object stops moving when it hits the coconut. In order to dislodge the coconut, it must be
made to move at 0.10 m/s.
What is the minimum speed with which the visitor should throw the soft object in order to dislodge
the coconut?
A 0.20 m/s
B 0.40 m/s
C 2.0 m/s
June
18
Question 9
Variant 3
D 4.0 m/s
14 An object of mass 3.0 kg, travelling at a speed of 6.0 m / s, collides with an object of mass 2.0 kg,
travelling in the opposite direction at a speed of 2.0 m / s.
6.0 m / s 2.0 m / s
3.0 kg 2.0 kg
The objects stick together during the collision.
What is the speed and direction of the combined mass after the collision?
A 4.4 m / s to the left

B 4.4 m / s to the right
N 18
OV
C 2.8 m / s to the left Question 8
Variant 2
D 2.8 m / s to the right
15 An object accelerates from 10 m / s to 30 m / s in 4.0 seconds.
The accelerating force is 150 N.
What is the mass of the object?

N 18
OV
Question 6
Variant 3
A 0.033 kg B 5.0 kg C 7.5 kg D 30 kg
Physics O.L
Mechanics 140
Mark Scheme
1. C
2. B
3. C
4. C
5. C
6. C
7. C
8. A
9. B
10. A
11. C
12. C
13. B
14. D
15. D
Physics O.L
Mechanics 141
10. Adding Vectors
1 Which diagram shows the magnitude and direction of the resultant R of the two forces F1 and F2?
A B C D
F1 F1 F1 F1
R R
R R
F2 F2 F2 F2
N 16
OV
Question 7
Variant 1
2 A ball of weight 1.2 N drops through the air at terminal velocity.
A sudden gust of wind exerts a horizontal force of 0.5 N on the ball from the left.
Which diagram shows the resultant force on the ball while the wind is blowing?
A B
ball 0.5 N ball 0.5 N
1.2 N resultant 1.2 N

force resultant
force
June
17
Question 7
Variant 1
C D
1.2 N
1.2 N resultant
force
ball 0.5 N
resultant ball 0.5 N

force
1.2 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 142
10. Adding Vectors
3 The diagram shows an incomplete scale drawing to find the resultant of two 10 N forces acting at
a point in the directions shown.
10 N
10 N
N 17
OV
Question 8
Variant 1
What is the magnitude of the resultant force?
A 7.5 N B 8.6 N C 18 N D 20 N
4 Which diagram shows two forces X and Y with their resultant force?
resultant
resultant
Y
X Y
X
A B
Sp 16
resultant Question 11
Variant 2
resultant
Y X
Y
C D
Physics O.L
Mechanics 143
10. Adding Vectors
Mark Scheme
1. A
2. C
3. C
4. C
Physics O.L
Mechanics 144
10. Adding Vectors
1 An object is acted upon by a 3 N force and by a 4 N force.

Each diagram shows the two forces.
Which diagram also shows the resultant X of these two forces?
June
16
A B C D Question 7
Variant 2
3N 3N 3N
X
4N 4N 4N X
X X 3N
4N
2 The diagram shows the only two forces F1 and F2 acting on an object. The magnitude of each
force is represented by the length of each arrow.
F1
June
17
110° Question 8
Variant 3
F2
The resultant force acting on the object is R.
Which vector diagram shows how forces F1 and F2 add to produce R?
A B
F1 R
F2
110° R 70°
F1
F2
C D
F1 R
F2
110° R 70°
F1
F2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 145
10. Adding Vectors
Mark Scheme
1. C
2. D
Physics O.L
Mechanics 146
11. Energy, Power & Efficiency
June
2000
Question 10
Variant 1
N 93
OV
Question 8
Variant 1
N 93
OV
Question 9
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 147
N 96
OV
Question 8
Variant 1
N 94
OV
Question 8
Variant 1
N 95
OV
Question 8
Variant 1
N 98
OV
Question 7
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 148
June 95
Question 7
Variant 1
9 Which device is designed to convert chemical energy into kinetic energy (energy of motion)?
A an a.c. generator
B a battery-powered torch
June 2002
C a car engine Question 10

Variant 1
D a wind-up mechanical clock
Physics O.L
Mechanics 149
10 Which energy resource is used to generate electricity by first boiling water?

A hydroelectric
B nuclear fission June
11
C tides Question 9
Variant 1
D waves
11 Two farmers use an electrically powered elevator to lift bales of hay. All the bales of hay have the
same mass.
bale of hay
As sunset approaches, they increase the speed of the motor so that more bales are lifted up in a
given time.
How does this affect the work done in lifting each bale and the useful output power of the motor?
work done in useful output power

lifting each bale of the motor
A increases decreases
B increases increases
June
11
Question 10
Variant 1
C no change decreases
D no change increases
12 A force F moves a load from the bottom of a slope to the top.
F p
d
N 11
OV
loa
Question 10
Variant 1
The work done by the force depends on the size of the force, and on a distance.
What is this distance?
A p B q C r D p+q
Physics O.L
Mechanics 150
13 In which pair of energy sources are both sources renewable?

A oil and coal
B oil and tidal
C tidal and geothermal
June
12
Question 9
Variant 1
D tidal and nuclear fission
14 An object on a thread is swinging between X and Z, as shown in the diagram. It is momentarily at

rest at X and at Z.
thread
June
12
Question 10
X Z Variant 1
An incomplete word equation about the energy of the object is shown below.
gravitational potential energy = kinetic energy + ……… energy + energy losses

at X at Y at Y
Which form of energy is needed to complete the word equation?
A chemical
B gravitational potential
C internal
D strain
Physics O.L
Mechanics 151
15 An escalator (moving stairs) and a lift (elevator) are both used to carry passengers from the same
underground railway platform up to street level.
June
13
Question 10
Variant 1
escalator lift
The escalator takes 20 seconds to carry a man to street level. The useful work done is W. The
useful power developed is P. The lift takes 30 seconds to carry the same man to street level.
How much useful work is done by the lift, and how much useful power is developed by the lift?
useful work useful power
done by lift developed by lift
A more than W less than P

B more than W P
C W less than P
D W P
16 Some energy sources are reliably available at all times, and some are not.
Which row shows three sources all in their correct columns?
available at all times not available at all times
A geothermal nuclear fission, solar N 13

OV
Question 9
B geothermal, nuclear fission solar Variant 1
C solar, nuclear fission geothermal

D solar nuclear fission, geothermal
Physics O.L
Mechanics 152
17 A woman in a factory has to lift a box on to a shelf.
high shelf
N 13
OV
Question 10
box Variant 1
low shelf
Which action involves the woman in doing the least amount of work?
A lifting the box quickly to the high shelf

B lifting the box slowly to the high shelf
C lifting the box to the low shelf first then lifting it to the high shelf
D lifting the box to the low shelf instead of to the high shelf
18 Which energy transfer takes place when a matchstick burns?
A chemical to thermal
B chemical to nuclear
C nuclear to chemical
June
14
Question 8
Variant 1
D thermal to chemical
19 Which energy resource is used to generate electricity without using any moving parts?
A geothermal
B hydroelectric
C nuclear
June
15
Question 8
Variant 1
D solar
Physics O.L
Mechanics 153
20 A cyclist travels down a hill from rest at point X, without pedalling.
The cyclist applies his brakes and the cycle stops at point Y.
X June
15
Question 9
Variant 1
hill
Y
Which energy changes have taken place between X and Y?
A gravitational potential → kinetic → thermal (heat)
B gravitational potential → thermal (heat) → kinetic
C kinetic → gravitational potential → thermal (heat)
D kinetic → thermal (heat) → gravitational potential
21 What needs to be known to calculate the work done by a force acting on an object?
the distance
the time for
the size of the force
which the force
the force moves the
acts
object
A key N 15
OV
Question 8
B = needed Variant 1
C = not needed
D
22 Electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.
In which order is the energy transferred in this process?
A nuclear fuel → generator → reactor and boiler → turbines
B nuclear fuel → generator → turbines → reactor and boiler N 15

OV
Question 9
C nuclear fuel → reactor and boiler → generator → turbines Variant 1
D nuclear fuel → reactor and boiler → turbines → generator
Physics O.L
Mechanics 154
23 Energy is released in some nuclear reactions.
Which nuclear reaction takes place in a nuclear power station, and which nuclear reaction takes
place in the Sun?
nuclear power
the Sun
station
A fission fission
June
16
Question 9
B fission fusion Variant 1
C fusion fission
D fusion fusion
24 A lorry of mass 4000 kg is travelling at a speed of 4.0 m / s.
A car has a mass of 1000 kg. The kinetic energy of the car is equal to the kinetic energy of the
lorry.
What is the speed of the car? June

16
Question 10
A 2.0 m / s B 4.0 m / s C 8.0 m / s D 16.0 m / s Variant 1
25 A force acts on an object and causes the object to move a certain distance, in the same direction
as the force.
Which row represents a situation in which the largest amount of work is done on the object by the
force?
force / N distance moved / m
A 2.0 40.0
B 10.0 2.0 June
16
Question 11
C 20.0 6.0 Variant 1
D 100.0 1.0
Physics O.L
Mechanics 155
26 A car of mass 800 kg travels over a hill of height h.
hill
h NOT TO
SCALE
By travelling to the top of the hill, the car gains 40 000 J of gravitational potential energy.
The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
What is the height h of the hill?

N 16
OV
Question 9
Variant 1
A 5.0 m B 20 m C 50 m D 500 m
27 A lamp has a power input of 5.0 W. It wastes 1.0 W of power heating the surroundings.
What is the efficiency of the lamp? N 16

OV
Question 10
Variant 1
A 20% B 50% C 80% D 120%
28 The box contains the names of eight different energy resources.
natural gas geothermal solar waves

hydroelectric oil wind coal
N 16
OV
Question 11
How many of these energy resources are renewable? Variant 1
A 3 B 4 C 5 D 6
Physics O.L
Mechanics 156
29 A box of mass m slides down a slope of length l and vertical height d against a frictional force F.
mass m
l
June
17
Question 10
d Variant 1
stop
As the box slides down the slope, it loses gravitational potential energy and it does work against
the friction.
Which row gives the loss in gravitational potential energy and the work done against friction?
loss in gravitational work done

potential energy against friction
A mgd Fl
B mgd Fd
C mgl Fl
D mgl Fd
30 The diagram represents the energy transfers for a device.
useful
input output energy
energy
June
17
Question 11
wasted Variant 1
output energy
The device is 50% efficient.
Which equation is correct?
A input energy = useful output energy ÷ 2
B useful output energy = wasted output energy ÷ 2

C wasted output energy = useful output energy
D wasted output energy = useful output energy ÷ 2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 157
31 A student carries out some simple exercises.
In which exercise is the most work done?
A B
lifting
through 1 m
pushing through
1 m against a
June
17
Question 12
frictional force of 4 N Variant 1
1 kg 1 kg
C D
lifting
pulling through
through 2 m
2 m against a
frictional force of 2 N
2 kg 2 kg
32 The diagram shows the path of a stone that is thrown from X and reaches its maximum height
at Y.
Y
path of
stone
The stone gains 10 J of gravitational potential energy as it moves from X to Y.

N 17
OV
Question 10
Variant 1
The stone has 2.0 J of kinetic energy at Y.
Air resistance can be ignored.
How much kinetic energy did the stone have immediately after it was thrown at X?
A 2.0 J B 8.0 J C 10 J D 12 J
Physics O.L
Mechanics 158
33 A motor is used to lift a load of 40 N.
motor
load lifted
through 0.50 m
N 17
OV
Question 11
Variant 1
load
40 N
The power of the motor is 40 W and the system is 20% efficient.
How long does it take the motor to lift the load through 0.50 m?
A 0.50 s B 2.5 s C 5.0 s D 25 s
34 A student runs up a flight of stairs.
height
length
Which information is not needed to calculate the rate at which the student is doing work against
gravity?
A the height of the flight of stairs

B the length of the flight of stairs
C the time taken to run up the stairs
N 17
OV
Question 12
D the weight of the student Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 159
35 As energy is transferred into different forms, it eventually becomes dissipated.

What does this mean?
A All the energy disappears.

June
18
B The energy finally changes into every possible form of energy. Question 10
Variant 1
C The energy spreads out among the objects and their surroundings.
D The total amount of energy becomes less.
36 A ball of mass 1.2 kg is dropped from a height of 30 m. As it falls, 25% of its initial gravitational
potential energy is transferred to thermal energy.
What is the kinetic energy of the ball just before it hits the ground? June
18
Question 11
A 27 J B 90 J C 270 J D 360 J Variant 1
37 A girl hangs by her hands from a bar in the gymnasium. She pulls herself up until her chin is level
with the bar.
The mass of the girl is 48 kg.
She pulls herself up through a distance of 0.25 m.
She does this in 2.0 s.

June
186
Question 12
Variant 1
What is the useful power she uses to pull herself up?
A 6.0 W B 24 W C 60 W D 240 W
Physics O.L
Mechanics 160
38 An object, initially at rest, is dropped from a height of 12.0 m. The change in gravitational potential
energy when it falls to the ground is 565 J.
The frictional forces are negligible.
What is its speed when it hits the ground? N 18

OV
Question 10
A 4.71 m / s B 15.5 m / s C 47.1 m / s D 240 m / s Variant 1
39 A man climbs a ladder.
Which two quantities can be used to calculate the useful power of the man?
A the weight of the man and the time taken only

B the weight of the man and the vertical distance moved only
N 18
OV
Question 11
Variant 1
C the work done by the man and the time taken only
D the work done by the man and the vertical distance moved only
Physics O.L
Mechanics 161
Mark Scheme
1. B 21. B
2. B 22. D
3. A 23. B
4. B 24. C
5. D 25. C
6. A 26. A
7. D 27. C
8. B 28. C
9. C 29. A
10. B 30. C
11. D 21. C
12. C 32. D
13. C 33. B
14. B 34. B
15. C 35. C
16. B 36. C
17. D 37. C
18. A 38. B
19. D 39. C
20. A
Physics O.L
Mechanics 162
1 Electricity can be obtained from different energy resources.

Which energy resource is used to obtain electricity without producing heat to boil water?
A coal
B gas
June
12
C hydroelectric Question 9
Variant 2
D nuclear
2 A large parcel is on a horizontal conveyor belt. The conveyor belt moves the parcel towards a
lorry.
lorry
parcel
conveyor belt
The parcel travels towards the lorry at a constant speed. Only two horizontal forces act on the
parcel: air resistance, and friction with the conveyor belt.
Which row correctly compares the directions and the sizes of these two forces?
directions sizes
A opposite different N 12
OV
Question 8
B opposite the same Variant 3
C the same different

D the same the same
Physics O.L
Mechanics 163
3 A power station uses nuclear fission to obtain energy.

In this process, nuclear energy is first changed into
A chemical energy.
B electrical energy. N 12
OV
Question 9
C gravitational energy. Variant 3
D thermal (heat) energy.
4 A car moves along a level road at constant speed. Work is done by the engine and power is
developed by the engine.
Which pair of graphs shows how the work done and the power developed vary with time? June
13
Question 10
A B Variant 2
work power work power
0 0 0 0
0 time 0 time 0 time 0 time
C D
work power work power
0 0 0 0
0 time 0 time 0 time 0 time
5 A certain machine is very efficient.
What does this mean?
A It produces a large amount of power. June

14
Question 9
B It uses very little energy. Variant 2
C It wastes very little energy.

D It works very quickly.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 164
6 The list contains three energy resources P, Q and R.
P geothermal energy from hot rocks

Q nuclear fission in reactors
R sunlight on solar panels N 14
OV
Question 11
Variant 2
Which of these resources are renewable?
A P and Q only
B P and R only
C Q and R only
D P, Q and R
7 Four people of equal weight on a beach use different routes to get to the top of a sea wall.
ladder
slipway
sea wall
beach
Which person produces the greatest average power?
person route time taken / s M 15

arch
A runs across the beach, then climbs the ladder 8 Question 9

Variant 2
B walks across the beach, then climbs the ladder 16

C runs up the slipway 5
D walks up the slipway 10
Physics O.L
Mechanics 165
8 Which source of energy involves the splitting of heavy atoms?

A chemical energy
B geothermal energy
June
15
C hydroelectric energy Question 8

Variant 2
D nuclear energy
9 To calculate the power produced by a force, the size of the force must be known.
What else needs to be known to calculate the power?
the distance the force the time for which the

moves the object force acts on the object
A ✓ ✓ key June
15
Question 8
B ✓ ✗ ✓= needed Variant 3
C ✗ ✓ ✗= not needed
D ✗ ✗
10 A vehicle sinks into soft ground.
The vehicle is changed so that it does not sink as far.
Which change is made?

M 15
arch
A a lower centre of mass Question 10
Variant 2
B a more powerful engine
C wheels that are further apart
D wider tyres
Physics O.L
Mechanics 166
11 The table gives four energy sources and states whether the energy of the source is derived from
the Sun.
Which row is correct?
source of energy derived from the Sun
A geothermal yes M 16
arch
B oil no Question 9
Variant 2
C water held behind a dam yes

D wind no
12 A weight-lifter raises a 2000 N weight through a vertical height of 2.0 m in 0.80 s.
M 16
arch
Question 10
What useful power does he develop in doing this? Variant 2
A 800 W B 3200 W C 4000 W D 5000 W
13 A stone of mass m is held at rest in water. The stone is released and falls vertically a distance h.
The stone reaches a speed v.
Some of the original energy of the stone is transferred to the water. As it falls, resistive forces
cause the temperature of the water and stone to increase.
Which expression gives the work done against the resistive forces?
A 1
2 mv 2
B mgh – 1
2 mv 2 June
16
Question 9
Variant 2
C mgh
D mgh + 1
2 mv 2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 167
14 Which energy resource does not derive its energy from the Sun?
A geothermal
B hydroelectric
June
16
Question 10
Variant 2
C oil
D waves
15 Some processes are more efficient than others.
Which expression gives the efficiency of a process?
total energy output

A × 100%
total energy input
B
useful energy output
× 100%
June
16
Question 11
total energy input Variant 2
wasted energy output

C × 100%
total energy input
wasted energy output

D × 100%
useful energy output
16 Which energy resource does not derive its energy from the Sun?
A hydroelectric
B nuclear fission June
16
Question 9
C waves Variant 3
D wind
Physics O.L
Mechanics 168
17 The diagram shows the energy used by a modern lamp.
60 W input of
electrical power
June
16
Question 10
Variant 3
12 W of 48 W of power
useful power wasted in heating
output as light surroundings
Which expression gives the efficiency of the lamp?
12 12 48 48
A × 100% B × 100% C × 100% D × 100%
60 48 60 12
18 Three boxes each weigh 100 N. A man lifts all the boxes together from the ground on to a shelf
that is 1.5 m above the ground. The man takes 2.0 s to do this.
boxes
shelf
June
16
Question 11
1.5 m Variant 3
How much useful power does the man produce to lift the boxes?
A 75 W B 225 W C 300 W D 900 W
Physics O.L
Mechanics 169
19 A wind turbine generates 54 kW of useful power from an input of 180 kW of wind power.
Which calculation gives the percentage efficiency of the turbine?
A 54 000 %
180 000 × 100
B 180 000 % M 16
arch
54 000 × 100 Question 11
Variant 2
C 54 000 × 100 %
180 000
D 180 000 × 100 %

54 000
20 Electricity can be generated using different energy resources.
Which energy resource is used to generate electricity without needing any moving parts?
A geothermal
B hydroelectric N 16
OV
C solar Question 10
Variant 2
D water waves
What is the efficiency of the lamp? N 16

OV
Question 11
A 20% B 50% C 80% D 120% Variant 2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 170
22 A ball is dropped onto a floor.

Its speed just before hitting the floor is 3.0 m / s.
Which change would result in a speed of 6.0 m / s just before hitting the floor?
Ignore any effects due to air resistance.
A Drop the ball from double the height above the floor.
B Drop the ball from four times the height above the floor. N 16
OV
Question 10
C Use a ball with double the mass. Variant 3
D Use a ball with four times the mass.
23 Which list contains only energy resources that derive their energy from the Sun?
A geothermal, nuclear, tidal

B hydroelectric, water waves, wind
C geothermal, hydroelectric, solar N 16
OV
Question 11
D nuclear, solar, water waves Variant 3
24 A pendulum bob swings along the path WXYZ and back again.
Resistive forces can be ignored.
N 16
OV
Question 12
Variant 2
pendulum bob
W Z
X Y
Which statement describes the total energy of the bob?
A It has a maximum value at X.

B It has a maximum value at Y.
C It has a maximum value at Z.
D It has the same value at W, X, Y and Z.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 171
25 A man can either take an escalator or a lift to travel up between two floors in a hotel.
M 17
arch
Question 9
Variant 2
escalator lift
The escalator takes 20 seconds to carry the man between the two floors. The useful work done
against gravity is W. The useful power developed is P.
The lift takes 30 seconds to carry the same man between the same two floors.
How much useful work against gravity is done by the lift, and how much useful power is
developed by the lift?
useful work
useful power
done against
developed by lift
gravity by lift
A more than W less than P

B more than W P
C W less than P
D W P
26 A 40 W lamp wastes 34 J of energy every second by heating its surroundings.
M 17
arch
What is the efficiency of the lamp? Question 10
Variant 2
A 0.15% B 15% C 18% D 85%
Physics O.L
Mechanics 172
27 An object falls from a height of 5.0 m.

As it hits the ground the object has 750 J of kinetic energy. June
17
Question 10
What is its mass? Variant 2
A 15 kg B 50 kg C 75 kg D 150 kg
28 An electric generator produces an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 200 V and produces a current of
3.0 A in a circuit. The generator is driven by an engine with a power of 2.4 kW.
What is the efficiency of the generator?

June
17
Question 11
Variant 2
A 2.8% B 25% C 28% D 36%
29 The diagrams show athletes training by stretching springs.

Each spring has the same stiffness.
Which athlete does the most work?
A B June
17
Question 12
Variant 2
one spring stretched one spring stretched

by 0.60 m by 0.80 m
C D
two springs stretched two springs stretched

by 0.60 m by 0.80 m
Physics O.L
Mechanics 173
30 The diagrams show four bodies moving in the directions shown. The only forces acting on the
bodies are shown in each diagram.
Which body gains the most kinetic energy when moving a distance of 1.0 m?
A B
20 N
June
17
Question 9
Variant 3
movement movement
10 N 10 N
C D
10 N 25 N 30 N 30 N
movement movement
31 A steel ball is fired vertically upwards with a velocity v. The ball reaches a height h.
The same ball is now fired vertically upwards from the same position with a velocity 2v.
What is the new height reached by the ball? June

17
Question 10
A h B 2h C 4h D 8h Variant 3
Physics O.L
Mechanics 174
32 A solar panel is used to recharge a battery. The solar panel produces 0.80 W of electrical power.
The panel is 20% efficient.
solar panel
sunlight
power to June
17
battery Question 11
Variant 3
0.80 W
What is the power input of the sunlight onto the solar panel?
A 0.16 W B 4.0 W C 8.0 W D 16 W
33 The diagrams show four different athletes training by doing pull-ups.
Which athlete does the most work?
A B C D
weight of weight of weight of weight of June

17
athlete = 700 N athlete = 700 N athlete = 800 N athlete = 800 N Question 12

Variant 3
distance distance distance distance

lifted = 0.50 m lifted = 0.55 m lifted = 0.50 m lifted = 0.55 m
Physics O.L
Mechanics 175
N 16
OV
What is the efficiency of the lamp? Question 12
Variant 3
A 20% B 50% C 80% D 120%
35 An object has a mass of 500 kg.
It moves with a speed of 30 m / s.

N 17
OV
Question 10
What is its kinetic energy? Variant 2
A 7.5 kJ B 15 kJ C 225 kJ D 450 kJ
36 A car, starting from rest at position X, accelerates up a hill. The car reaches a speed of 10 m / s at
position Y.
The kinetic energy of the car at position Y is equal to its gain in gravitational potential energy from
X to Y.
X gain in
height
of car
Take the gravitational field strength g to be 10 N / kg.
What is the gain in height of the car between X and Y? N 17

OV
Question 10
Variant 3
A 0.50 m B 5.0 m C 10 m D 50 m
Physics O.L
Mechanics 176
37 Different processes have different efficiencies.
Which row shows the most efficient process?
energy useful energy

input / J output / J N 17
OV
Question 11
A 10 3 Variant 2
B 40 10
C 100 25
D 2000 250
38 A ball is at rest at the top of a hill. It rolls down the hill. At the bottom of the hill the ball hits a wall
and stops.
Which energy changes occur?
A gravitational potential energy → internal energy → kinetic energy M 18

arch
Question 11
B gravitational potential energy → kinetic energy → internal energy Variant 2
C kinetic energy → gravitational potential energy → internal energy
D kinetic energy → internal energy → gravitational potential energy
39 What is the main process by which energy is released in the Sun?
A α-decay
B β-decay
June
18
C nuclear fission Question 10

Variant 2
D nuclear fusion
40 The work done W by a force is related to the magnitude F of the force and the distance d moved
in the direction of the force.
Which equation for W is correct?
A W=d÷F
B W=d+F
June
18
C W=F÷d Question 11
Variant 2
D W=F×d
Physics O.L
Mechanics 177
41 A crane on a construction site lifts concrete beams.
The useful work done by the crane is 4000 kJ in a time of 160 s.
What is the useful output power of the crane?

June
18
Question 12
Variant 2
A 0.04 kW B 25 W C 25 kW D 640 kW
42 An aircraft with a mass of 300 000 kg is flying at an altitude of 2000 m with a speed of 100 m / s.
What is the kinetic energy of the aircraft? June

18
Question 10
4 6 6 6 Variant 3
A 1.5 × 10 kJ B 1.5 × 10 kJ C 3.0 × 10 kJ D 6.0 × 10 kJ
43 Which method of drying clothes has the least impact on the environment?
A Evaporate the water in them in an electrically heated tumble dryer.

B Hang them on a washing line in direct sunlight. June
18
Question 11
C Remove the water from them in an electric spin dryer. Variant 3
D Suspend them close to a coal fire.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 178
44 The vertical displacement of a mass of 0.20 kg changes with time. The graph shows how this
displacement changes.
displacement
June
18
Question 12
/ cm Variant 3
2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
time / s
–1
–2
–3
At which rate does it gain gravitational potential energy as it moves upwards?
A 0.025 W B 0.050 W C 0.20 W D 0.40 W
45 A 150 W filament lamp has an efficiency of 10%. A 40 W compact fluorescent lamp (CFL) has an
efficiency of 30%.
Each lamp is switched on for the same amount of time.
Which lamp produces more light and which lamp converts more energy into other forms of
energy?
converts more energy

produces more light
into other forms
A CFL lamp CFL lamp

N 17
OV
Question 11
Variant 3
B CFL lamp filament lamp
C filament lamp CFL lamp
D filament lamp filament lamp
Physics O.L
Mechanics 179
46 The diagram shows a pendulum.
N 18
OV
Question 10
Variant 2
P
R
10 cm
Q
The pendulum swings from P to Q to R and back to P.

P is 10 cm higher than Q.
At which speed does the pendulum bob pass through Q?
A 0.44 m / s B 1.0 m / s C 1.4 m / s D 2.0 m / s
47 An electron is moving at a speed of 5 × 106 m / s.

A neutron is moving at a speed of 5 × 104 m / s.
The mass of the electron is m.

The mass of the neutron is 2000m.
Which row is correct? N 18
OV
Question 8
greater greater Variant 3
momentum kinetic energy
A electron electron
B electron neutron
C neutron electron
D neutron neutron
Physics O.L
Mechanics 180
48 A barrel of mass 40 kg is raised to a height of 1.5 m by rolling it up a ramp. The length of the ramp
is 8.0 m. The force F applied to the barrel acts parallel to the ramp. The frictional force is
negligible.
8.0 m
F
40 kg
1.5 m
N 18
OV
Question 10
Variant 3
Which row is correct?
gain in gravitational
force F / N
potential energy / J
A 60 7.5
B 60 40
C 600 75
D 600 400
49 A crane on a building site lifts bricks of total mass 200 kg, initially at rest on the ground, with
uniform acceleration.
When the bricks are 5.0 m from the ground, they have a speed of 5.0 m / s.
How much work is done during this process? N 18

OV
Question 11
A 2.5 kJ B 10.0 kJ C 12.5 kJ D 35 kJ Variant 2
50 What is the main process by which energy is produced in the Sun?
A combustion
B nuclear fission
N 18
OV
C nuclear fusion Question 11
Variant 3
D radioactive decay
Physics O.L
Mechanics 181
Mark Scheme
1) C 27) A
2) B 28) B
3) D 29) D
4) A 30) C
5) C 31) C
6) B 32) B
7) C 33) D
8) D 34) C
9) A 35) C
10) D 36) B
11) C 37) A
12) D 38) B
13) B 39) D
14) A 40) D
15) B 41) C
16) B 42) B
17) A 43) B
18) B 44) D
19) C 45) D
20) C 46) C
21) C 47) C
22) B 48) C
23) B 49) C
24) D 50) C
25) C
26) B
Physics O.L
Mechanics 182
12. Pressure, Barometer & Manometer
June
2000
Question 11
Variant 1
N 96
OV
Question 10
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 183
N 94
OV
Question 10
Variant 1
N 95
OV
Question 10
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 184
N 98
OV
Question 9
Variant 1
June
94
Question 9
Variant 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 185
June95
Question 10
Variant 1
8 The diagram shows a manometer connected to a container of carbon dioxide.
container
June2002
Question 13
carbon dioxide Variant 1
5 cm
mercury
manometer
Which statement correctly describes the pressure exerted by the carbon dioxide?
A It is equal to the atmospheric pressure.

B It is equal to 5 cm of mercury.
C It is equal to 5 cm of mercury above atmospheric pressure.
D It is equal to 5 cm of mercury below atmospheric pressure.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 186
9 The diagram shows two mercury barometers.
Barometer 1 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 1.
Barometer 2 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 2.
June
11
Question 12
Variant 1
mercury
point X point Y
barometer 1, day 1 barometer 2, day 2
Which statement is true?
A The atmospheric pressure on day 1 is less than the atmospheric pressure on day 2.
B The atmospheric pressure on day 1 is the same as the atmospheric pressure on day 2.
C The pressure at point X is less than the pressure at point Y.
D The pressure at point X is the same as the pressure at point Y.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 187
10 A water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.
gas
supply
N 11
OV
Question 11
initial level 10 cm Variant 1
of water 10 cm
water
When it is attached to the gas supply, the water falls on the left side and rises on the right side.
The difference in the levels of water on the two sides is now 20 cm.
What is the pressure of the gas supply?
A the pressure due to 10 cm depth of water
B the pressure due to 20 cm depth of water
C the pressure due to 10 cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure
D the pressure due to 20 cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure
11 The diagram shows a mercury manometer used to measure the pressure of gas in a container.
Atmospheric pressure is 76 cm of mercury.
June
12
gas Question 12
Variant 1
mercury
20 cm
12 cm
What is the pressure of the gas?

A 56 cm of mercury
B 68 cm of mercury
C 84 cm of mercury
D 96 cm of mercury
Physics O.L
Mechanics 188
12 The diagram shows a mercury barometer.
25 cm
mercury
N 12
OV
Question 12
Variant 1
75 cm
5 cm
Which distance is used to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere?
A 25 cm B 75 cm C 80 cm D 100 cm
13 The diagrams show four divers at the bottom of four different swimming pools.
Two swimming pools contain fresh water and two contain salt water. Fresh water is less dense
than salt water.
Which diver feels the least pressure from the water? N 13

OV
Question 12
Variant 1
A B C D
fresh fresh salt salt

water water water water
14 Which situation is an example of a force acting over a large area to produce a small pressure?
A a builder hammering a nail into a piece of wood

B a cook using a sharp knife to cut vegetables
June
14
C a nurse pushing a needle into a patient’s arm Question 10

Variant 1
D a soldier marching in flat-soled boots
Physics O.L
Mechanics 189
15 A water manometer is connected to a gas supply.
gas Q N 14
OV
Question 12
supply Variant 1
water
There is a gas leak and the pressure of the gas supply falls.
What happens to the water level at P and what happens to the water level at Q?
water level at P water level at Q
A falls falls
B falls rises
C rises falls
D rises rises
16 The diagram shows a beaker of water. Four molecules are labelled. The relative amount of
energy of each molecule is shown.
Which molecule is most likely to escape from the liquid?
molecule A
(high energy) molecule B
N 14
OV
Question 13
(low energy) Variant 1
molecule C molecule D
(high energy) (low energy)
Physics O.L
Mechanics 190
17 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.
Which height is used as a measurement of atmospheric pressure?
June
15
D Question 10
mercury Variant 1
C
B
18 A block with flat, rectangular sides rests on a table.
block
table
The block is now turned so that it rests with its largest side on the table.
How has this change affected the force and the pressure exerted by the block on the table?
force pressure
A decreased decreased
B decreased unchanged June
15
Question 11
C unchanged decreased Variant 1
D unchanged unchanged
Physics O.L
Mechanics 191
19 The diagram shows a manometer containing a liquid. The manometer is used to find the
difference between the pressure of a gas and atmospheric pressure.
Which distance represents this pressure difference?

N 15
OV
Question 10
Variant 1
gas
pressure
A
C
D
liquid
20 Four physics teachers investigate pressure. They wear identical clothes and lie on different beds
of nails.
The table gives the weight of each teacher and the total area of contact between the teacher and
the nails.
Which teacher experiences the least pressure from the nails?
weight of total area of

teacher / N contact / cm2
A 700 13
B 800 20
N 15
OV
Question 11
C 900 14 Variant 1
D 1000 21
Physics O.L
Mechanics 192
21 The diagram shows a dam holding back water.
65 m water
N 16
OV
dam Question 12
Variant 1
The depth of the water is 65 m.
The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3. The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
What is the pressure exerted at the base of the dam due to the water?
A 15.4 Pa B 154 Pa C 65 000 Pa D 650 000 Pa
22 Air is trapped in a cylinder by a piston. The original volume of the trapped air is V and the original
pressure of the trapped air is P. The piston is pushed to the left. The temperature of the gas does
not change.
before piston is pushed in after piston is pushed in
piston
cylinder 25 50 25 50
trapped air trapped air
What is the new volume and what is the new pressure of the trapped air?
new volume new pressure
A 2V
P N 16
OV
2 Question 13
Variant 1
B 2V 2P
V P
C
2 2
V
D 2P
2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 193
23 Four different liquids are poured into four containers.
The diagrams show the depth and the density of liquid in each container.
In which container is the pressure on its base the greatest?
A B C D
June
17
Question 13
Variant 1
40 cm
30 cm
20 cm
10 cm
liquid density liquid density liquid density liquid density

= 3.1 g / cm3 = 1.2 g / cm3 = 1.3 g / cm3 = 0.8 g / cm3
cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40 N 17
OV
Question 13
30 Variant 1
20
10
mercury
Which length is used to find the value of atmospheric pressure?
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm
Physics O.L
Mechanics 194
25 Four identical beakers are filled with equal volumes of liquids P or Q, as shown. Liquid P is more
dense than liquid Q.
At which point is the pressure the least?

June
18
Question 13
Variant 1
liquid P B liquid Q D
A C
26 An oil tank has a base of area 2.5 m2 and is filled with oil to a depth of 1.2 m.
The density of the oil is 800 kg / m3.

June
18
Question 14
Variant 1
What is the force exerted on the base of the tank due to the oil?
A 960 N B 2400 N C 9600 N D 24 000 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 195
27 A manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.
manometer
connection N 18
OV
to gas supply Question 12
Variant 1
h
liquid
Which change gives a greater value of height h ?
A using a less dense liquid

B using a more dense liquid
C using a narrower tube
D using a wider tube
28 A washbasin has an exit pipe covered with a plug of area 12 cm2. A chain is attached to the
centre of the plug to assist in pulling the plug away from the exit hole. The washbasin contains
water to a depth of 0.080 m.
The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3.
chain
N 18
OV
Question 13
plug Variant 1
What is the force acting on the plug due to the water?
A 0.96 N B 800 N C 9600 N D 80 000 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 196
Mark Scheme
1. D 15. C
2. B 16. A
3. B 17. C
4. A 18. C
5. A 19. C
6. D 20. B
7. D 21. D
8. C 22. D
9. D 23. C
10. D 24. B
11. B 25. D
12. B 26. D
13. A 27. A
14. D 28. A
Physics O.L
Mechanics 197
1 A mercury manometer is used to measure a pressure difference. The difference is shown by the
levels X and Y in the diagram.
mm
100
Y
June
13
90 Question 11
Variant 2
80
70
60
50 mercury
40
30
20
10
X
0
What is the pressure difference represented by X and Y?
A 5 mm of mercury
B 50 mm of mercury
C 90 mm of mercury
D 95 mm of mercury
2 The diagrams show the actual size of the heels of four different lady’s shoes, as seen from
underneath the shoe.
Which heel is most likely to cause damage to floors?
A B C D June
13
Question 12
Variant 2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 198
3 Which block exerts the greatest pressure on the surface below it?
A B C D
area 10 cm2 N 13
OV
Question 12
Variant 3
area 10 cm2 2
area 20 cm
2
area 20 cm
weight
200 N weight
weight
100 N weight 200 N
100 N
4 A manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas trapped in a cylinder.
At which labelled point on the diagram is the pressure greatest?
gas
cylinder
D M 15
arch
Question 11
Variant 2
A C
Physics O.L
Mechanics 199
5 The diagram shows a manometer with one side connected to a gas cylinder and the other side
open to the atmosphere.
June
15
Question 10
Variant 3
gas cylinder
liquid
Which conclusion can be made using only the information from liquid levels in the manometer?
A The density of the gas is less than the density of air.
B The density of the gas is greater than the density of air.
C The pressure of the gas is less than atmospheric pressure.
D The pressure of the gas is greater than atmospheric pressure.
6 The diagram shows a solid block resting on a bench. The dimensions of the block are shown.
40 cm
20 cm
Q
June
15
Question 11
Variant 3
R bench
80 cm P
On which labelled surface should the block rest to produce the smallest pressure on the bench?
A P
B Q
C R
D any of P, Q or R
Physics O.L
Mechanics 200
7 A man is in contact with the floor.
In which of these situations does he produce the least pressure on the floor?
A kneeling
B lying flat on his back
C standing on both feet
N 15
OV
Question 10
Variant 3
D standing on one foot
8 A force acts on an area to produce a pressure.
Which changes produce the same pressure?
A double the area and double the force

M 16
arch
B double the area and halve the force Question 12
Variant 2
C double the area and make the force four times bigger
D halve the area and double the force
9 Identical toy bricks are placed one on top of another to make a tower on a table.
bricks
tower of bricks M 16
arch
Question 13
Variant 2
table
Which graph shows the relationship between the pressure P that the tower exerts on the table
and the weight W of the tower?
A B C D
P P P P
0 0 0 0
0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W
Physics O.L
Mechanics 201
10 A diver under water uses breathing apparatus at a depth where the pressure is 1.25 × 105 Pa.
June
16
Question 12
Variant 2
A bubble of gas breathed out by the diver has a volume of 20 cm3 when it is released. The bubble
moves upwards to the surface of the water.
At the surface of the water, the atmospheric pressure is 1.00 × 105 Pa.
The temperature of the water is the same at all depths.
What is the volume of this bubble when it reaches the surface?
A 15 cm3 B 16 cm3 C 20 cm3 D 25 cm3
W June
16
Question 13
Variant 2
mercury
X
Y
Z
The atmospheric pressure increases.
Which distance increases?
A VW B WY C XY D XZ
Physics O.L
Mechanics 202
12 The equation used to find the pressure caused by a liquid can be written as
p=h×Y×Z
where p is the pressure and h is the depth of the liquid. N 16

OV
Question 13
Variant 2
Which row gives the quantities Y and Z?
Y Z
A cross-sectional area gravitational field strength

B cross-sectional area volume
C density cross-sectional area
D density gravitational field strength
13 The diagram shows a gas that is trapped in a cylinder by a piston. The volume of the gas is
120 cm3 and the pressure of the gas is P.
N 16
OV
Question 14
Variant 2
gas piston
The piston is moved slowly to the left so that the volume of the gas is reduced to 30 cm3. The
temperature of the gas does not change.
What is the new pressure of the trapped gas?
P P
A B C P D 4P
4 2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 203
14 A container is filled with liquid to a certain depth h.
container N 16
OV
Question 13
h Variant 3
liquid
The pressure of the liquid at the bottom of the container depends on several factors.
Which is one factor on which the pressure does not depend?
A the strength of the Earth’s gravitational field

B the density of the liquid
C the depth of the liquid
D the strength of the Earth’s magnetic field
15 A column of liquid has height h, mass m and density ρ. The gravitational field strength is g.
M 17
arch
Which expression gives the pressure due to the column of liquid? Question 11
Variant 2
A hρ B mρ C mgh D ρ gh
16 The diagrams show two mercury barometers. The right-hand diagram shows a tube of larger
diameter. There is a vacuum above the mercury in both tubes.
Which labelled position on the right-hand tube shows the mercury level in the right-hand tube?
A
B
C M 17
arch
Question 12
glass Variant 2
tubes
D
mercury
Physics O.L
Mechanics 204
17 What are the units for mass, pressure and velocity?
mass pressure velocity
A kg Ns Pa June
17
B kg Pa m/s Question 4
Variant 3
C Ns Pa m/s
D Pa Ns m/s
18 Four different liquids are poured into four containers.
The diagrams show the depth and the density of liquid in each container.
In which container is the pressure on its base the greatest?
A B C D June
17
Question 13
Variant 3
40 cm
30 cm
20 cm
10 cm
liquid density liquid density liquid density liquid density

= 3.1 g / cm3 = 1.2 g / cm3 = 1.3 g / cm3 = 0.8 g / cm3
Physics O.L
Mechanics 205
19 A water manometer is connected to a gas supply.
gas
supply
Q
M 18
arch
Question 13
Variant 2
water
There is a gas leak and the pressure of the gas supply falls.
What happens to the water level at P and what happens to the water level at Q?
water level at P water level at Q
A falls falls
B falls rises
C rises falls
D rises rises
20 A submarine is 20 m below the surface of the sea. The pressure due to the water at this depth
is P.
On another day, the submarine is 26 m below the surface of fresh water.
The density of sea water is 1.3 times the density of fresh water.
M 18
arch
What is the pressure due to the fresh water at a depth of 26 m? Question 14
Variant 2
A P B P C 1.3 P D 1.7 P
1.3
Physics O.L
Mechanics 206
21 A submarine is in water of density 1.0 × 103 kg / m3. The submarine changes its depth. This causes
the pressure on it to change by 0.10 MPa.
June
18
Question 13
What is the change in depth of the submarine? Variant 2
A 0.10 m B 10 m C 100 m D 1000 m
22 An oil tank has a base of area 2.5 m2 and is filled with oil to a depth of 1.2 m.
The density of the oil is 800 kg / m3.

June
18
What is the force exerted on the base of the tank due to the oil? Question 14
Variant 2
A 960 N B 2400 N C 9600 N D 24 000 N
23 A simple barometer includes a column of mercury.
Which property of this column of mercury is used to give a measurement of atmospheric

pressure?
A its cross-sectional area

B its height June
18
Question 13
C its temperature Variant 3
D its thermal capacity
Physics O.L
Mechanics 207
Mark Scheme
1. C 13. D
2. A 14. D
3. C 15. D
4. B 16. B
5. D 17. B
6. A 18. C
7. B 19. C
8. A 20. B
9. D 21. B
10. D 22. D
11. B 23. B
12. D
Physics O.L
Mechanics 208
Mechanics
November Variant 1
2007 1 Question 2
The IGCSE class is investigating a simple balance.
The diagram below shows the apparatus.
metre rule
stand pivot
pointer 150 mm
hook 140 mm
130 mm
paper 120 mm
clip 110 mm
100 mm
card
90 mm
80 mm
70 mm
60 mm
50 mm
40 mm
30 mm
20 mm
10 mm
0 mm
Fig. 2.1
(a) A student records the height h0 of the pointer above the bench. She then hangs a paper
clip on the hook and records the new height h of the pointer above the bench. Next she
records the heights of the pointer above the bench using different numbers N of paper
clips. The readings are shown in the table below.
h0 = 100 mm
N h / mm d / mm
1 108
2 114
3 120
4 125
5 134
6 141
Physics O.L
Paper 6 Dr. Mostafa Allam
Mechanics 209
Mechanics
Calculate the height differences d using the equation
d = (h – h0)
and enter them in the table. [2]
(b) (i) Plot the graph of d / mm (y-axis) against N (x-axis).
(ii) Use your graph to predict the value of d if a nail with the same mass as 4.6 paper
clips were to be hung from the hook in place of the paper clips. Show clearly on the
graph how you obtained your value.
d = ................................................. [6]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 210
Mechanics
June Variant 1
2009 2 Question 1
An IGCSE student is making measurements as accurately as possible in order to determine
the density of glass.
Fig. 1.1 shows a glass test-tube drawn actual size.
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Use your rule to measure, in cm, the external diameter d of the test-tube.
d = ....................................... cm
Physics O.L
Mechanics 211
Mechanics
(ii) Use your rule to measure, in cm, the length x of the test-tube.
x = ............................................
(iii) Draw a labelled diagram to show how you would use two rectangular blocks of wood
and your rule to measure the length x of the test-tube as accurately as possible.
[4]
(b) The mass m of the test-tube is 31.2 g.
(i) Calculate the external volume Ve of the test-tube using the equation
πd 2X .
Ve =
4
Ve = ............................................
Physics O.L
Mechanics 212
Mechanics
(ii) The student then fills the test-tube with water and pours the water into a measuring
cylinder. Fig. 1.2 shows the measuring cylinder.
cm3
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
water
30
20
10
Fig. 1.2
Record the volume reading Vi from the measuring cylinder. This is the internal
volume of the test-tube.
Vi = ............................................
(iii) Calculate the density ρ of the glass from which the test-tube is made using the
equation
m
ρ= .
(Ve − Vi)
ρ = ....................................... [4]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 213
Mechanics
June Variant 1
2010 3 Question 1
The IGCSE class is determining the mass of a load using a balancing method.
Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus.
mass m d 50.0 cm mark load X
pivot metre rule

bench
Fig. 1.1
The load X has been taped to the metre rule so that its centre is exactly over the 90.0 cm
mark. It is not moved during the experiment. A mass m of 40 g is placed on the rule and its
position adjusted so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm
mark exactly over the pivot. This is repeated using a range of masses. The readings are
shown in Table 1.1
Table 1.1
1 1
m /g d /cm
/
d cm
40 30.2
50 23.9
60 20.0
70 17.1
80 15.1
(a) For each value of d, calculate 1/d and record it in the table. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 214
Mechanics
(b) Plot a graph of m /g (y-axis) against 1 1 (x-axis).

/d cm
[4]
(c) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
necessary information.
G = ....................................... [2]
(d) Determine the mass μ of the load X using the equation μ = G/k where k = 40.0 cm.
μ = ....................................... [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 215
Mechanics
November Variant 1
2010 4 Question 1
A student is determining the position of the centre of mass of an object using a balancing
method.
Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus used.
50.0 cm
mark
mass m d load of mass x
pivot
75.0 cm
mark
Fig. 1.1
A load of mass x is taped to the metre rule so that one side of the base is exactly on the
75.0 cm mark. The student places a mass m of 30 g on the rule and adjusts its position so
that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark exactly over the
pivot, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
The student records the distance d from the centre of the 30 g mass to the 50.0 cm mark on
the rule. He then repeats the procedure using different masses. The readings are shown in
Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
1 1
m /g d / cm
d cm
30 45.0
40 34.0
50 27.0
60 22.5
70 19.3
(a) For each value of d, calculate 1/d and enter the values in the table. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 216
Mechanics
1 1
(b) Plot a graph of m / g (y-axis) against (x-axis).
d cm
[4]
(c) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
G = .................................................. [2]
(d) Determine the horizontal distance z from the 75.0 cm mark on the rule to the centre of
mass of the load using the equation
z = G – k,
where k = 1250 g cm and x = 50 g. x
z = ................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 217
Mechanics
November 3
Variant 1
2010 5 Question 1
The IGCSE class is studying the acceleration of a toy car that is pulled along a track by a
force F.
The arrangement is shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
A student uses a force F of 0.5 N to pull a toy car along a track and electronically measures
the acceleration a. He records the results in a table. He repeats the procedure using a range
of different forces up to 2.5 N. The readings are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
F a
N m /s2
0.5 0.35
1.0 0.72
1.5 1.02
2.0 1.44
2.5 1.74
F a
(a) Plot a graph of (y-axis) against (x-axis).
N m /s2
[5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 218
Mechanics
(b) Theory suggests that the acceleration is directly proportional to the force applied to the
toy car. State whether the results support this suggestion and justify your statement by
reference to the graph.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification ........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The gradient of the graph is equal to the mass of the toy car. From the graph, determine
the mass m of the toy car. Show clearly how you obtained the necessary information.
m = ................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 219
Mechanics
June Variant 1
2011 6 Question 1
An IGCSE student is determining the position of the centre of mass of a triangular card.
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 1.1.
pin or nail
cork
A
stand
card
C
plumbline
Fig. 1.1
(a) The student hangs the card on the nail through hole A. He checks that the card is able
to swing freely and then hangs the plumbline from the nail so that it is close to, but not
touching, the card. When the card and plumbline are still, he makes a small mark at the
edge of the card where the plumbline crosses the edge. He removes the card and draws
a line from the mark to hole A.
He repeats the procedure using holes B and C.
Fig.1.2 is a drawing of the card.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 220
Mechanics
Fig.1.2
On Fig.1.2, the position of each of the marks the student makes is shown with a small
cross. On Fig. 1.2, draw in the lines between the positions of the holes A, B and C and
the corresponding crosses on the card. [2]
(b) If the experiment is completely accurate, the centre of mass of the card is at the position
where the three lines meet. On Fig. 1.2, judge the best position for the centre of mass,
marking it with a small cross. Draw a line from this position to the right-angled corner of
the card and measure the distance a between the centre of mass and the right-angled
corner of the card.
a = ........................................[3]
(c) In this experiment, it is important that the card is able to swing freely. For this reason, the
plumbline should not touch the card but be a small distance from it. This could cause an
inaccuracy in marking the card at the correct position. Describe how you would minimise
this possible inaccuracy. You may draw a diagram.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 221
Mechanics
November Variant 1
2011 7 Question 1
An IGCSE student is determining the weight of a metre rule.
d x y
50.0 cm mark
metre rule
X
pivot
Fig. 1.1
X is a 1.0 N load.
The student places the load X on the rule so that its centre is at d = 5.0 cm from the zero end of
the rule, as shown in Fig.1.1. He adjusts the position of the rule so that it is as near as possible to
being balanced, with the 50.0 cm mark to the right of the pivot.
He measures and records the distance x from the centre of the load X to the pivot, and the
distance y from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule. He repeats the procedure using d values
of 10.0 cm, 15.0 cm, 20.0 cm and 25.0 cm. The readings of d, x and y are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
d / cm x / cm y / cm
5.0 23.7 21.3
10.0 21.0 19.1
15.0 18.5 16.3
20.0 16.0 14.1
25.0 13.9 12.0
Physics O.L
Mechanics 222
Mechanics
(a) Plot the graph of y / cm (y-axis) against x / cm (x-axis). You do not need to include the origin
(0,0) on your graph.
[4]
(b) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
G = .......................................................... [2]
(c) Calculate the weight W of the metre rule using the equation W = L , where L = 1.0 N.
G
W = .......................................................... [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 223
Mechanics
(d) The calculation of W is based on the assumption that the centre of mass of the rule is at the
50.0 cm mark.
(i) Describe briefly how you would determine the position of the centre of mass of the rule.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe how you would modify the experiment if the centre of mass was at the 49.7 cm
mark.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 224
Mechanics
November Variant 3
2011 8 Question 5
The IGSCE class is determining the density of modelling clay by two methods.
(a) Method 1
A student moulds a piece of modelling clay into a cube shape as shown in Fig. 5.1.
w d
front view side view
Fig. 5.1
(i) On Fig 5.1, measure the height h, width w and depth d of the cube-shaped piece of
modelling clay.
h = ......................................................... cm
w = ......................................................... cm
d = ......................................................... cm
(ii) Calculate the volume V of the modelling clay using the equation V = h w d.
V = ...............................................................
m
(iii) Calculate the density ρ of the modelling clay using the equation ρ = , where the mass
V
of the modelling clay m = 103 g.
ρ = .......................................................... [3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 225
Mechanics
(b) Method 2
The student cuts the piece of modelling clay into two pieces. One piece is approximately twice
the size of the other piece. The mass ms of the smaller piece is 34.5 g.
Fig. 5.2a shows a measuring cylinder containing water. Fig. 5.2b shows the same measuring
cylinder after the smaller piece of modelling clay has been lowered into it.
thread
cm3 cm3
70 70
60 60
50 50 water
40 40
30 water 30
modelling
20 20 clay
10 10
Fig. 5.2a Fig. 5.2b
(i) Record the volume of water V1 in the measuring cylinder, as shown in Fig. 5.2a.
V1 = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) Record the new volume V2 in the measuring cylinder, as shown in Fig. 5.2b.
V2 = .......................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe briefly one precaution you would take to read the measuring cylinder correctly.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) Calculate the volume Vs of the modelling clay using the equation Vs = (V2 – V1).
Vs = ...............................................................
m
(v) Calculate the density ρ of the modelling clay using the equation ρ = s , where
Vs
ms = 34.5 g.
ρ = .......................................................... [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 226
Mechanics
(c) (i) Assuming that the experiment has been carried out with care, suggest two reasons why
the two values obtained for the density of the modelling clay in (a) and (b) may not be the
same.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State which of the two methods for determining density (method 1 or method 2) you
judge to be less accurate. Give a reason for your judgement.
method ..............................................................................................................................
reason ...............................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 10]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 227
Mechanics
June Variant 1
2012 9 Question 1
An IGCSE student is determining the mass of a metre rule using a balancing method.
d x y 50.0 cm mark
metre rule
M
pivot
Fig. 1.1
Mass M is placed on the rule. The position of the pivot is adjusted until the rule balances.
(a) The student chooses a mass M which is similar to the mass of the metre rule. Suggest a
suitable value for the mass.
suitable mass = ................................................. [1]
(b) The mass is cylindrical and has a diameter slightly larger than the width of the metre rule.
Describe briefly how you would place the mass so that its centre of mass is exactly over
the 90.0 cm mark on the metre rule. You should draw a diagram and mark the position of
the centre of mass on the cylinder.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) From your experience of carrying out balancing experiments of this type, suggest one
difficulty that you are likely to come across that could make the final result inaccurate.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 228
Mechanics
(d) The student takes a reading of x and the corresponding reading of y. He then calculates
the mass of the metre rule.
Suggest how you would improve the reliability of the value of the mass of the metre rule,
using this method.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Another student carries out a similar experiment to determine the mass of a 50 cm metal
strip. She calculates the mass and writes down “mass = 234.872 g”.
She checks the mass on an accurate balance. The value is 235 g. She thinks she must
have made a mistake in her experiment.
Write a brief comment on the accuracy of her experimental result.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 229
Mechanics
June Variant 1
2013 10 Question 5
The IGCSE class is determining the mass of a load X using a balancing method.
mass m d 50.0 cm mark load X
pivot metre rule

bench
90.0 cm
mark
Fig. 5.1
The centre of the load X is fixed at the 90.0 cm mark on the rule.
A student uses a range of values of the mass m and determines the distance d from the
pivot where the mass must be placed to balance the rule.
The readings are shown in Table 5.1.
Table 5.1
m/g d / cm
40 30.2
50 23.9
60 20.0
70 17.1
80 15.1
(a) Calculate the distance x between the centre of the load X and the centre of the rule.
x = .................................................. [1]
(b) Suggest a reason for the student using a range of m values.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 230
Mechanics
(c) Using each set of readings and the value of x, the student calculates values for the
mass of the load X.
He writes his results: 30.2 g, 29.875 g, 30 g, 29.925 g, 30.2 g.
Use these results to calculate an average value for the mass of X and give it to a suitable
number of significant figures for this type of experiment.
average value for the mass of X = .................................................. [2]
(d) This type of balancing experiment is difficult to carry out.
Suggest one practical difficulty and one way to try to overcome the difficulty. You may
draw a diagram, if you wish.
practical difficulty .............................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
way to overcome the difficulty
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 231
Mechanics
June Variant 2
2013 11 Question 1
The IGCSE class is determining the mass of a metre rule using two methods.
Method 1.
d x y
50.0 cm mark
metre rule
X
pivot
Fig. 1.1
A student places a 100 g mass X on the rule so that its centre is at a distance d = 5.0 cm from
the zero end of the rule, as shown in Fig. 1.1. He adjusts the position of the rule so that it is
as near as possible to being balanced.
He measures the distance x from the centre of the mass X to the pivot and the distance y
from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.
He repeats the procedure using d = 10.0 cm.
Table 1.1
d / cm x / cm y / cm
5.0 23.7 21.1
10.0 21.0 18.5
(a) (i) Using the values of x and y in the first row of the table, calculate the mass M of the
rule using the equation
100x
M= .
y
M = ............................................
Physics O.L
Mechanics 232
Mechanics
(ii) Repeat step (a)(i) using the values of x and y in the second row of the table.
M = ............................................
[2]
(iii) Calculate the average value of M.
average value of M = ........................................ [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 233
Mechanics
Method 2.
(b) The student measures the mass M of the rule, using a spring balance as shown in
Fig. 1.2.
g
0
50
100
150
scale pan metre rule
Fig. 1.2
Write down the reading shown in Fig. 1.2.
M = ........................................ [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 234
Mechanics
(c) The student expects that the values of the mass M obtained by the two methods will be
exactly the same.
Suggest two practical reasons why, in spite of following the instructions with care, the
values may differ. Assume that the balance used in Method 2 is accurate.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Explain briefly how you would judge the position of the centre of the mass X when it is
on the rule in Method 1. You may draw a diagram.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 235
Mechanics
November Variant 1
2013 12 Question 1
The IGCSE class is carrying out a moments experiment by balancing a metre rule on a small
pivot.
(a) A student has a small pivot and a metre rule.
Explain briefly how the student finds the position of the centre of mass of the metre rule.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The student finds that the centre of mass is not in the middle of the rule but at the
50.2 cm mark.
Explain what the student could do to prevent this from affecting her results.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The student places the metre rule on a pivot so that it balances.
She places a load P on one side of the metre rule at a distance x from the pivot. She
places another load Q on the metre rule and adjusts the position of the load Q so that
the rule balances, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
x y
metre rule
P
pivot
Fig. 1.1
The load Q is a distance y from the pivot.
Table 1.1
weight of P / N weight of Q / N x/ y/
2.0 5.0 39.0 15.5
(i) Complete the column headings in the table. [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 236
Mechanics
(ii) Calculate the clockwise moment and the anticlockwise moment using the equation
moment of a force = force × perpendicular distance to the pivot.
clockwise moment = ......................................................
anticlockwise moment = ......................................................

[1]
(d) In practice, it is difficult to adjust the loads to make the rule balance exactly.
Explain briefly how you would reduce the uncertainty in the position of Q required for
exact balance.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 237
Mechanics
November Variant 3
2013 13 Question 1
An IGCSE student is measuring the capacity of a drinks cup by three methods.
The capacity of a cup is the maximum volume of liquid that it will hold in normal use. This
maximum level is marked on the cup, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
MAX
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
(a) Method 1
In Method 1, the capacity V1 is determined from the mass of water in the cup.
(i) The cup is filled to the marked level with water. It is then placed on the balance, as
shown in Fig. 1.2.
Read and record its mass m.
m = .................................................. [1]
(ii) Calculate a value for the capacity V1, using your reading from (a)(i) and the equation
m
V1 = , where ρ = 1.00 g / cm3.
ρ
V1 = .................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 238
Mechanics
(b) Method 2
In Method 2, the capacity V2 is measured directly from the volume of water in the cup.
The cup is filled to the marked level and the water is tipped into a measuring cylinder, as
shown in Fig. 1.3.
cm3
250
225
200
175
150 measuring cylinder
125
100
75
50
25
Fig. 1.3
Read and record the volume V2 of water in the measuring cylinder.
V2 = .................................................. [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 239
Mechanics
(c) Method 3
In Method 3, the capacity V3 is calculated by considering the cup as a cylinder, using
the average diameter of the cup and an approximate equation.
d1
MAX
d2
Fig. 1.4
(i) On Fig. 1.4, measure and record the diameter d1 of the top of the cup.
d1 = .................................................. cm
(ii) On Fig. 1.4, measure and record the diameter d2 of the base of the cup.
d2 = .................................................. cm
(iii) On Fig. 1.4, measure and record the height h from the base to the marked level
MAX.
h = .................................................. cm
[1]
(iv) Calculate the average diameter D using your readings from (c)(i) and (c)(ii), and
(d + d2)
the equation D = 1 .
2
D = .......................................................
Physics O.L
Mechanics 240
Mechanics
(v) Calculate a value for the capacity V3, using your results from (c)(iii) and (c)(iv)
πD 2h
and the equation V3 = .
4
V3 = .......................................................
[2]
(d) State a possible practical source of inaccuracy in Method 2 and a possible practical
source of inaccuracy in Method 3.
Method 2 ..........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
Method 3 ..........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) State an additional measurement which could be taken to give a more accurate result in
Method 1.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 241
Mechanics
June Variant 2
2014 14 Question 1
An IGCSE student is taking measurements of a pencil.
Fig. 1.1 shows the pencil, drawn full size.
SHQFLO VKDUSHQHGVHFWLRQ
[ \
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 1.1, measure, in cm, the total length l of the pencil.
l = .............................................. cm
(ii) Measure, in cm, the length x of the unsharpened section of the pencil.
x = .............................................. cm
(iii) Calculate the length y of the sharpened section of the pencil, using the equation
y = (l – x).
y = .............................................. cm
[2]
(b) Describe how you would use a length of string and a rule to determine the circumference c of
the unsharpened section of the pencil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 242
Mechanics
(c) The student’s value for the circumference is c = 2.4 cm.
(i) Suggest a source of inaccuracy in determining the circumference of the pencil.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the volume V of the unsharpened section of the pencil using the equation
2
V=c x.
4π
V = ............................................... [1]
(iii) Estimate the volume VE of the sharpened section of the pencil. Show your working or
reasoning.
VE = ............................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 243
Mechanics
November Variant 1
2014 15 Question 5
An IGCSE student is taking measurements of a drinks cup.

Carry out the following instructions, referring to Fig. 5.1.
dT
dB
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 5.1, measure the height h of the cup.

h = ................................................ cm
(ii) On Fig. 5.1, measure the diameter dT of the top of the cup.
dT = ................................................ cm
(iii) On Fig. 5.1, measure the diameter dB of the bottom of the cup.
dB = ................................................ cm
dT + dB
(iv) Calculate the average diameter dA, using the equation dA = .
2
d = ................................................ cm
A
Physics O.L
Mechanics 244
Mechanics
(v) Calculate an approximate value for the volume V of the cup, using the equation
πdA2h
V= .
4
V = ......................................................
[3]
(b) The student determines the average circumference of the cup, using a 50 cm length of string
and a metre rule.
Fig. 5.2 shows how the student used the string to determine the average circumference.
Fig. 5.2
Describe how you would use the string to obtain a more reliable value for the average
circumference.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 245
Mechanics
(c) The student fills a measuring cylinder to the 500 cm3 mark. He pours water from the measuring
cylinder into the cup until the cup is full. Fig. 5.3 shows the water remaining in the measuring
cylinder.
cm3
500
450
400
350
300
250
200
150
water
100
50
Fig. 5.3
(i) Record the volume of water VR remaining in the measuring cylinder.
VR = ......................................................
(ii) Calculate the volume VW of the water in the cup.
VW = ......................................................
[2]
(d) On Fig. 5.3, show clearly the line of sight required to take the reading of VR. [1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 246
Mechanics
June Variant 2
2015 16 Question 1
The class is investigating a pendulum.
Figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the pendulum.
clamp clamp
bob
one complete
oscillation
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
(a) A student adjusts the pendulum until its length l = 50.0 cm.
State one precaution that you would take to measure the length l as accurately as possible.
You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 247
Mechanics
(b) The student displaces the pendulum bob slightly and releases it so that it swings. She
measures the time t for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum (see Fig. 1.2).
(i) Record the time t, in s, shown on the stopwatch in Fig. 1.3.
0 : 28 40
Fig. 1.3
t = ....................................................... s [1]
(ii) Calculate the period T of the pendulum. The period is the time for one complete
oscillation.
T = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) Explain why measuring the time for 20 oscillations, rather than 1 oscillation, gives a more
accurate value for T.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The student adjusts the length of the pendulum until its length l = 100.0 cm. She repeats the
procedure and obtains a value for the period T.
2.06 s
T = ...............................................................
Another student suggests that doubling the length l of the pendulum should double the
period T.
State whether the results support this suggestion. Justify your answer by reference to the
results.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) To continue the investigation of the relationship between the length l of the pendulum and the
period T, it is necessary to use a range of values of length l.
List additional l values that you would plan to use in the laboratory.
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 248
Mechanics
November Variant 3
2015 17 Question 2
The class is investigating the behaviour of a spring, and then using the spring to determine the
weight of an object.
clamp
spring
l
load
Fig. 2.1
(a) A load of weight L = 1.0 N is hung on the spring. The stretched length l of the spring, as
indicated in Fig. 2.1, is recorded in Table 2.1.
Suggest a precaution that you would take when measuring the length of the spring, to ensure
a reliable reading. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 249
Mechanics
(b) Step (a) is repeated for values of L = 2.0 N, 3.0 N, 4.0 N and 5.0 N. The readings are shown in
Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
L/N l / cm
1.0 6.1
2.0 9.0
3.0 13.4
4.0 16.8
5.0 21.0
Plot a graph of l /cm (y-axis) against L / N (x-axis).
0
0
[4]
(c) Use your graph to determine the length l 0 of the spring with no load attached.
l 0 = ...........................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 250
Mechanics
object
Fig. 2.2
(d) The loads are removed and an object is suspended from the spring, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
(i) On Fig. 2.2, measure the stretched length l of the spring.

l = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Use the graph, and your reading from (d)(i), to determine the weight W of the object.
Show clearly on the graph how you obtained your answer.
W = ............................................................ N
[2]
(e) A student measures the weight of a different load using this same method. He gives the
weight as 2.564 N.
Explain why this is not a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 10]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 251
Mechanics
June Variant
2007 18 Question 1
A student is determining the mass of a load using a balancing method.

mass m d load X
50.0 cm mark
pivot metre rule

bench
Fig. 1.1
The load X has been taped to the metre rule so that its centre is exactly over the 90.0 cm mark.
It is not moved during the experiment.
A mass m of 40 g is placed on the rule and its position adjusted so that the rule is as near as
possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark exactly over the pivot. Fig. 1.2(a) shows part of
the rule when it is balanced.
The procedure is repeated for a range of masses. Fig. 1.2(b) – (e) shows the rule when balanced
for values of m of 50 g, 60 g, 70 g and 80 g.
pivot
40 g 25 30 35 40 45 50
(a)
20 25 50 g 30 35 40 45 50
(b)
20 25 60 g
30 35 40 45 50
(c)
20 25 30 70 g 35 40 45 50
(d)
20 25 30 80
35 g 40 45 50
(e)
pivot
Fig. 1.2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 252
Mechanics
(a) (i) Use Fig. 1.2 to determine d, the distance between the mass and the pivot at balance, for
each value of m. Record your results in Table 1.1. [3]
Table 1.1
1 1
m/g d / cm
d cm
40
50
60
70
80
(ii) For each value of d, calculate 1 / d and record it in the table. [1]
(b) Describe one difficulty the student might have when carrying out this experiment, and how he
might overcome this difficulty.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
1 1
(c) Plot a graph of m / g (y-axis) against (x-axis).
d cm
[4]
Physics O.L
Mechanics
00000000253
Mechanics
(d) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
G = .......................................................... [1]
G
(e) Determine the mass µ, in grams, of the load X. Use the equation µ = .
40.0
µ = ....................................................... g [1]
[Total: 12]
Physics O.L
Mechanics
Mechanics
00000000254
March Variant 2
2016 19 Question 2
The class is carrying out an experiment to determine the density of glass.
Each student has a test-tube, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
glass test-tube
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) • Measure the length l of the test-tube shown in Fig. 2.1.
l = .......................................................... cm
• Measure the external diameter d of the test-tube.
d = .......................................................... cm
[1]
(ii) A student uses two wooden blocks to help him to measure the diameter d of the test-tube.
Describe his method. You may draw a diagram. Include one precaution which could be
taken to ensure that the value of d is as reliable as possible.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 255
Mechanics
(iii) Assuming that the test-tube is an approximate cylinder, calculate a value for its
external volume V1 using the equation V1 = πd l.
2
V1 = ................................................... cm3 [1]
(b) The test-tube is completely filled with water and then the water from the test-tube is poured
into a measuring cylinder.
(i) Read and record the volume V2 of the water as shown in Fig. 2.2.
cm3
100
80
60
40
20
Fig. 2.2
V2 = .................................................. cm3 [1]
(ii) Describe briefly how you would read the measuring cylinder to obtain a reliable value for
the volume of water. You may add to Fig. 2.2 to illustrate your explanation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Calculate the volume V3 of the glass, using the equation V3 = V1 – V2.
V3 = .................................................. cm3 [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 256
Mechanics
(c) One student uses a balance to measure the mass m of the test-tube, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
test-tube
Fig. 2.3
(i) Calculate the density ρ of the glass, using the equation ρ = m .

V3
ρ = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) Other students are using a balance which only measures to the nearest gram.
Record the mass m of the test-tube to the nearest gram.
m = ....................................................... g [1]
(d) The precision of the balance does not affect the accuracy of this experiment.
State one possible source of inaccuracy in the experiment. Explain what effect this inaccuracy
would have on the value obtained for ρ.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 12]
Physics O.L
Mechanics
Mechanics
00000000257
June Variant 1
2016 20 Question 1
A student is determining the weight of a metre rule using a balancing method.
P Q metre rule
x y
5.0 cm mark pivot 45.0 cm mark
Fig. 1.1 (not to scale) bench
(a) • The student places the load P on the metre rule at the 5.0 cm mark.
• She places the metre rule on the pivot at the 45.0 cm mark.
• She places load Q on the rule and adjusts its position so that the metre rule is as near as
possible to being balanced.
• She measures the distance x between the centre of load P and the pivot and the
distance y from the centre of load Q to the pivot.
• She repeats the procedure, placing the load P at the 10.0 cm mark, at the 15.0 cm mark,
at the 20.0 cm mark and at the 25.0 cm mark. The readings are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
x/ y/ A/ B/
40.0 42.5
35.0 36.0
30.0 30.0
25.0 24.0
20.0 17.5
(i) • For each value of x, calculate A = Px, where P = 1.00 N. Record the values in the
table. P is the weight of load P.
• For each value of y, calculate B = Qy, where Q = 0.80 N. Record the values in the
table. Q is the weight of load Q.
[1]
(ii) Complete the column headings in the table. [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 258
Mechanics
(b) Plot a graph of A / N cm (y-axis) against B / N cm (x-axis). Start both axes at the origin (0,0).
[4]
(c) Using the graph, determine the vertical intercept Y (the value of A when B = 0 N cm). Show
clearly on the graph how you obtained this value.
Y = ........................................................... [1]
Y
(d) Calculate the weight W of the metre rule using the equation W = , where z = 5.0 cm.
z
W = ........................................................... [1]
(e) Suggest one practical reason why it is difficult to obtain exact results with this experiment.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 259
Mechanics
(f) The student uses an accurate electronic balance to obtain a second value for the weight of
the metre rule.
1.24 N
weight obtained on the balance = ................................................................
State and explain whether the two values for the weight agree within the limits of experimental
accuracy.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[1]
[Total: 10]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 260
Mechanics
June Variant 2
2016 21 Question 2
A student is using a balancing method to determine the weight of a piece of soft modelling clay.
soft
modelling clay
50.0 cm mark
Q metre rule
P
pivot
bench
Fig. 2.1
P is a metal cube of weight P = 1.0 N. Q is the piece of soft modelling clay.
The student places the cube P so that its weight acts at a distance x from the pivot.
He adjusts the position of Q to balance the rule and measures the distance y from the centre of Q
Px
to the pivot. He calculates the weight W of Q using the equation W = .
y
(a) On Fig. 2.1, mark clearly the distance x. [1]
(b) Suggest a change to Q that would make it easier to find the value of y accurately.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) It is difficult to achieve an exact balance of the metre rule in this type of experiment. This can
make the result unreliable.
Explain how you would reduce the effect of this problem to improve the reliability of the
experiment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 261
Mechanics
(d) The metal cube P is larger than the width of the metre rule.
Explain briefly how you would determine the reading of the metre rule scale at the position of
the centre of mass of P. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) Before starting the experiment, the student determines the position of the centre of mass of
the metre rule.
Explain briefly how you would do this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 262
Mechanics
June Variant 3
2016 22 Question 2
A student is using a forcemeter and a set of different loads to determine the weight of a metre rule.
She is using the apparatus shown in Fig. 2.1.
forcemeter
metre rule load

bench
Fig. 2.1
(a) Fig. 2.2 shows the position of the load on the metre rule. The load is always at this position on
the rule.
load
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
Fig. 2.2 (not full size)
Determine the scale reading on the metre rule at which the centre of the load is located.
Show your working.
scale reading = .....................................................cm [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 263
Mechanics
(b) The student measures the force F indicated by the forcemeter for different loads placed on
the rule.
Figs. 2.3 (a)–(e) show the scale of the forcemeter for values of load L = 1.00 N, 2.00 N, 3.00 N,
4.00 N and 5.00 N.
N N N N N
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
Fig. 2.3
In Table 2.1, record the value of F for each load.
Table 2.1
L/N F/N
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 264
Mechanics
(c) Plot a graph of F / N (y-axis) against L / N (x-axis). Start your graph at the origin (0,0).
[4]
(d) (i) Determine the value y of the intercept of the line on the F axis.
y = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) The weight W of the metre rule is numerically equal to 2y.
Write down a value for W to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.
W = ...........................................................[2]
(e) Assuming that the procedure is carried out carefully, suggest a possible source of inaccuracy
in this experiment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 12]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 265
Mechanics
November Variant 1
2016 23 Question 1
A student uses a pendulum to determine a value for the acceleration of free fall g.
Figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the apparatus.
clamp clamp
bob
one complete
oscillation
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
(a) On Fig. 1.1, measure the length l of the pendulum.
l = .................................................... cm [1]
(b) The student adjusts the pendulum until its length l = 50.0 cm. The length l is measured to the
centre of the bob.
Explain briefly how the student avoids a parallax (line of sight) error when measuring length l.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 266
Mechanics
(c) The student displaces the pendulum bob slightly and releases it so that it swings.
He measures the time t for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum.
27.8 s
t = ...............................................................
(i) Calculate the period T of the pendulum. The period is the time for one complete
oscillation.
T = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Measuring the time for a large number of oscillations, rather than for one oscillation,
gives a more accurate value for T.
Suggest one practical reason why measuring the time for 200 oscillations, rather than
20 oscillations, may not be suitable.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Calculate T 2.
T 2 = ...........................................................[1]
Calculate the acceleration of free fall g using the equation g = 4π2l . Give your answer to
2
(iv)
a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment. T
g = ................................................. m / s2 [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 267
Mechanics
(d) The student checks the value of the acceleration of free fall g in a text book. The value in the
book is 9.8 m / s2.
(i) Suggest a practical reason why the result obtained from the experiment may be different.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest two improvements to the experiment.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 268
Mechanics
00000000
November
24 Variant 1
2016 Question 5
A student is investigating the extension of a spring.
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows the spring with, and without, a load attached.
spring a
b c
d
load
Fig. 5.1
Tick the distance that shows the extension of the spring when the load is added.
a b c d
[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 269
Mechanics
(b) The graph shows the student’s results.
load / N
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
extension / mm
(i) State whether the graph shows that the load and the extension are directly proportional.
Justify your answer by reference to the graph.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
justification ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The student determines the gradient G of the graph line.
0.1744729
G = ...............................................................
G is numerically equal to a constant k for the spring.
Write down the value of the constant k. Give your answer to a suitable number of
significant figures and include the unit.
k = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 270
Mechanics
November Variant 3
2016 25 Question 4
A student has noticed that different types of paper have different strengths.
Plan an experiment which will enable you to compare the strengths of different samples of thin
paper, prepared as shown in Fig. 4.1.
wooden block
adhesive tape thin paper
hook
Fig. 4.1
Write a plan for the experiment, including:
• the additional apparatus needed
• instructions for carrying out the experiment, including any precautions you will take
• what you will measure
• how you will present your results
• how you will determine which paper is the strongest
• the variables you will keep the same to ensure the comparison is a fair test.
You may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Physics O.L
Mechanics
Mechanics
00000000271
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [7]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 272
Mechanics
March Variant 2
2017 26 Question 4
A student is investigating how the material of a spring affects its behaviour when stretched.
The following apparatus is available to the student:
wires of different thickness, length and material

a set of 10 g masses and a set of 100 g masses, both with hangers
a wooden rod approximately 1 cm in diameter
other standard laboratory equipment.
Plan an experiment which will enable you to test the extension of springs made from different
types of wire.
In your plan, you should include:
• instructions for making a spring from the wire that is provided,
• what you will measure,
• instructions for carrying out the experiment,
• the variables you will keep the same to ensure the comparison is a fair test,
• any precaution which should be taken or difficulty which might occur,
• how you will present your results.
You may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Physics O.L
Mechanics 273
Mechanics
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 274
Mechanics
June Variant 1
2017 27 Question 1
The class is investigating the stretching of a spring.
metre rule
clamp
boss
spring l0
stand
X
bench
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 1.1, measure the length l0.
Record l0 in Table 1.1 at load L = 0.0 N. [1]
(ii) Explain why l0 is not measured to point X on the spring.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A student hangs a 1.0 N load on the spring. He records the new length l of the spring.
He repeats the procedure using loads of 2.0 N, 3.0 N, 4.0 N and 5.0 N. The readings are shown
in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
L/ N 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
l / mm 17 20 21 23 25
Describe one precaution that you would take in order to obtain reliable readings.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 275
Mechanics
(c) Plot a graph of l / mm (y-axis) against L / N (x-axis).
[4]
(d) A student suggests that the length l of the spring is directly proportional to the load L.
State whether your readings support this suggestion. Justify your answer by reference to the
graph line.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) Use the results to predict the load L that would give a length l twice the value of l0.
Show clearly how you obtained your answer.
load L = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 10]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 276
Mechanics
June Variant 1
2017 28 Question 4
The class is investigating the motion of a pendulum.
clamp
metre rule
bob
set square
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 4.1, show clearly the length l of the pendulum. [1]
(ii) Use Fig. 4.2 to explain how you would measure the length l accurately. You may draw on
the diagram.
clamp
bob
Fig. 4.2
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 277
Mechanics
(b) A student determines the period T of the pendulum. The period is the time taken for one
complete oscillation. The student measures the time t for 20 oscillations.
Fig. 4.3 shows the time t.
Fig. 4.3
(i) Calculate the period T of the pendulum.
T = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Explain how measuring the time for 20 oscillations rather than one oscillation helps the
student to obtain a more reliable value for the period.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The student wants to determine a value for the acceleration of free fall from his results.
He needs the value of T 2 to do this.
Calculate T 2.
Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures and include the unit.
T 2 = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 278
Mechanics
November Variant 1
2017 29 Question 3
A student is investigating whether the diameter of a pendulum bob affects the period of a
pendulum. The period is the time taken for one complete oscillation of the pendulum. Fig. 3.1
shows a pendulum.
Fig. 3.2 shows one complete oscillation.
stand
clamp
thread
bob
one complete
oscillation
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2
The student has the following apparatus:
pendulum bobs made of polystyrene with diameters 1 cm, 2 cm, 3 cm, 4 cm and 5 cm
a supply of thread and a pair of scissors
clamp and stand.
Plan an experiment to investigate whether the diameter of a pendulum bob affects the period of a
pendulum.
You should:
• list additional apparatus that you would require
• explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation
• state the key variables that you would control
• draw a table with column headings, to show how you would display your readings (You
are not required to enter any readings in the table.)
• explain briefly how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 279
Mechanics
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 280
Mechanics
November Variant 1
2017 30 Question 4
A student is determining the weight of a load using a balancing method.
metre rule
P Q
a b
bench
pivot
Fig. 4.1
The student places the metre rule on the pivot and adjusts its position so that the metre rule is as
near as possible to being balanced.
He places a load P on the metre rule so that its centre is exactly at the 30.0 cm mark.
He records the distance a between P and the pivot.
19.8 cm
a = ...............................................................
He places a load Q of weight Q = 1.0 N on the metre rule and adjusts the position of Q so that the
metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced.
He measures the distance b between the centre of load Q and the pivot.
He repeats the procedure, with the load P remaining at the 30.0 cm mark, using Q values of 2.0 N,
3.0 N, 4.0 N and 5.0 N. All the readings are recorded in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
Q/N b / cm 1 1
Q N
1.0 40.0
2.0 19.5
3.0 13.5
4.0 10.5
5.0 7.5
1
(a) For each value of Q, calculate and record the result in the table. [1]
Q
Physics O.L
Mechanics 281
Mechanics
(b) Plot a graph of b / cm (y-axis) against 1 1 (x-axis).
Q N
[4]
(c) (i) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
G = ...........................................................[2]
G
(ii) Calculate the weight P of load P using the equation P = , where a = 19.8 cm.
a
P = ...........................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 282
Mechanics
(d) The student measures the weight P of load P using a forcemeter. Fig. 4.2 shows the
forcemeter.
N
0.0
1.0
2.0
load P
Fig. 4.2
Write down the reading P shown on the forcemeter.
P = ....................................................... N [1]
(e) The student has carried out the experiment with care and is expecting the two values of P in
(c) and (d) to be the same.
Suggest two reasons why the values of P may be different.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 283
Mechanics
June Variant 2
2017 31 Question 4
The class is investigating the principle of moments.
a b metre rule
P Q
bench
5.0 cm mark
pivot
45.0 cm mark
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student places a load P on the metre rule at the 5.0 cm mark. He places the metre rule on
the pivot at the 45.0 cm mark. He places a load Q on the rule and adjusts its position so that
the metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced.
• He measures the distance a between the centre of load P and the pivot.
• He measures the distance b from the centre of load Q to the pivot.
• He repeats the procedure placing the load P at the 10.0 cm mark, the 15.0 cm mark, the
20.0 cm mark and at the 25.0 cm mark. He keeps the pivot at the 45.0 cm mark each
time. The readings are recorded in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
a / cm b / cm
40.0 42.5
35.0 36.4
30.0 30.1
25.0 23.9
20.0 17.5
Physics O.L
Mechanics 284
Mechanics
(i) Plot a graph of b / cm (y-axis) against a / cm (x-axis). Start both axes at the origin (0,0).
[3]
(ii) Draw the line of best fit. [1]
(b) A student suggests that a is directly proportional to b.
State whether the readings support this suggestion. Justify your answer by reference to the
graph line.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 285
Mechanics
(c) The student uses a balance to measure the mass m of the metre rule.
120 g
m = ...............................................................
• Calculate the value of mX, where X = 0.05 N cm / g.
mX = ...................................................... N cm
• Use the value of a in the first row of Table 4.1 to calculate Pa, where P = 1.00 N.
P is the weight of load P. Include the unit.
Pa = ...............................................................
• Use the value of b in the first row of Table 4.1 to calculate Qb, where Q = 0.80 N.
Q is the weight of load Q.
Qb = ...............................................................
[2]
(d) A student states that Pa should be equal to Qb.
Look carefully at Fig. 4.1 and the information in (c) and suggest what the student has not
realised.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 286
Mechanics
November Variant 2
2017 32 Question 1
A student is comparing the oscillations of two pendulums. Fig. 1.1 shows the first pendulum.
clamp
bob
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 1.1, measure the distance d, from the bottom of the clamp to the bottom of the
bob.
d = ..................................................... cm [1]
(ii) Fig. 1.1 is drawn 1/10th actual size. Calculate the actual distance D from the bottom of
the clamp to the bottom of the bob.
D = ..................................................... cm [1]
(iii) Explain briefly how to use a set-square to avoid a parallax (line-of-sight) error when
measuring the length of this pendulum. You may draw a diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 287
Mechanics
(b) The student displaces the bob slightly and releases it so that it swings. She measures the
time t for 20 complete oscillations. The time t is shown on the stopwatch in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
(i) Write down the time t shown in Fig. 1.2.
t = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the period T1 of the pendulum. The period is the time for one complete
oscillation.
T1 = ...........................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 288
Mechanics
(c) The student repeats the procedure using another pendulum as shown in Fig. 1.3. This has
a long, thin pendulum bob. The distance D from the bottom of the clamp to the bottom of the
pendulum bob is the same as for the first pendulum.
clamp
bob
Fig. 1.3
She determines the period T2 of this pendulum.

1.37 s
T2 = ...............................................................
In this experiment, both pendulum bobs have the same mass. A student suggests that since
both pendulums have the same overall length D and mass, the periods T1 and T2 should be
equal. State whether the results support this suggestion. Justify your answer by reference to
the results.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 289
Mechanics
(d) The period T of a pendulum can be determined by measuring the time t for 20 complete
oscillations and then calculating the period. Some students are asked to explain the reason
for this method being more accurate than measuring the time taken for a single oscillation.
Tick the box next to the sentence that gives the best explanation.
The method eliminates errors from the measurements.
The method is more accurate because the experiment is repeated.
The method includes more readings so there is less chance for errors.
The method reduces the effect of errors when starting and stopping the stopwatch.
[1]
(e) A student plans to carry out more pendulum experiments. He considers possible variables
and precautions to improve accuracy.
In the following list, mark the possible variables with the letter V and the precautions with the
letter P.
amplitude of swing
length of pendulum
mass of pendulum bob
shape of pendulum bob
use of a reference point to aid counting
viewing the rule at right-angles when measuring the length

[2]
[Total: 11]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 290
Mechanics
November Variant 2
2017 33 Question 4
A student has a selection of rubber bands of different widths. He is investigating the extension
produced by adding loads. Fig. 4.1 shows the set-up used.
boss clamp
stand
rubber band
bench
hook
Fig. 4.1
In addition to the apparatus shown in Fig. 4.1, the following apparatus is available to the student:
A metre rule
A selection of different rubber bands
A selection of loads.
Plan an experiment to investigate how strips of rubber of different widths stretch when loaded.
You should
• explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation

• state the key variables that you would control
• draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings
(You are not required to enter any readings in the table.)
• explain briefly how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Physics O.L
Mechanics 291
Mechanics
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[7]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 292
Mechanics
June Variant 3
2017 34 Question 1
A student is determining the density of water by two methods.

Method 1
N
0.0
forcemeter
0.5
1.0
cm3
1.5 250
2.0 225
200
175
150
measuring cylinder 125
100
75
modelling clay
50
25
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
(a) Record the weight W1 of the piece of modelling clay shown in Fig. 1.1.
W1 = ....................................................... N [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 293
Mechanics
(b) (i) Record the volume V1 of the water in the measuring cylinder shown in Fig. 1.2.
V1 = ................................................... cm3 [1]
(ii) Describe briefly how a measuring cylinder is read to obtain an accurate value for the
volume of water. You may draw a diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 294
Mechanics
N
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
cm3
250
225
200
175
150
125
100
75
50
25
Fig. 1.3
Physics O.L
Mechanics 295
Mechanics
(c) The student lowers the modelling clay into the water, as shown in Fig. 1.3.
• Record the new reading W2 of the forcemeter.
W2 = ............................................................ N
• Record the new reading V2 of the measuring cylinder, with the piece of modelling clay in
the water.
V2 = ....................................................... cm3
[1]
(d) Calculate a value ρ1 for the density of water, using your readings from (a), (b) and (c) and the
equation
(W1 – W2)
ρ1 = ×k
(V2 – V1)
where k = 100 g / N.
ρ1 = ...........................................................[2]
Method 2
(e) The student removes the modelling clay from the water and places the measuring cylinder on
a balance.
cm3
250
225
200
175
150
measuring cylinder 125
100
75
50
balance 25
Fig. 1.4
The reading for the mass m1 of the measuring cylinder and water is shown in Fig. 1.4.
Record m1 to the nearest gram.

m = ...........................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 296
Mechanics
(f) The student pours the water out of the measuring cylinder and measures the mass m2 of the
empty measuring cylinder.
93
m2 = .............................................................g
• Calculate a second value ρ2 for the density of water, using your readings from (b), (e)
and (f) and the equation
(m1 – m2)
ρ2 = .
V1
ρ2 = ...............................................................
• Calculate an average value ρAV for the density of water, using your results for ρ1 and ρ2.
ρAV = ...............................................................
[1]
(g) Suggest a possible source of inaccuracy in either Method 1 or Method 2, even when they
are carried out carefully.
Explain how an improvement might be made to reduce this inaccuracy.
suggestion ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
improvement .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 297
Mechanics
Mark Scheme
1 (a) 8, 14, 20, 25, 34, 41 (-1 each error) [2]
(b) (i) Graph:

suitable scales labelled symbol/unit [1]
all plots to nearest ½ sq (-1 each error or omission) [2]
line thin and straight [1]
(ii) correct value (29mm – 31mm)to nearest ½ sq. [1]

clear how obtained [1]
[Total: 8]
2 (a) d 2.5 (cm) [1]

x 14.5 (cm) [1]
diagram showing blocks correctly placed across the ends [1]
rule position (or distance) shown correctly [1]
(b) (i) Ve 71.1 - 71.2 (cm3) ecf allowed [1]
(ii) measuring cylinder reading 56 (cm3) [1]
(iii) ρ 2.05–2.08 (or 2.1) ecf allowed [1]

g/cm3 and 2 or 3 significant figures [1]
[Total: 8]
3 (a) table:
1/d values correct
0.0331, 0.0418, 0.0500, 0.0585 (0.058 to 2 sig. fig.), 0.0662 [1]
consistent 2 or 3 significant figures [1]
(b) graph:
axes labelled [1]
scales suitable, plots occupying at least half grid [1]
plots all correct to ½ square (ecf) – take centre of plot if large [1]
well judged line thin line (Y½ square) [1]
(no mark if plots > ½ square)
(c) triangle method used and shown (any indication on graph) [1]
(triangle) using at least half line (can be seen in calculation) [1]
(d) µ 27 – 33 (NO ecf) [1]

2 or 3 significant figures and unit g [1]
[Total: 10]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 298
Mechanics
4 (a) correct 1/d values 0.0222, 0.0294, 0.0370, 0.0444, 0.0518 [1]
all to 2 significant figures or all to 3 consistent significant figures [1]
(b) graph:
axes suitable and labelled [1]
all plots correct to ½ small square [1]
good line judgement (position) [1]
thin line, single, no blobs (quality) [1]
(c) gradient by triangle method using at least ½ candidate’s line [1]

clear, on graph, how obtained [1]
(d) z value 0.9 – 2.5 [1]

2 or 3 significant figures and unit cm given [1]
[Total: 10]
5 (a) graph: axes labelled and scales suitable [1]

all plots correct to nearest ½ small square [2]
well judged best fit line [1]
thin best fit single line/no ‘blobs’ [1]
(b) statement matches line (expect YES) [1]

justification matches statement
(expect straight line through origin) [1]
(c) triangle method with more than half the line used [1]
clear how obtained – shown on graph [1]
m correct in kg, 2 or 3 significant figures [1]
1.39 – 1.45 kg - unit penalty
[Total: 10]
6 (a) Three straight lines in correct positions [1]

All lines continuous, straight, neat and thin [1]
(b) a = 4.2 – 4.4 (cm) no ecf [1]

Well-judged position in triangle [1]
Line correctly drawn [1]
(c) Viewing line directly in front of card (owtte) [1]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 299
Mechanics
7 (a) graph:
axes: the right way round, labelled x and y with unit cm [1]
scale: both 10 small squares = 2 cm
(either or both 20 small squares = 5 cm also acceptable) [1]
plots: all correct to ½ small square [1]
line: well-judged, best-fit, straight, thin, continuous line [1]
(b) correct triangle method using at least ½ candidate’s line, with method clearly indicated
on graph [1]
G = 0.94 – 1.00, no ecf [1]
(c) 1.0/(candidate’s G) calculation correct, 2 or 3 significant figures and unit N [1]
(d) (i) (where rule) balances on pivot o.w.t.t.e. [1]
(ii) take readings from 49.7 OR

adjust rule by adding weight until it balances at 50.0 cm mark [1]
[Total: 9]
8 (a) (i) h = 3.6, w = 3.4, d = 3.2 (cm) c.a.o. [1]
(ii) V = 39 OR 39.2 OR 39.17 OR 39.168 AND cm3 ecf (i) [1]

ρ = 2.6 OR 2.63 OR 2.64, ignore significant figures and unit, ecf [1]
(b) (i) V1 = 50 (cm3) [1]
(ii) V2 = 64 (cm3) [1]
(iii) bottom of meniscus, direct vision [1]
(iv) Vs = 14 (cm3) ecf (i)(ii)
(v) ρ = 2.46, 2 or 3 significant figures AND g/cm3 ecf (iv) [1]
(c) (i) two from:

difficulty of making perfect cuboid shape o.w.t.t.e.
measuring cylinder readings only to nearest cm3 o.w.t.t.e.
smaller mass so greater inaccuracy
volume of thread not taken into account
air bubbles in clay / uneven density distribution / clay may absorb water / some
clay may stick to the knife [2]
(ii) either method but with sensible matching reason [1]
[Total: 10]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 300
Mechanics
9 (a) 50–250 g (or 0.05–0.25 kg) correct unit required [1]
(b) Centre of mass marked close to centre of cylinder [1]

Clear indication of how centre of mass is placed above the 90.0 cm mark [1]
(c) Rule unlikely to exactly balance/ difficult to balance

OR rule could slide on pivot
OR mass could slide
OR centre of mass of rule not at 50.0 cm mark
OR rule not uniform1
Do not accept comments about poor/careless technique [1]
(d) Repeat readings (wtte) [1]

OR a reference to finding exact position of centre of mass of metre rule
OR a reference to dealing with centre of mass of rule not being at 50.0 cm mark
(e) Good/ fine/ reasonable/ same to 3 significant figures

OR Within limits of experimental accuracy (wtte)
OR Too many significant figures in experimental result [1]
[Total: 6]
10 (a) 40.0 or 40(cm) [1]
(b) accuracy / reliability / check readings / spot anomaly / o.w.t.t.e. [1]
(c) correct method used [1]

30 or 30.0(g) [1]
(d) rule never quite balances, o.w.t.t.e. [1]

take average position / nearest to balance, o.w.t.t.e. [1]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 301
Mechanics
11 (a) (i)(ii) M values 112.3, 113.5 (to 3 or 4 sig. figs only) [1]
g at least once, not contradicted (symbols or words) [1]
(iii) 113 or 112.9 or correct average of candidate’s values (ignore sig. figs) [1]
(b) 114 (g) c.a.o. [1]

(c) any two from:
centre of mass of rule not at 50.0 cm
mass X not uniform / of varying density
reference to difficulty in obtaining balance implied o.w.t.t.e.
mass of pan
mass not exactly 100 g [2]
(d) one from:
mark line through the centre of the mass (can award from diagram)
use position of edges of mass on rule
[1]
[Total: 7]
12 (a) rule balanced and pivot at centre of mass [1]
(b) EITHER take readings from 50.2 cm mark

OR add mass/weight/load
OR place pivot at 50.2 cm mark [1]
(c) (i) cm, cm [1]
(ii) clockwise 77.5 (or 78) (N cm)

anticlockwise 78 (N cm) [1]
(d) EITHER repeats
OR estimate between two best positions that almost balance but tip opposite sides o.w.t.t.e
OR suitable method to locate centre of mass Q [1]
[Total: 5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 302
Mechanics
13 (a) m = 180.2(0) and unit (g) [1]
V1 value = m [1]
unit cm3 c.a.o. [1]
(b) V2 = 170 c.a.o. [1]
(c) d1 = 7.35 to 7.4, d2 = 5.0 to 5.1, h = 7.9 [1]

D = 6.2 to 6.3 allow e.c.f. [1]
V3 = 239 to 246 and 2 or 3 significant figures only allow e.c.f. [1]
(d) method 2 – one from:

some water left in cup/spilt
measuring cylinder not read at eye level/perpendicularly/bottom of meniscus
parallax explained [1]
method 3 – one from:
d1 not at liquid level
d1 and d2 not inside diameters
difficult to measure h (because of sloping side)
h not measured at eye level/perpendicularly/parallax explained [1]
(e) mass of cup / zero reading on balance [1]
[Total: 10]
14 (a) (i) l in range 17.1–17.2 (cm) [1]
(ii) x in range 15.5–15.6 (cm) and correct calculation of y (e.c.f. incorrect l) [1]
(b) use of at least 3 turns [1]
(mark string and) measure distance (between marks) and divide by number of
turns [1]
(c) (i) any one from:

• stretching of string
• thickness of string
• thickness of mark
• gaps between turns
• winding of turns at an angle [1]
(ii) V = 7.1(0)–7.2(0) cm3 e.c.f. (a)(ii) [1]
(iii) VE = 0.2–0.6 (cm3) [1]

(expect estimate to nearest 0.1 cm3)
sensible reasoning / working / method which takes account of sharpened

shape and length [1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 303
Mechanics
15(a) h = 9.5cm dT = 7.2 cm – 7.3 cm and dB = 4.5 cm [1]
dA = 5.85 / 5.9 cm (no mark), V rounds to 260 cm3 (no ecf) [1]
2 or 3 significant figures and cm3 [1]
(b) measurement of circumference half way up, or at top and bottom [1]
more than one revolution used for the measurement in at least one position, and
divide [1]
(c) (i) 225 [1]
(ii) 275 (ecf 500 – candidate’s (c)(i) [1]
(d) correct line of sight clearly shown at right angles outside measuring cylinder [1]
[Total: 5]
16 (a) any one from:

• reference to how to determine the centre of the bob
• measure to top of bob then add on half diameter measured with blocks and
rule or callipers
• measure to top and bottom of bob and average
• reference to perpendicular viewing (reducing parallax)
• rule parallel with/close to string/appropriate use of set-square [1]
(b) (i) t = 28.4(0) NOT 28:4 [1]
(ii) T = 1.42 (s) allow ecf from (i) [1]
(iii) reduce effect of errors in starting/stopping stopwatch [1]
(c) statement to match results (expect no) [1]
justification using results, including idea of difference is beyond limits of

experimental uncertainty owtte [1]
(d) minimum of three more values [1]
all values ≥ 20 cm and ≤ 300 cm, and three values are at least 10 cm apart [1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 304
Mechanics
17 (a) any one from: [1]
• clamp rule
• rule close to spring
• ensure rule vertical
• avoidance of parallax errors (explained)
• use of set square / fiducial aid
(b) graph:
• axes both correctly labelled, right way round and with units [1]
• suitable scales [1]
• all plots correct to within ½ small square [1]
• good best-fit straight line, single, thin, continuous line [1]
(c) value consistent with candidate’s graph [1]
(d) (i) 8(.0) (cm) [1]
(ii) W = 1.4–1.7 (N) [1]

indication on graph which matches candidate’s value [1]
(e) any one from: [1]
• data only to 2 sig. figs.
• cannot plot / read graph to that level of accuracy
• cannot read rule to that level of accuracy
[Total 10]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 305
Mechanics
18 (a) table:
at least 2 d values correct: 30.0, 24.2, 19.8, 17.2, 15.0 (cm) to ± 0.5 cm
(accept values 50–d) [1]
rule readings subtracted from 50 cm [1]
all 5 d values correct: 30.0, 24.2, 19.8, 17.2, 15.0 (cm) to ± 0.2 cm [1]
1/d values correct (note: at least 2 significant figures) [1]
(b) any one difficulty and corresponding solution from:

difficulty obtaining balance as rule tips one way then the other
allow to tip one way then the other and take average
mass obscuring marks on rule

mark centre of the mass so it can be read against rule
OR take average of right hand and left hand readings for mass position
mass sliding off rule

OR rule sliding off pivot
suitable means for preventing mass or rule sliding [max 2]
(c) graph:
axes labelled with quantity and unit [1]
scales suitable, plots occupying at least half grid [1]
plots all correct to ½ square (take centre of plot if large) [1]
well-judged thin line (≤ ½ square) [1]
(d) triangle method used and shown (any indication on graph) using at least half line
(can be seen in calculation) [1]
(e) µ = 27 – 33 (g) to 2 or 3 significant figures [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 306
Mechanics
19(a) (i) l = 14.7 AND d = 2.5 [1]
(ii) boiling tube between blocks and ruler spanning gap [1]
suitable precaution e.g. [1]

measure in (at least) 2 places and take average,
avoid lip,
ensure blocks smooth,
no dirt between tube and block
(iii) V1 = 72 [1]
(b) (i) V2 = 54 [1]
(ii) line of sight perpendicular to reading / [1]

read from bottom of meniscus
(iii) V3 correctly calculated [1]
(c) (i) ρ = 1.7 to 1.8 [1]
unit g / cm3 [1]
(ii) m = 32 (g) [1]
(d) suitable source of inaccuracy [1]

e.g.
• any reference to why tube is not a cylinder,
• tube may contain some water when mass taken,
• difficult to fill to brim and then pour out
appropriate effect on value of ρ explained [1]
[Total: 12]
Physics O.L
20(a)(i) A and B values correct A:40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0, 20.0 1
B:34.0, 28.8, 24.0, 19.2, 14.0

(a)(ii) cm, cm, Ncm, N cm 1
(b) Graph:
Mechanics
Paper 6
Physics O.L
Axes correctly labelled with quantity, right way round 1
Appropriate scales, starting at origin (0,0) 1
All plots correct to ½ small square 1
Good line judgement, thin, continuous, single line through the plots; with neat plots 1
(c) Method shown on graph and Y correct to ½ small square. 1
(d) W = 1.0–1.4. No ecf 1
(e) Difficulty of achieving balance or other sensible suggestion 1
(f) Expect agree; allow ecf. Explanation includes idea of close enough (or, ecf, too different) 1
Total 10
21(a) x shown clearly from centre of P to pivot 1
(b) Make Q into a cube / regular shape / small contact area with rule 1
(c) Move Q or P slowly one way until it just tips, then back other way until it tips back and take middle reading 1
OR repeat procedure / experiment AND take average
(d) Measure width w of cube 1
Place w / 2 either side of desired position 1
OR draw centre line on cube / find centre of mass of cube

and mark side of rule in desired position
Mechanics
OR take readings on both sides of the cube and

find the mean
Dr. Mostafa Allam

(e) Place rule on pivot (without P and Q) and record / find balance point
Total: 5
307
22(a) indication of taking mean reading / deducing half load length and adding or subtracting 1
Mechanics
Paper 6
scale reading = 70(.0)
1
Physics O.L
(b) F values=1.45, 2.20, 2.80, 3.55, 4.05 1
consistent 2 dp 1
(c) graph:
• axes labelled with quantity and unit 1
• appropriate scales (plots occupying at least ½ grid) 1
• plots all correct to ½ small square 1
• well judged straight line and thin line, precise plots 1

(d)(i) y read correctly from graph 1
(d)(ii) W in range 1.4 to 2.0 1
to 2 or 3 sig fig and with unit of N 1

(e) any suitable source on inaccuracy, e.g.: 1
• rule not uniform / weight not distributed evenly,
• load slips on rule,
• forcemeter not at zero to start,
• load values not exact
Total: 12
Mechanics
Dr. Mostafa Allam

308
23(a) l = 4.1 – 4.2 (cm) 1
(b) Either suitable use of a horizontal straight edge, explained briefly 1

Or holding rule close to pendulum
Or line of sight perpendicular (to rule)
Mechanics
(c)(i) T = 1.39 (s) OR 1.4 1
Paper 6
Physics O.L
(c)(ii) Pendulum may stop OR student may lose count 1
(c)(iii) 1.93 s2 (ecf allowed) 1
(c)(iv) 10.2(2) 1
2 or 3 significant figures 1
(d)(i) Explanation of cause of inaccuracy in measurement of t or l. 1

e.g. student did not react quickly enough when starting/stopping stopwatch OR difficulty in
measuring accurately to centre of bob
(d)(ii) Any two from: 2

Use different length(s)
Repeat timing
Use of a fiducial mark
Increased number of oscillations
Plot a graph using length and time or time2
Total: 10
24(a) c 1
(b)(i) (yes) straight line 1

through the origin 1
Mechanics
(b)(ii) 0.174 or 0.17 1

N/mm 1
Dr. Mostafa Allam

Total: 5
309
25 apparatus workable arrangement 1
Mechanics
Paper 6
how applied force is measured 1
Physics O.L
suitable table for results / plot a bar graph 1
how to conclude which is strongest 1
one suitable control variable: 1

e.g. same width of sample
same thickness / weight / length of paper
all samples fixed in same way
any 2 from: 2
2nd control variable,
force applied smoothly / no jerking
ensure no tears before applying force
repeat for each type of sample / repeat with samples of different widths
soft mat under weights (to cushion fall) / clamp stand to bench
add weight of lower block to value of load
any other suitable precaution
Total 7
Mechanics
Dr. Mostafa Allam

310
26 apparatus: 1
MP1 springs made by winding wire around rod (or similar)
Mechanics
Paper 6
method: 1
MP2 apply load, measure length / extension of spring
Physics O.L
MP3 repeat for spring(s) of different material 1
MP4 record results in suitable annotated table / bar chart / graph 1
control variables: 1
MP5 mark gained for any two of:
unstretched length of spring,
diameter of wire,
coil spacing,
load / range of loads used
diameter of spring
MP6 precautions / difficulties / additional points: 2

MP7 any two from:
clamp retort stand / might topple,
use small loads / spring might overstretch/spring too weak/use loads which don’t overstretch spring to support
loads
need to apply force smoothly / slowly,
suggested range of loads,
workable arrangement for applying load to spring (e.g. small loop at end of spring)
trial experiment to find (range of) loads to use
how to determine extension of spring,
repeat each reading and take average,
at least 5 loads for each sample if producing graph
Mechanics
Total: 7
Dr. Mostafa Allam

311
Mechanics 312
Mechanics
27(a)(i) 15 1
(a)(ii) Ring(s) do not extend (owtte) 1
(b) Use of set square to line up with scale OR perpendicular viewing 1
(c) Graph:
Axes correctly labelled and right way round 1
Suitable scales 1
All 6 plots correct to ½ small square 1
Good line judgement, thin, single, continuous line 1
(d) (NO);line does not pass through origin 1
(e) L in range 6–8 1
L in range 7.2–7.8 1
Total: 10
28(a)(i) l shown clearly from bottom of clamp to centre of bob 1
(a)(ii) Any 2 from: 2

Metre rule close to pendulum
Measurement from bottom of clamp
Set-square used as a horizontal reference
(b)(i) 1.01(1) 1
(b)(ii) Any 2 from: 2

Idea of averaging
Reaction time / judgement of when to stop / start (owtte)
Reduces effect of error / spreads error over 20 swings (owtte)
(c) 1.02(212) with 2, 3 or 4 significant figures 1
unit s2 1
Total: 8
Physics O.L
Mechanics 313
Mechanics
29 MP1 Stopwatch (or equivalent) AND (metre) rule / ruler 1
MP2 Measure time for 5 (+) oscillations 1
MP3 Divide by number of oscillations to find period (T) 1
MP4 Repeat for each bob 1
MP5 Variable; one from: 1

Initial amplitude / starting position
Length of pendulum / thread
Number of oscillations
MP6 Table with column headings for t, or period (T), or both AND d, with correct units 1
MP7 Conclusion: 1
Plot graph(s) of d against period (T) or t (or vice versa)
OR compare period (T) or t values for different diameters
30 4(a) 1 / Q values 1.(0), 0.5(0), 0.33(3), 0.25, 0.2(0) 1
4(b) Graph:
Axes correctly labelled and right way round 1
Suitable scales 1
All 5 plots correct to ½ small square 1
Good line judgement, thin, continuous line 1
4(c)(i),(ii) At least half line used for triangle method 1
Clearly shown on graph 1
P = 1.8 – 2.2 (N) 1
4(d) 1.9 1
4(e) Two from: Difficulty in obtaining balance 2

Difficulty in judging centre of loads
Loads may slip / slide
Forcemeter not sensitive
Forcemeter zero error
Physics O.L
Mechanics
Paper 6
31(a) graph:
Physics O.L
axes correctly labelled 1
suitable scales 1
all plots correct to ½ small square 1
good line judgement, thin, continuous line 1
(b) expect NO 1
line does not pass through origin
(c) 6,40,34 1
consistent units of N cm 1
(d) have not taken the weight of the rule/moment of the weight into account/not realised that Qb + mX = Pa /the pivot is not 1
at the centre (of mass) of the rule
Total: 8
Mechanics
Dr. Mostafa Allam

314
Mechanics 315
Mechanics
32(a)(i) d = 5.0 (cm) 1
(a)(ii) D = 50 cm 1
(a)(iii) clear correct use of set-square AND vertical ruler 1
(b)(i) 28.12 1
(b)(ii) 1.406 / 1.41 / 1.4 1
unit s / secs / seconds seen in 1(b)(i) or 1(b)(ii) at least once 1
(c) statement to match readings 1

justification to include the idea of within (or beyond e.c.f.)
the limits of experimental accuracy e.g. (very) close / almost equal 1
(d) final box ticked 1
(e) V, V, V, V, P, P all correct = 2 marks 2

4 or 5 correct = 1 mark
Fewer than 4 correct = 0 marks
33 method: 1
MP1 measure length of band
MP2 hang load, measure new length 1
MP3 repeat with different thicknesses/widths 1
control variable: 1
MP4 use same (original) length of band each time
table: 1
MP5 table with columns for thickness, (load) and
length / extension with units
conclusion: 1
MP6 plot a graph of extension / length against thickness (for the same load)
OR load against extension / length for different thicknesses
OR comparison via a table e.g. compare extensions / lengths
of different thicknesses for the same load
one additional point: 1

MP7 use same load / same range of loads
use at least 5 thicknesses / take at least 5 different readings to plot a
graph
show how to measure extension e.g. l − l0
use same type / material of rubber band
Physics O.L
34(a) W1 = 1.5 (N) 1
(b)(i) V1 = 155 (cm3) 1

Mechanics
(b)(ii) line of sight perpendicular 1
Paper 6
Physics O.L
to bottom of meniscus 1
(c) W2 = 0.7 (N) and V2 = 235 (cm3) 1
(d) 1 = 1.0 or ecf 1
unit g / cm3 1
(e) m1 = 241 (g) 1
(f) AV 0.978 / 0.977(g / cm3) 1
(g) appropriate cause of inaccuracy: 1

e.g:
• some water still in empty measuring cylinder
• water spilled, splashed when putty put in water
• water drops on putty when removed
• air bubbles on putty
suitable improvement: 1
e.g:
• measure m2 at start (when cylinder dry)
• measure new volume in Method OR refill to correct value
• shake putty to remove air / smooth surface to minimise bubbles
Mechanics
Total: 11
Dr. Mostafa Allam

316
Physics
O.L
Mechanics
Part 2
Dr. Mustafa Allam

Mechanics 1
1. Introduction, Measurements & Density
June Variant 1
2012 1 Question 1
The period of the vertical oscillations of a mass hanging from a spring is known to be
constant.
(a) A student times single oscillations with a stopwatch. In 10 separate measurements, the
stopwatch readings were:
1.8 s, 1.9 s, 1.7 s, 1.9 s, 1.8 s, 1.8 s, 1.9 s, 1.7 s, 1.8 s, 1.8 s.
What is the best value obtainable from these readings for the time of one oscillation?
Explain how you arrive at your answer.
best value = .....................................................................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe how, using the same stopwatch, the student can find the period of oscillation
more accurately.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 2
June Variant 1
2013 2 Question 1
(a) Define density.

..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The density of aluminium is 2.70 g / cm3. The thickness of a rectangular sheet of
aluminium foil varies, but is much less than 1 mm.
A student wishes to find the average thickness. She obtains the following measurements.
mass of sheet = 60.7 g

length of sheet = 50.0 cm
width of sheet = 30.0 cm
Calculate the student’s values for
(i) the volume of the sheet,
volume = .................................................. [2]
(ii) the average thickness of the sheet.
thickness = .................................................. [2]
(c) Another student, provided with a means of cutting the sheet, decides to find its average
thickness using a single measuring instrument. Assume the surfaces of the sheet are
perfectly smooth.
(i) Name a measuring instrument she could use.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 3
(ii) Describe the procedure she should follow to obtain an accurate value of the
average thickness of the sheet.
Details of how to read the instrument are not required.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
June Variant 1
2014 3 Question 2
A student has a large number of coins of different diameters, all made of the same metal. She
wishes to find the density of the metal by a method involving placing the coins in water.
(a) State the formula needed to calculate the density.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Describe how the measurements of the required quantities are carried out.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(c) State one precaution taken when carrying out the measurements in (b) to ensure that the
result is as accurate as possible.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 4
November Variant 1
2009 4 Question 1
Fig 1.1 shows part of a measuring instrument.
0
mm 25
20
Fig. 1.1
(a) State the name of this instrument.
................................................. [1]
(b) Record the reading shown in Fig. 1.1.
................................................. [1]
(c) Describe how you would find the thickness of a sheet of paper used in a magazine.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 5
Mark Scheme
1 (a) Period: 1.81 s OR 1.8 s as mean value
OR 1.8 s as most common reading / the mode B1
(b) Time a minimum of 2 (successive) oscillations B1

Divide result by the number of oscillations B1
OR
Count no. of oscillations in at least 20 s (B1)
Divide the time by the number of oscillations
OR Divide no. of oscillations by time and find reciprocal (B1)
2 of:
Repeat (several times) and find mean
Time with reference to fixed / fiducial point or top or bottom of oscillation
Check / set zero of stop-watch B2
Show knowledge of what is meant by one oscillation
[Total: 5]
2 (a) (density =) mass/volume OR mass per unit volume

OR m/V with symbols explained B1
(b) (i) (vol =) mass/density OR 60.7/2.70 C1

= 22.48 cm3 to 2 or more sig. figs A1
(ii) V = A × (average) thickness OR thickness = V/A

OR 22.48 / (50 × 30) C1
0.01499 cm to 2 or more sig. figs. e.c.f. (b)(i) A1
(c) (i) micrometer/screw gauge / (vernier/digital) callipers B1
(ii) check zero of device used / cut sheet into several pieces / detail of how to use
device / fold sheet B1
measure thickness of sheet in different places

OR measure thickness of several pieces together B1
calculate/obtain average thickness OR divide answer by number of measurements/
pieces/places B1
[Total 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 6
3 (a) (density =) mass / volume B1
(b) water used in measuring / graduated cylinder B1
volume of water known or read / recorded / taken B1
place the coins in the water and read / record / take new level of water in cylinder B1
subtract readings B1
OR ALTERNATIVE METHOD:
pour water into displacement can to level of spout (B1)
place the coins / several coins in the water (B1)
collect overflow (B1)
measure volume of overflow water using measuring graduated cylinder (B1)
measure mass / weigh the coins used with balance / spring balance B1
(c) one from:

read measuring cylinder levels at bottom of meniscus
repeat volume measurement and find average
place eye level with surface in measuring cylinder (to avoid parallax error)
place coins one at a time to avoid air bubbles between coins
avoid splashing when adding coins to water
make sure coins are dry / clean
use narrow / small measuring cylinder
place containers on horizontal surface
check zero of balance / spring balance / scales
displacement can method: make sure dripping finishes before and after adding coins B1
[Total: 7]
4 (a) micrometer OR screw gauge OR vernier scale NOT vernier callipers B1
(b) 2.73 mm B1
(c) check/set zero )

close instrument on to paper )
not too tight/use ratchet ) any 3 B1 × 3
take reading of both scales )
use several sheets )
divide reading by no. of sheets )
[5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 7
1. Introductions, Measurements & Density
June Variant 3
2014 1 Question 2
A student wishes to determine the density of a small, irregularly shaped stone.
(a) With the aid of a labelled diagram, describe an experiment to determine the volume of the
stone.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) (i) State the other quantity, apart from the volume, that must be measured in order to
determine the density.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the formula that is used to calculate the density.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 8
(c) The student now wishes to determine the volume of a small, irregularly shaped piece of wood
that floats in water. He notices that a small lead weight tied to the wood makes it sink in water.
Describe how the student can adapt the experiment in (a) to determine the volume of the
wood. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 9
March Variant 2
2016 2 Question 1
A driving instructor gives a student a sudden order to stop the car in the shortest possible time.
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of the motion of the car from the moment the order is given.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) The order to stop is given at time t = 0 s.
(i) State the speed of the car at t = 0 s.
speed = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why the car continues to travel at this speed for 0.9 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the deceleration of the car between t = 0.9 s and t = 4.0 s,
deceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the total distance travelled by the car from t = 0 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 10
(c) Describe and explain a danger to a driver of not wearing a safety belt during a sudden stop.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 11
November Variant 2
2014 3 Question 2
The list below gives the approximate densities of various metals.
gold 19 g / cm3
lead 11 g / cm3
copper 9 g / cm3
iron 8 g / cm3
At an antiques market, a collector buys what is advertised as a small ancient gold statue.
When the collector tests it in the laboratory, he finds its mass is 600 g and its volume is
65 cm3.
(a) In the space below, describe how the volume of the statue could be measured. You may
draw diagrams if you wish.
[3]
(b) Use the figures given above to decide whether the statue was really made of gold.
Show your working.
Was the statue made of gold? (Tick one box.)
yes
no
[3]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 12
Mark Scheme
1 (a) (if no diagram, max. mark is 3)
measuring / graduated cylinder B1
water AND initial reading OR known volume

alternative method: water AND filled eureka can owtte B1
immerse stone AND final reading
alternative method: immerse stone AND catch overflow B1
final reading – initial reading
alternative method: reading on measuring cylinder B1
(b) (i) mass, NOT with other quantity B1
(ii) (ρR)m / V in symbols or words B1
(c) attach weight to wood

OR different liquid
OR push down with stick M1
accuracy mark must match method

subtract volume of weight from total volume
OR new liquid less dense than wood
OR no part of stick in water / thin stick A1
[Total: 8]
2 (a) (i) 18 m / s B1
(ii) (0.90 s is) driver’s time to react B1
(b) (i) (a =) (v – u) / t OR ∆v / t OR either in words OR (18 – 0) / 3.1 OR 18 / 3.1 C1

5.8 m / s2 A1
OR
Values from any correct points on graph (C1)
Answer dependent on accuracy of chosen points (A1)
(ii) Evidence of use of: (distance =) area under graph e.g. 1 / 2bh C1
(18 × 0.9) + (0.5 × 3.1 × 18) C1
44 m A1
(c) (Without seat belt, driver:) e.g. keeps moving (forwards) / does not stop / has
inertia / has momentum B1
(Driver) hits steering wheel / windscreen / dashboard B1
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 13
3 (a) measuring cylinder with liquid B1

immerse statue B1
volume from difference of readings from measuring cylinder B1
OR
displacement can or equivalent or beaker filled to overflowing with liquid (B1)
immerse statue (B1)
measure volume displaced with measuring cylinder (B1)
(b) (D =) M/V OR 600/65 B1

9.23 g/cm3 (minimum 2 s.f.) N.B. unit penalty applies B1
OR
(For gold) (M =) V × D OR 65 × 19 (B1)
1235 g (minimum 2 s.f.) N.B. unit penalty applies (B1)
OR
(For gold) (V =) M / D OR 600/19 (B1)
31.6 cm3 (minimum 2 s.f.) N.B. unit penalty applies (B1)
‘NO’ ticked if justified by previous work in (a) or (b).

e.c.f from wrong values above B1
[6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 14
2. Speed and Acceleration
November Variant 1
2011 1 Question 1
(a) Define acceleration. Explain any symbols in your definition.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows a graph of speed against time for a train. After 100 s the train stops at a
station.
30
speed 25
m/s
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) For the time interval between 40 s and 100 s, calculate the distance travelled by the train.
distance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The train stops for 80 s, then accelerates to 30 m / s with an acceleration of 0.60 m / s2. It
then travels at constant speed.
Complete the graph for the interval 100 s to 280 s, showing your calculations in the space
below.
[5]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 15
June Variant 1
2012 2 Question 2
A girl rides her bicycle along a straight level road. Fig. 2.1 shows a graph of her distance
moved against time.
400 D
300
distance / m
200
100
B
A
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(a) Describe her motion
(i) from A to B, ..............................................................................................................
(ii) from B to C, ..............................................................................................................
(iii) from C to D. ..............................................................................................................

[3]
(b) Calculate
(i) her average speed from A to D,
average speed = ................................................. [2]
(ii) her maximum speed.
maximum speed = ................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 16
November Variant 1
2012 3 Question 1
Fig. 1.1 shows the graph of speed v against time t for a train as it travels from one station to
the next.
20
v
m/s
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
t /s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Use Fig. 1.1 to calculate
(i) the distance between the two stations,
(ii) the acceleration of the train in the first 10 s.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 17
(b) The mass of the train is 1.1 × 105 kg.
Calculate the resultant force acting on the train in the first 10 s.
resultant force = ................................................. [2]
(c) The force generated by the engine of the train is called the driving force.
Write down, in words, an equation relating the driving force to any other forces acting on
the train during the period t = 10 s to t = 130 s.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 18
June Variant 1
2013 4 Question 2
(a) Underline the vectors in the following list of quantities.
density energy force mass velocity volume [2]
(b) A small metal ball is projected into the air with a velocity of 40 m / s vertically upwards.
The graph in Fig. 2.1 shows how the velocity changes with time until the ball reaches its
maximum height.
40
velocity
m/s
20
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
time / s
–20
–40
Fig. 2.1
Use the graph to find,
(i) the time at which the ball reaches its maximum height,
time = .................................................. [1]
(ii) the deceleration of the ball,
deceleration = .................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 19
(iii) the maximum height reached by the ball.
maximum height = .................................................. [2]
(c) On Fig. 2.1, add a line to the graph to show how the velocity of the ball changes after it
reaches its maximum height. Your line should extend to time 6.0 s. [1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 20
June Variant 1
2015 5 Question 1
(a) Figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show speed-time graphs for two objects, each moving in a straight line.
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
(i) Describe the motion of the object shown by the graph in Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe the motion of the object shown by the graph in Fig. 1.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) On a day with no wind, a large object is dropped from a tall building. The object experiences
air resistance during its fall to the ground.
State and explain, in terms of the forces acting, how the acceleration of the object varies
during its fall.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 21
November Variant 1
2015 6 Question 1
Fig. 1.1 shows a rocket-powered sled travelling along a straight track. The sled is used to test
components before they are sent into space.
sled
track
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 is the speed-time graph for the sled from time t = 0 s.
1000
800
speed
m/s 600
400
200
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(a) On Fig. 1.2, mark a point labelled P to indicate a time when the acceleration of the sled is not
constant. [1]
(b) (i) Calculate the acceleration of the sled at t = 1.0 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Determine the distance travelled by the sled between t = 1.0 s and t = 2.0 s.
distance = ...........................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 22
(c) The resultant force acting on the sled remains constant during the test.
Suggest why the acceleration of the sled is not constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 23
June Variant 1
2016 7 Question 1
(a) A bus travels at a constant speed. It stops for a short time and then travels at a higher constant
speed.
Using the axes in Fig. 1.1, draw a distance-time graph for this bus journey.
distance
0
0 time
Fig. 1.1
[3]
(b) A lift (elevator) starts from rest at the ground floor of a building.
Fig. 1.2 is the speed-time graph for the motion of the lift to the top floor of the building.
4.0
speed
m/s
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
time / s
Fig. 1.2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 24
Use the graph to determine the distance from the ground floor to the top floor of the building.
distance = ................................................................. [4]
[Total: 7]
November Variant 1
2016 8 Question 1
An astronaut on the Moon drops a feather from rest, off the top of a small cliff. The acceleration
due to gravity on the Moon is 1.6 m / s2. There is no air on the Moon.
(a) The feather falls for 4.5 s before it hits the ground.
(i) On Fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the falling feather. [2]
speed
m/s
6
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(ii) Determine the distance fallen by the feather.
distance = .......................................................... [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 25
(b) On Fig. 1.2, sketch the shape of a speed-time graph for the same feather falling on Earth.
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 1.2
[2]
(c) Explain the difference between speed and velocity. Include the words vector and scalar in
your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 26
June Variant 1
2017 9 Question 1
Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for an ice skater.
12
speed
m/s
10
0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Explain what is meant by deceleration.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Use Fig. 1.1 to determine
(i) the distance travelled between times t = 3.0 s and t = 6.0 s,
distance = ...........................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 27
(ii) the deceleration between times t = 3.0 s and t = 6.0 s.
deceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(c) (i) State what happens to the size of the deceleration after time t = 6.0 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State what happens to the resultant force on the skater after time t = 6.0 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 28
November Variant 1
2017 10 Question 1
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for the motion of a car.
20
speed
m/s
15
10
0
0 10 20 30 40
time / s
Fig. 1.1
The mass of the car is 1200 kg.
(a) Calculate, for the first 20 s of the motion,
(i) the distance travelled by the car,
distance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the acceleration of the car,
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the resultant force acting on the car.
resultant force = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Describe the motion of the car in the period of time from 25 s to 40 s.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 29
June Variant 1
2018 11 Question 1
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a vehicle accelerating from rest.
30
speed 25
m/s
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the acceleration of the vehicle at time = 30 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Without further calculation, state how the acceleration at time = 100 s compares to the
acceleration at time = 10 s. Suggest, in terms of force, a reason why any change has taken
place.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Determine the distance travelled by the vehicle between time = 120 s and time = 160 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 30
November Variant 1
2018 12 Question 1
A train of mass 5.6 × 105 kg is at rest in a station.
At time t = 0 s, a resultant force acts on the train and it starts to accelerate forwards.
Fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for the train for the first 120 s.
5000
distance / m
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Use Fig. 1.1 to determine:
1. the average speed of the train during the 120 s
average speed = ...........................................................[1]
2. the speed of the train at time t = 100 s.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 31
(ii) Describe how the acceleration of the train at time t = 100 s differs from the acceleration
at time t = 20 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) (i) The initial acceleration of the train is 0.75 m / s2.
Calculate the resultant force that acts on the train at this time.
resultant force = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) At time t = 120 s, the train begins to decelerate.
State what is meant by deceleration.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 32
November Variant 1
2016 13 Question 1
An astronaut on the Moon drops a feather from rest, off the top of a small cliff. The acceleration
due to gravity on the Moon is 1.6 m / s2. There is no air on the Moon.
(a) The feather falls for 4.5 s before it hits the ground.
(i) On Fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the falling feather. [2]
speed
m/s
6
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(ii) Determine the distance fallen by the feather.
distance = .......................................................... [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 33
(b) On Fig. 1.2, sketch the shape of a speed-time graph for the same feather falling on Earth.
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 1.2
[2]
(c) Explain the difference between speed and velocity. Include the words vector and scalar in
your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 34
Mark Scheme
1 (a) acceleration = v – u OR ∆v (symbols used to be explained)
t t
OR change of velocity ÷ time
OR rate of change of velocity
OR change of velocity per second / in 1 sec (allow ‘in a certain time’) B1
accept speed for velocity
(b) (i) use of any area under graph C1

750 m A1
(ii) time = change of speed ÷ acceleration OR 30/0.60 C1

= 50 (s) A1
if working for t = 50 s not shown, allow 2 marks for correct use of 50 s
graph: along y-axis to 180 s / rise starts at 180 s B1
from x-axis rises to 30 m/s at 230 s / candidate’s calculated time B1
horizontal from top of slope to 280 s B1 [8]
allow ½ square tolerance at 180 s where relevant
allow ecf from wrong t
2 (a) (i) Increasing speed / acceleration B1
(ii) Constant / steady / uniform speed or motion B1
(iii) Decreasing speed / deceleration / braking / slowing / stopping / negative

acceleration B1
(b) (i) (Total) distance / (total) time OR d / t OR 400 / 60 C1

6.67 m/s at least 2 s.f. A1
(ii) Mention of maximum gradient OR clear that whole or part of B to C is used C1

Use of correct data from graph to +/– ½ square C1
Answer rounds to 9.2 to 9.4 m/s, at least 2 s.f. A1
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 35
3 (a) (i) s = area under graph, stated or clearly used C1

= (½ × 18 × 10) + (120 × 18) + (½ × 18 × 20) Award if at least one term correct C1
= 90 + 2160 +180 C1
= 2430 m / 2.43 km at least 2 significant figures. *Unit penalty applies A1
(ii) v = u + at in any form OR (a=) gradient OR 18/10 C1

= 1.8 m/s2 *Unit penalty applies A1
(b) (F=) ma OR 1.1 × 105 × 1.8 ecf from (a)(ii) C1
5
= 1.98 × 10 N at least 2 significant figures. *Unit penalty applies A1
(c) driving force = friction/air resistance/drag B1 [9]
*Apply unit penalty once only
4 (a) underline or circle force B1

underline or circle velocity B1
(b) (i) 4.07 – 4.1 (s) B1
(ii) (v – u)/t OR ∆v/t OR in words OR use of 40 ÷ (ans. to (b)(i))

OR other correct values from graph C1
answer between 9.7 and 10 m/s2 or m/s/s A1
(iii) area under graph OR ½ (u + v)t OR ½ × 40 × (ans. to (b)(i)) C1

OR s = ut + ½at2 OR v2 = u2 + 2as OR numbers substituted
82 m A1
(c) graph continues in straight line to 6 s B1
[Total 8]
5 (a) (i) acceleration OR increasing speed C1
constant acceleration OR constant rate of increase in speed A1
(ii) decreasing acceleration OR decreasing rate of increase in speed

NOT deceleration B1
(b) mention of air resistance AND weight (of object) / force due to gravity B1
acceleration at start (of fall) is acceleration of gravity / 10 m / s2 / a maximum / g

OR acceleration decreases (as it falls) B1
air resistance increases as speed increases/as it accelerates B1
acceleration zero/terminal velocity/constant speed/maximum speed when

air resistance = weight B1
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 36
6 (a) point marked P (on line or time axis) at t ≥ 2.0 s B1

(b) (i) attempt at gradient OR (a =) ∆v / t OR (v – u) / t OR 240 (–0) / 2.0
OR division of correct points on graph C1
120 m / s2 A1
(ii) suggestion of area (under graph) in words or formula or numbers
OR 0.5 (120 + 240) × 1.0 OR [(120 × 1.0) + (0.5 × 120 × 1.0)] C1
180 m A1
(c) mass of sled changes / decreases OR fuel used up B1
[Total: 6]
7(a) From time zero, line of constant positive gradient, not necessarily from origin B1
Horizontal line from end of sloping line B1
Line of steeper positive gradient from end of horizontal line B1
(b) (distance =) area under graph stated C1
0.5 × 7.5 × 3.3 (= 12.375)

+ 12.5 × 3.3 (= 41.25) C2
+ 0.5 × 5 × 3.3 (= 8.25)
OR ½ (a + b)h (C1)
= 0.5 × (25 + 12.5) × 3.3 (C1)
OR (25 × 3.3) – (0.5 × 12.5 × 3.3) (C2)
62 m A1
Total: 7
8(a)(i) Straight line from origin to (4.5 s, 7.2 m/s) B2
Tolerance in plotting: ½ a square
8(a)(ii) Use of area stated or implied by numbers used C1

OR average speed × time OR s = (u+v) / t / 2 OR vt / 2 A1
OR 0.5 × 4.5 × 7.2
16(.2) m
8(b) Rises from origin and curves with decreasing gradient B1

Finishes horizontal B1
8(c) Speed is scalar Velocity is vector B1

Speed has magnitude / size / value (only) B1
Velocity has magnitude / size / value and direction
OR velocity has direction; speed does not
Total: 8
Physics O.L
Question Answer Marks
9(a) decrease of velocity / speed B1

OR slows / slowing down
(b)(i) Area under graph OR ½ (u +v)t C1
Physics O.L
OR ½ × (11 + 5) × 3 OR ½(6 × 3) OR (3 × 5)
Paper 4 - Variant 1
24 m A1
(b)(ii) (a =) ∆v / ∆t OR (v – u) / t OR (5 – 11) / (6 – 3) C1
2.0 m / s2 A1
(c)(i) (deceleration) decreases B1
(c)(ii) (Resultant force) decreases B1
Total: 7
10(a)(i) Distance = area under graph OR 0.5 × 20 × 13 C1
130 m A1
(a)(ii) (a =) (v – u) / t OR (a =) v / t OR 13 / 20 C1
0.65 m / s2 A1
(a)(iii) (F =) ma OR 1200 × 0.65 C1

Mechanics
= 780 N A1
Dr. Mostafa Allam

(b) Acceleration decreases OR rate of increase of speed decreases OR speed increases at a lower rate B1
37
11(a) Mention of gradient of graph at t = 30 s OR tangent drawn at t = 30 s and triangle drawn 1
Acceleration in range 0.30 to 0.45 m / s2 1
(b) Acceleration less/at a slower rate 1
Physics O.L
Less driving force OR greater resistive force/friction/air resistance/drag 1
Paper 4 - Variant 1
Resultant force less 1
(c) Area under graph 1
Distance = (20 × 40) + (½ × 40 × 10) OR ½ × (30 + 20) × 40 1
1000 m 1
12(a)(i)1 (4800
/ 120 =) 40 m / s B1
(a)(i)2 (v =) gradient of any part of straight line C1
Value between 50 and 60 m / s A1
(a)(ii) At t = 20 s, acceleration > zero / acceleration is taking place / greater acceleration than at 100 s B1
At t = 100 s, acceleration = zero / 0 B1
(b)(i) (F =) ma OR 5.6 × 105 × 0.75 C1

Mechanics
4.2 × 105 N A1
(b)(ii) Speed / velocity decreases (with time) OR slowing down B1
Dr. Mostafa Allam

OR negative acceleration
OR Rate of decrease of speed / velocity
38
Mechanics 39
13(a)(i) Straight line from origin to (4.5 s, 7.2m/s) B2
Tolerance in plotting: ½ a square
(a)(ii) Use of area stated or implied by numbers used C1

OR average speed × time OR s = (u+v) / t / 2 OR vt / 2 A1
OR 0.5 × 4.5 × 7.2
16(.2) m
(b) Rises from origin and curves with decreasing gradient B1

Finishes horizontal B1
(c) Speed is scalar Velocity is vector B1

Speed has magnitude / size / value (only) B1
Velocity has magnitude / size / value and direction
OR velocity has direction; speed does not
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 40
June Variant 2
2012 1 Question 2
Fig. 1.1 is a distance / time graph showing the motion of an object.
25
20
distance / m
15
10
0
0 1 2 3 4
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Describe the motion shown for the first 2 s, calculating any relevant quantity.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) After 2 s the object accelerates.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch a possible shape of the graph for the next 2 s.
[1]
(b) Describe how a distance / time graph shows an object that is stationary.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 41
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows the axes for a speed / time graph.
10
8
speed
m/s 6
0
0 1 2 3 4
time / s
Fig. 1.2
On Fig. 1.2, draw
(i) the graph of the motion for the first 2 s as shown in Fig. 1.1,
(ii) an extension of the graph for the next 2 s, showing the object accelerating at 2 m / s2.
[3]
(d) Describe how a speed / time graph shows an object that is stationary.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 42
June Variant 2
2013 2 Question 4
A rocket, initially at rest on the ground, accelerates vertically.
It accelerates uniformly until it reaches a speed of 900 m / s after 30 s.
After this period of uniform acceleration, the rocket engine cuts out. During the next 90 s, the
upward speed of the rocket decreases uniformly to zero.
(a) On Fig. 4.1, plot a speed-time graph for the rocket for the first 120 s of its flight.
speed
m/s
time / s
Fig. 4.1 [4]
(b) Using the graph,
(i) calculate the acceleration during the first 30 s,
acceleration = .................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 43
(ii) determine the height reached by the rocket after 120 s.
height reached = .................................................. [2]

[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 44
June Variant 3
2013 3 Question 1
A train is at rest in a railway station. At time t = 0, the train starts to move forwards with an
increasing speed until it reaches its maximum speed at time t = 48 s.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the first 48 s of the journey.
40
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) State how the graph shows that, during the first 48 s of the journey, the acceleration
of the train is constant.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Calculate the acceleration of the train during the first 48 s of the journey.
acceleration = .................................................. [2]
(b) After time t = 48 s, the train continues at its maximum speed for another 72 s.
(i) On Fig. 1.1, sketch the speed-time graph for the next 72 s of the journey. [1]
(ii) Determine the total distance travelled by the train in the 120 s after it starts moving.
distance = .................................................. [3]

[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 45
November Variant 2
2013 4 Question 1
A school athlete does a sprint training run. Fig. 1.1 shows how her speed varies with time.
8
6
speed
m/s
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a)Explain how the graph in Fig. 1.1 can be used to determine the distance she runs.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b)Determine her maximum acceleration. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
maximum acceleration = .................................................. [4]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 46
(c) She runs a distance of 62 m.

Calculate her average speed.
average speed = .................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 47
June Variant 3
2014 5 Question 1
Parachutes are used to slow down a certain racing car.
Fig. 1.1 shows the racing car, of total mass 750 kg, slowing down by using parachutes.
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 is the speed-time graph for 20 s after the car reaches full speed.
80
70
speed 60
m/s
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
time t / s
Fig. 1.2
At time t = 6.0 s, the parachutes open.

(a) On Fig. 1.2,
(i) mark a point, labelled A, where the car is moving at constant speed,
(ii) mark a point, labelled B, where the car is decelerating at a uniform rate,
(iii) mark a point, labelled C, where the car is decelerating at non-uniform rate.
[3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 48
(b) Calculate
(i) the deceleration of the car at time t = 6.5 s,
deceleration = ............................................... [2]
(ii) the resultant force acting on the car at this time.
resultant force = ............................................... [2]
(c) Explain why there is no resultant force acting on the car at time t = 4.0 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 49
March Variant 2
2015 6 Question 1
(a) A large stone, initially at rest, falls from the top of a building. The stone takes 3.2 s to fall to the
ground. For this stone, air resistance can be ignored.
(i) Stating the formula that you use, show that the speed of the stone when it hits the ground
is 32 m / s.
[1]
(ii) On Fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the fall of the stone. Label with an X the line
on the graph. [1]
40
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(iii) Use the graph in (ii) to determine the height of the building.
height = ........................................................ [2]
(b) A smaller stone than the stone in (a) falls from the same building. This stone is affected by air
resistance.
(i) What happens to the air resistance as the stone falls? Underline your choice of answer.
Air resistance decreases. Air resistance is constant. Air resistance increases. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 1.1, draw a possible speed-time graph for the fall of this stone. Label with a Y this
line on the graph. [3]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 50
June Variant 2
2015 7 Question 1
An experiment is carried out to find the acceleration of free fall.
A strip of paper is attached to a heavy object. The object is dropped and falls to the ground, pulling
the paper strip through a timer. The timer marks dots on the paper strip at intervals of 0.020 s.
Fig. 1.1 shows a section of the paper strip with the first three dots marked. The first dot on the
paper strip, labelled A, is marked at the instant the object is dropped.
0.0076 m
A 0.0019 m
paper strip
Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)
(a) State how the dots on the paper strip show that the object is accelerating.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate the average speed of the object
(i) in the first 0.020 s after the object is dropped,
average speed = .............................................................
(ii) in the second 0.020 s after the object is dropped.
average speed = .............................................................

[3]
(c) Use the results from (b) to calculate the acceleration of the falling object.
acceleration = .........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 51
June Variant 3
2015 8 Question 1
At a sports event, a champion runner and a car take part in a race.
(a) The runner runs at a constant speed of 10 m / s from the start of the race. During the first 5.0 s
of the race, the car’s speed increases from 0 m / s to 25 m / s at a uniform rate.
On Fig. 1.1, draw

a graph to show the motion of the runner, [1]
(i)
(ii) a graph to show the motion of the car.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
/s
time
Fig. 1.1 [1]
(b) Use your graphs to determine
(i) the distance travelled by the runner in the 5.0 s,
distance = ...........................................................[1]
the distance travelled by the car in the 5.0 s,
(ii)
distance = ...........................................................[2]
the time at which the car overtakes the runner.
(iii)
time = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 52
June Variant 2
2016 9 Question 1
(a) An object is moving in a straight line at constant speed. A force is applied to the object.
State the possible changes in the motion of the object.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows a skier taking part in a speed competition. The winner of the competition has
the highest average speed over the 100 m section shown in Fig. 1.1.
start
skier
100 m
Fig. 1.1
(i) The skier starts from rest and has a constant acceleration. He reaches a speed of
60 m / s in 16 s.
Calculate the skier’s acceleration.
acceleration = ................................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 53
(ii) Over the length of the 100 m section, the time recorded is 1.85 s.
Calculate the skier’s average speed over the section.
average speed = ................................................................. [2]
(iii) Suggest why the skier bends his body, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Explain your answer.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 54
March Variant 2
2017 10 Question 1
(a) Fig. 1.1 shows the axes used to plot distance-time graphs.
distance
0
0 time
Fig. 1.1
On Fig. 1.1, draw graphs for an object that is
(i) moving with constant speed, labelling the graph A,
(ii) moving with decreasing speed, labelling the graph B. [2]

(b) Fig. 1.2 shows the axes used to plot speed-time graphs.
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 1.2
On Fig. 1.2, draw graphs for an object that is
(i) moving with constant acceleration, labelling the graph S,
(ii) moving with increasing acceleration, labelling the graph T. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 55
(c) A plane is at rest on an airport runway. The brakes of the plane are released and the engine
of the plane provides a constant accelerating force.
Using the following data, calculate the take-off speed of the plane. Ignore any resistive forces.
constant forward force = 56 000 N

mass of plane = 16 000 kg
time of travel along runway = 16 s
speed = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 56
June Variant 2
2018 11 Question 1
(a) Fig. 1.1 shows the axes of a distance-time graph for an object moving in a straight line.
80
distance / m
60
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) 1. On Fig. 1.1, draw between time = 0 and time = 10 s, the graph for an object moving
with a constant speed of 5.0 m / s. Start your graph at distance = 0 m.
2. State the property of the graph that represents speed.
....................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Between time = 10 s and time = 20 s the object accelerates. The speed at time = 20 s is
9.0 m / s.
Calculate the average acceleration between time = 10 s and time = 20 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 57
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows the axes of a speed-time graph for a different object.
50
speed
m/s
40
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
time / s
Fig. 1.2
The object has an initial speed of 50 m / s and decelerates uniformly at 0.35 m / s2 for
(i) 100 s.
On Fig. 1.2, draw the graph to represent the motion of the object. [2]
Calculate the distance travelled by the object from time = 0 to time = 100 s.
(ii)
...........................................................[3]
distance =
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 58
June Variant 3
2018 12 Question 1
There is no atmosphere on the Moon.
A space probe is launched from the surface of the Moon. Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of
the space probe.
5000
speed
m/s
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 100 200 300
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Determine the acceleration of the space probe at time = 0.
acceleration = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Between time = 0 and time = 150 s, the acceleration of the space probe changes.
(i) Without calculation, state how the graph shows this.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 59
(ii) During this time, the thrust exerted on the space probe by the motor remains constant.
State one possible reason why the acceleration changes in the way shown by Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Calculate the distance travelled by the space probe from time = 200 s to time = 300 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 60
November Variant 3
2018 13 Question 1
Fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for a moving car.
500
distance / m
400
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, mark a point P where the acceleration of the car is zero. [1]
(b) Determine:
(i) the speed of the car at time t = 15 s
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the average speed of the car between time t = 30 s and time t = 45 s.
average speed = ...........................................................[2]
(c) At time t = 45 s, the car starts to decelerate. At time t = 55 s and at a distance of 400 m from
the starting point, the car stops. It then remains stationary for 5.0 s.
On Fig. 1.1, draw a possible continuation of the distance-time graph. [3]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 61
November Variant 3
2010 14 Question 1
A young athlete has a mass of 42 kg. On a day when there is no wind, she runs a 100 m race in
14.2 s. A sketch graph (not to scale) showing her speed during the race is given in Fig. 1.1.
speed
m/s
8.0
0
0 3.0 14.2
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate
(i) the acceleration of the athlete during the first 3.0 s of the race,
acceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the accelerating force on the athlete during the first 3.0 s of the race,
force = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) the speed with which she crosses the finishing line.
speed = ......................................................... [3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 62
(b) Suggest two differences that might be seen in the graph if there had been a strong wind
opposing the runners in the race.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 63
Mark Scheme
1 (a) (i) constant/steady/uniform speed/velocity OR speed/velocity = 2.5 (m/s) B1

speed/velocity = 2.5 m/s accept fraction, average speed/velocity = 2.5 m/s B1 [2]
(ii) shape curving upward but not to vertical, at least to 3.5 s unless reaches
25 m B1 [1]
(b) horizontal (straight) line OR careful sketch

accept parallel to time/x-axis B1 [1]
(c) tolerance on both axes ± ½ small square throughout both parts
(i) horizontal straight line at 2.5 m/s from 0 to 2 s, ecf from (a)(i) B1
(ii) straight line rising to the right as far as the edge of the graph area M1
∆v = 4 m/s or gradient clearly 2 m/s2 A1 [3]
(d) horizontal (straight) line M1

at 0 m/s A1 [2]
accept for both marks: line in/along time/x-axis OR line with y/v = 0 OR careful
sketch
[Total: 9]
2 (a) suitable scales (more than half each scale used, no products of 3 s, 7 s etc.) B1
2 straight line sections, continuous 0 to 120 s, 1st section positive gradient,
2nd section negative gradient B1
section 1 straight line, from(0, 0) to (30, 900) B1
section 2 straight line from end of section 1 to (120, 0) B1 [4]
(b) (i) use of a = ∆v / t or ∆v / t in any form words, symbols or numbers C1
(a = 900 / 30 =) 30 m / s2 A1 [2]
e.c.f. from graph
(ii) use of s = area under graph (accept valid equation(s)) C1

(distance = 0.5 × 900 × 120 =) 54 000 m A1 [2]
e.c.f. from continuous graph, if curves working must be clear
no e.c.f. from graph if it’s a single rectangle
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 64
3 (a) (i) constant/uniform gradient/slope OR straight line B1

(ii) (a = ∆) v ÷ t OR 36 ÷ 48 C1
0.75 m / s2 (NOT 0.76) A1
(b) (i) horizontal line from (48, 36) to (120, 36) B1
(ii) area under graph (mentioned or implied) B1

864 OR 2592 C1
3500/3460/3456 m A1 [7]
4 (a) measure area (under curve) B1 [1]
(b) draws tangent at steepest part by eye, within thickness of lines

accept triangle / lines to indicate values on straight steepest part of curve B1
finds ∆v and ∆t from tangent or at straight steepest part of curve B1
any v divided by any t or in equation B1
3.0 – 4.2 m / s2 B1 [4]
(c) uses 62 and 10 NOT 2 × 62 C1

6.2 m / s A1 [2]
[Total: 7]
5 (a) (i) A marked between t = 0 and t = 6.0 s B1
(ii) B marked between t 6.0 s and t = 7.0 s B1
(iii) C marked on clearly curved section before t = 14 s B1
(b) (i) (a =)∆v / t OR 30 / 1 OR 15 / 0.5 etc. OR triangle on graph / tangent C1
(ignore – sign) 25 m / s2 < a < 35 m / s2 A1
(ii) (F =)ma OR 750 × 30 e.c.f. from (b)(i) C1
2.2 / 2.25 / 2.3 × 104 N e.c.f. from (b)(i) A1
(c) acceleration / rate of change of speed is zero OR speed is constant OR air

resistance / backwards force equal and opposite to driving / forwards force B1
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 65
6 (a) (i) a = (v – u)÷t OR a = ∆v÷t in any form OR in words in any form

AND with correct numbers substituted B1
(ii) Straight line from origin to point (3.2 s, 32 m / s) B1
(iii) Area under graph OR ½ × 3.2 × 32

OR s = ½ at2 OR ½ × 10 × 3.22 C1
51 m A1
(b) (i) Air resistance increases B1
(ii) Graph line Y under graph line X B1

Graph has decreasing gradient B1
Graph extends to value of t greater than 3.5 s and greater than X B1
[Total: 8]
7 (a) dots farther apart (in 2nd time interval) owtte B1
(b) (i) (average speed =) d ÷ t, in any form, e.g. words, symbols, numbers C1
0.095 m / s A1
(ii) (average speed =) 0.29 m / s B1
(c) (a =) (v – u) ÷ t C1
= (candidate’s (b)(ii) – candidate’s (b)(i)) ÷ 0.02 C1
correct value calculated from candidate’s values in (b)(i)(ii), expect 9.5 m / s2 A1
8 (a) (i) horizontal line at 10 m / s B1
(ii) straight line from origin to (5.0, 25) B1
(b) (i) 50 m B1
(ii) area of triangle OR ½ × 25 × 5.0 C1
62.5 m OR 63 m A1
(iii) when areas under graphs are equal C1

4.0 s A1
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
9(a) accelerate / speed up } any B2

}
decelerate / slow down / } two
come to rest / stop } from
change direction / path curves } four
Physics O.L
(b)(i) a = (v–u)/ t in any form or (v–u) / t C1

{(60 – 0) / 16 or 60 / 16 = } 3.8 m / s2 A1
Paper 4 - Variant 2&3

(b)(ii) (average speed) = (tot) dist / (tot) time C1
(100 / 1.85 = ) 54 m / s A1
(b)(iii) to reduce (air) resistance / drag OR B1
to lower centre of mass
to increase acceleration / speed / resultant force OR smaller (frontal) area / better aero(dynamic) shape OR to improve B1
stability / balance
Total: 8
10(a)(i) Constant positive or negative gradient, labelled A B1
(a)(ii) Decreasing positive or negative gradient, labelled B B1
(b)(i) Constant positive or negative gradient, labelled S B1
(b)(ii) Increasing positive or negative gradient, labelled T B1
(c) F = ma in any form OR (a =) F / m OR 56 000 / 16 000 C1
3.5 (m / s2) C1
Mechanics
a = (v – u) / t in any form OR v – u = at OR v = at OR at OR 3.5 × 16 C1
Dr. Mostafa Allam

56 m / s A1
Total: 8
66
11(a)(i) 1 straight line from (0,0) to (10,50) 1
2 gradient/slope 1
(a)(ii) a= ∆v ÷ ∆t in any form OR (a=) ∆v ÷ ∆t 1

OR (a =) (9–5) ÷ 10 OR 4 ÷ 10
Physics O.L
(a =) 0.40 m / s2 1
(b)(i) straight line down from any point on y-axis to any speed at 100 s 1

from (0,50) to (100,15) 1
(b)(ii) uses area under graph OR av speed × time 1

OR s=ut + ½ at2 OR v2=u2 + 2as
100 × (50 + 15) ÷ 2 OR 100 × 15 + ½ (100 × 35) 1

OR 5000 – ½ × 0.35 × 1002
3300 m 1
12(a) tangent on graph OR gradient OR (a =) ∆v ÷ ∆t or (v – u) ÷ t C1
accept gradient increases; not gradient decreases C1
values from tangent or line 13 to 14 m / s2 A1
(b)(i) gradient changes OR graph is curved B1
(b)(ii) mass of space rocket decreases OR gravitational field strength decreases B1

Mechanics
(c) area under graph OR (distance =) average speed × time C1
Dr. Mostafa Allam

4550 × 100 OR (4100 + 5000) ÷ 2 × 100 C1
4.5/4.55/4.6 × 105 m A1
67
Mechanics 68
13(a) P marked on line between t = 0 s and t = 30 s B1
(b)(i) ( v =) gradient or 150 / 30 or appropriate division using other points C1
5.0 m / s A1
(b)(ii) ( v =) x / t or (300 – 150) / (45 – 30) or 150 / 15 C1
10 m / s A1
(c) gradient decreasing B1
smooth transition to horizontal and line not too thick B1
horizontal to (60 s, 400 m) B1
14 (a) (i) (v – u)/t OR v/t OR 8/3 C1

2.7 m/s2 A1
(ii) ma OR 42 × answer from (i) OR 42 × 8/3 C1

110/112 N e.c.f. A1
(iii) (distance in 1st 3 secs =) 12 m OR (dist in last 3 secs =) 88 m C1

use of area of trapezium OR area of “top” triangle C1
7.7 m/s A1
(b) longer time to top speed )

longer total time )
lower top speed )
lower finishing speed ) any 2 B1+B1
specific/all speeds lower (not speed decreases) )
less slope/less acceleration (in first section) )
greater slope/greater deceleration in 2nd section )
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 69
3. Momentum, Force & Impulse
November Paper 3
1993 1 Question 2
(al Theresa set up an experinent to determine how far a wire stretches when a weight is hung
from it. The arrang!IITlent she sot up is shown in Fig. 2.1.
magnlly!ng glass
wire hek! between blocks or wood
c::>-
pulley
... .
heavy wooden bench
scare
variable
weights
Fig. 2.1
What procedures would Theresa need to use to "find by how much the wire stretched per
newton of weight hung from it?
·--·---·-·---- ----··· .. ···· -- .. -··-·--··············· .. ···-·-·· ·----········ .. ··- .
-····-··--····---·-· ..-··-·--···-·-··-·--····-·--··-·····-··-······-··-·-- .. ----·--······-·-··--
•-•••·---·-·---•u--••••••--•--u .. ••--•••---•-••-•••••••••••••-•-••••-•--••-••-•••••••••-••-•••
-----··--·--·---··----�-------· ------------·
--·---··--··-·-·····-·········-····--·····--····-··-------·---131
(bl F,gur� 2.2 shows the graph of extension against load for a particular spling.
extension/cm
0
load/N 30
Fig. 2.2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 70
A load was suspended by ™' such springs in two different ways, as illustrated in F,os. 2.3(a)
and 2.3lbl. ·
strong support slrong support
1 2
.,, .
20 N
2·
Fig. 2.3(a)
20N
.Fig..2..,lb)
State, with a reason, ths extension of each spring in each case.
(al (bl
. .
spring 1 extension • ... ·--·· ...··--··-- .... ·-· extensJiOn • -·· ..··-·-·---··--
teasOl'l! ..... _ reason: __ .. _
--...-· ..... ·-·-·· ... ··- ..---·····-· --······---·-······--· .. ··- ...·--
spring 2 extension • ..... __ ••..• ·------M···-· extension • -··-·-··-·· .• ·----· ...·--
reason: _ - ·-·-····- reason: -··-······-·····-·-·-·······----
151
Physics O.L
Mechanics 71
June Paper 3
1994 2 Question 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 72
Physics O.L
Mechanics 73
June Paper 3
1997 3 Question 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 74
Physics O.L
Mechanics 75
Physics O.L
Mechanics 76
Physics O.L
Mechanics 77
November Paper 3
1997 4 Question 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 78
Physics O.L
Mechanics 79
Physics O.L
Mechanics 80
(d) Another falling capsule, with Its parachute open and of total mass 1200kg, was
observed whilst ft fell from 800 rh above the Earth until it was stationary on the
ground. The average gravitational field strength over !his distance was 9.7 N/kg.
(I) Calculate the decrease in potential energy during the faff.
(fl) Stale the form of energy that Increases throughout the fall, as the potential
energy decreases •
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
(flf) Explain the energy transformation that Is taking place •
............................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................�·····
.............................................................................................................................
. .
[SJ
Physics O.L
Mechanics 81
June Paper 3
2003 5 Question 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 82
Physics O.L
Mechanics 83
June Variant 1
2011 6 Question 1
In a laboratory, an experiment is carried out to measure the acceleration of a trolley on a horizontal

table, when pulled by a horizontal force.
trolley
force
Fig. 1.1
The measurements are repeated for a series of different forces, with the results shown in the table
below.
force / N 4.0 6.0 10.0 14.0
acceleration 0.50 0.85 1.55 2.25

m / s2
(a) On Fig. 1.2, plot these points and draw the best straight line for your points. [2]
16
force / N
12
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
acceleration
m / s2
Fig. 1.2
Physics O.L
Mechanics 84
(b) The graph shows that below a certain force there is no acceleration.
(i) Find the value of this force. ............................................................................................ [1]
(ii) A force smaller than that in (b)(i) is applied to the stationary trolley. Suggest what happens
to the trolley, if anything.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Show that the gradient of your graph is about 5.7.
gradient = ...........................................................[1]
(d) (i) State the equation that links resultant force F, mass m and acceleration a.
[1]
(ii) Use your gradient from (c) to find the mass of the trolley.
mass = ...........................................................[2]
(e) On Fig. 1.3, sketch a speed / time graph for a trolley with constant acceleration.
speed
0
0
time
Fig. 1.3
[1]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 85
November Variant 1
2013 7 Question 1
(a) State Hooke’s law.

..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Fig. 1.1 shows a graph of the stretching force F acting on a spring against the extension
(b)
x of the spring.
250
200
F /N
150
100
50
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
x / mm
Fig. 1.1
State the features of the graph that show that the spring obeys Hooke’s law.
(i)
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
Calculate k, the force per unit extension of the spring.

(ii)
................................................... [3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 86
(iii) The limit of proportionality of the spring is reached at an extension of 50 mm.
Continue the graph in Fig. 1.1 to suggest how the spring behaves when the
stretching force is increased to values above 125 N. [1]
(iv) Another spring has a smaller value of k. This spring obeys Hooke’s law for
extensions up to 80 mm.
On the grid of Fig. 1.1, draw a possible line of the variation of F with x for this
spring. [1]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 87
Specimen Variant 1
2016 8 Question 3
The engine of an unpowered toy train is rolling at a constant speed on a level track, as shown in
Fig. 3.1. The engine collides with a stationary toy truck, and joins with it.
moving engine
stationary truck
track
Fig. 3.1
Before the collision, the toy engine is travelling at 0.32 m / s. The mass of the engine is 0.50 kg.
(a) Calculate the momentum of the toy engine before the collision.
momentum = [2]
(b) The mass of the truck is 0.30 kg.

Using the principle of conservation of momentum, calculate the speed of the joined engine
and truck immediately after the collision.
speed = [3]
[Total: 5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 88
June Variant 1
2016 9 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a dummy of mass 70 kg used in a crash test to investigate the safety of a new car.
passenger dummy
barrier compartment
windscreen
Fig. 2.1
The car approaches a solid barrier at 20 m / s. It crashes into the barrier and stops suddenly.
(a) (i) Calculate the momentum of the dummy immediately before the crash.
momentum = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) Determine the impulse that must be applied to the dummy to bring it to rest.
impulse = ................................................................. [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 89
(b) In the crash test, the passenger compartment comes to rest in 0.20 s.
Calculate the deceleration of the passenger compartment.
deceleration = ................................................................. [2]
(c) The seat belt and air bag bring the dummy to rest so that it does not hit the windscreen.
2
The dummy has an average deceleration of 80 m / s .
Calculate the average resultant force applied to the dummy, of mass 70 kg.
force = ................................................................. [2]
(d) The deceleration of the dummy is less than the deceleration of the passenger compartment.
Explain why this is of benefit for the safety of a passenger.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 90
June Variant 1
2017 10 Question 2
A footballer kicks a ball vertically upwards. Initially, the ball is stationary.
(a) His boot is in contact with the ball for 0.050 s. The average resultant force on the ball during
this time is 180 N. The ball leaves his foot at 20 m / s.
Calculate
(i) the impulse of the force acting on the ball,
impulse = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the mass of the ball,
mass = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the height to which the ball rises. Ignore air resistance.
height = ...........................................................[3]
(b) While the boot is in contact with the ball, the ball is no longer spherical.
State the word used to describe the energy stored in the ball.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 91
June Variant 1
2017 11 Question 3
Fig. 3.1 shows remote sensing equipment on the surface of a distant planet.
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mass of the equipment is 350 kg. The acceleration of free fall on the surface of this planet
is 7.5 m / s2.
(i) State what is meant by the term weight .
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the weight of the equipment on the planet.
weight = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The equipment releases a balloon from a point that is a small distance above the surface
of the planet. The atmosphere at the surface of this planet has a density of 0.35 kg / m3. The
inflated balloon has a mass of 80 g and a volume of 0.30 m3.
Make an appropriate calculation and then predict and explain the direction of any motion of
the balloon. Show your working.
prediction ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 92
June Variant 1
2016 12 Question 2
(a) State what is meant by the principle of conservation of energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a girl throwing a heavy ball.
ball
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the energy changes that take place from when the girl begins to exert a force on
the ball until the ball hits the ground and stops moving.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The mass of the ball is 4.0 kg. The girl exerts a force on the ball for 0.60 s. The speed of
the ball increases from 0 m / s to 12 m / s before it leaves the girl’s hand.
Calculate:
1. the momentum of the ball on leaving the girl’s hand
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
2. the average resultant force exerted on the ball.
average resultant force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 93
June Variant 1
2007 13 Question 1
Fig. 1.1 shows a model car moving clockwise around a horizontal circular track.
direction of
movement
P
model circular
car track
Fig. 1.1
(a) A force acts on the car to keep it moving in a circle.
(i) Draw an arrow on Fig. 1.1 to show the direction of this force. [1]
(ii) The speed of the car increases. State what happens to the magnitude of this force.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) (i) The car travels too quickly and leaves the track at P. On Fig. 1.1, draw an arrow to
show the direction of travel after it has left the track. [1]
(ii) In terms of the forces acting on the car, suggest why it left the track at P.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 94
(c) The car, starting from rest, completes one lap of the track in 10 s. Its motion is shown
graphically in Fig. 1.2.
30
25
speed / 20
cm / s
15
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(i) Describe the motion between 3.0 s and 10.0 s after the car has started.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Use Fig. 1.2 to calculate the circumference of the track.
circumference = ................................................ [2]
(iii) Calculate the increase in speed per second during the time 0 to 3.0 s.
increase in speed per second = ................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 95
November Variant 1
2007 14 Question 1
A large plastic ball is dropped from the top of a tall building.
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for the falling ball until it hits the ground.
20
15
speed
m / s 10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) From the graph estimate,
(i) the time during which the ball is travelling with terminal velocity,
time = ................................................ [1]
(ii) the time during which the ball is accelerating,
time = ................................................ [1]
(iii) the distance fallen while the ball is travelling with terminal velocity,
distance = ................................................ [2]
(iv) the height of the building.
height = ................................................ [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 96
(b) Explain, in terms of the forces acting on the ball, why
(i) the acceleration of the ball decreases,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) the ball reaches terminal velocity.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 97
Mark Scheme
1 a - I ) Place a mark (or small piece of gummed paper) on the
end of the wire below the magnifying glass and record
its reading on the scale (!3-1)
2) Place a weight of several newtons (W) on the variable
weights and record the new reading of the mark {R.2)
3) The extension of the wire= Ri - R1

I (R -R)
11 11 11 11 11
4) per newton of weight= 1. '
. "N
b - 30 N load produces an extension of 5 cm

20 N " II II II II x
'l()�S
x = = 3.33 cm
1()
Case (a) Case (b)
. 1 Tl . 3.33
Spnng : 1e extension = -- Spring 1 : extension= 3 . 3 3 cm

1.
= 1 . 6 7 cm because it is extended by the
because it is extended by half the whole 20 N load
load only, i.e., a load of 1 0 N Spring 2 : (same value and
produces an extension of l.67cm same reason as above)
Spring 2 : (same value and same
reason as above)
Physics O.L
Mechanics 98
Physics O.L
Mechanics 99
Physics O.L
Mechanics 100
Physics O.L
Mechanics 101
Physics O.L
Mechanics 102
5 (a) (i) force of gravity acts on masses/weight of masses B1

(ii) vector has direction/force has direction B1 2
(b) (i) spring 1 (more difficult) M1

any correct relevant pair of values A1
(ii) P marked at extension 25 mm to 28 mm A1
explanation in terms of end of proportionality B1
(iii) each graph read at 15 N, approx. 25 mm, 19 mm C1
difference correct, 6 mm +/- 1 mm A1 6
[8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 103
6 (a) all points correctly plotted ±½ small square B1

straight line of best fit for candidate’s points B1
(b) (i) candidate’s correct value with unit (± 0.2), (expect 1.2 N) B1
(ii) remains stationary / nothing happens / no acceleration NOT constant speed B1
(c) Correct data from candidates graph for ∆F and ∆m, used in ∆F/∆m B1
(d) (i) F = ma in any form, letters, words B1
(ii) gradient = F/a OR gradient = m ignore m=F/a C1

candidate’s (c) with correct unit A1
(e) straight line of positive gradient B1 [9]
7 (a) extension (of spring) proportional to load / force (applied)

OR load / force (applied) proportional to extension
OR force = constant × extension
OR extension = constant × force
OR F = kx in any form with symbols explained B1
(b) (i) graph is through the origin AND is a straight line / has a constant gradient B1
(ii) F = kx in any form OR (k =) F/x C1
use of a point anywhere on graph e.g. 50 / 20 C1
2.5 N / mm OR 2500 N / m A1
(iii) from 50 mm extension, graph curves with no negative gradient B1
(iv) straight line through origin with smaller gradient than graph shown finishing
at more than 50 mm B1
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 104
8 (a) p = mv in any form, words or symbols [1]

0.16 kg m / s OR N s [1]
(b) use of principle of conservation of momentum in words, symbols or numbers [1]

use of combined mass 0.5(0) + 0.3(0) OR 0.8(0) (kg) [1]
0.2(0) m / s [1]
9(a)(i) (momentum =) mv OR 70 × 20 C1
= 1400 kg m / s OR N s A1
9(a)(ii) same numerical answer as (a)(i) with either unit OR 1400 kg m / s B1
9(b) (a = ) change of velocity / time OR (v – u) /t OR 20 / 0.2 C1
A1
100 m / s2
9(c) (F =) ma OR 70 × 80 C1
5600 N A1
9(d) Force / impact on passenger or dummy less (than without seat belt / airbag) M1
Passenger less likely to be injured / hurt / damaged A1
Total: 9
Physics O.L
Physics O.L
10(a)(i) Ft OR 180 × 0.050 C1
Paper 4 - Variant 1
9.0 Ns OR 9.0 kg m / s A1
(a)(ii) Ft = m(v – u) OR Ft = mv – mu OR Ft = mv C1
OR (m =) Ft / v OR 9.0 / 20
0.45 kg A1
(a)(iii) mgh = ½ mv2 OR (h =) v2/ 2 g C1
(h =) 202 / (2 × 10) C1
20 m A1
OR (C1)
t = v / g = 2
h = average speed × time (C1)
20 m (A1)
(b) Elastic (energy) OR strain (energy) B1
Total: 8
Mechanics
Dr. Mostafa Allam

105
Physics O.L
11(a)(i) (Weight is) force/pull of gravity (acting on an object) B1
Paper 4 - Variant 1
(a)(ii) Mass × acceleration due to gravity OR mg OR 350 × 7.5 C1
2600 N A1
(b) (ρ =) m / V in any form C1
0.27 (kg / m3) OR 270 (g / m3) A1
Balloon moves/floats up B1
(Floats when) density of balloon less than density of atmosphere B1

OR (sinks when) density of balloon greater than atmosphere
OR (ρ =) m / V in any form (C1)
110 g (A1)
Balloon rises (B1)
(Floats when) mass/weight of balloon less than mass/weight of atmosphere (of same volume as balloon) (B1)
(Sinks when) mass/weight of balloon greater than mass/weight of atmosphere (of same volume as balloon)
Total: 7
Mechanics
Dr. Mostafa Allam

106
Physics O.L
Paper 4 - Variant 1
12(a) Energy cannot be created or destroyed B1
OR energy can only be transferred from one form to another

OR total energy remains constant
(b)(i) Chemical (energy) to kinetic (energy) AND / OR potential (energy) B1
Any one of: B1

Kinetic (energy) to potential (energy) OR gravitational (energy)
Potential (energy) OR gravitational (energy) to kinetic (energy)
Kinetic (energy) to thermal (energy) OR heat (energy)
(b)(ii)1 (momentum =) mv OR 4.0 × 12 C1
48 kg m / s or N s A1
(b)(ii)2 (average force =) momentum change / time OR m(v – u) / t C1

OR (mv – mu) / t OR F = ma AND a = (v – u) / t OR 48 / 0.60
80 N A1
Mechanics
Dr. Mostafa Allam

107
Mechanics 108
13 (a) (i) straight arrow towards centre, by eye B1 [1]
(ii) force larger B1 [1]
(b) (i) straight arrow along tangent at P clockwise, by eye B1 [1]
(ii) friction between tyres and track provide centripetal force B1
friction too small (to provide required force) B1 [2]
(c) (i) constant speed/velocity OR uniform motion OR no acceln. B1 [1]

NOT constant motion
(ii) (3 × 25)/2 + (7 × 25) OR area under graph C1
212.5 cm any no s.f. ğ 2 A1 [2]
(iii) 25/3 or increase in speed/time C1
8.33 cm/s any no s.f. ğ 2 OR 8⅓ cm/s accept cm/s2 A1 [2]
[Total: 10]
14 (a) (i) 1.6s to 1.8s ALLOW 4.2 – 6s ALLOW 4.4 – 6s NOT 2s NOT 4.0 – 6s B1
(ii) 6 – his (i), evaluated ALLOW 0 – 4.2s ALLOW 0 – 4.4s NOT 0 – 4s e.c.f. B1
(iii) his (i) × 20 C1

32 – 36m or his (i) × 20 evaluated
allow B1 only for 40m with no working A1
(iv) area under whole graph or ½vt + his(iii) C1

70 – 95m A1
(b) (i) weight of ball down and (air) resistance up

OR friction opposes weight )
upward/resistance/friction force increases
with time/distance/speed/as ball falls ) any 3 B1×3
net force reduces )
less force, so less acceleration )
(ii) up force = down force OR no resultant force OR air res. = weight B1

no net force, no acceleration/constant speed B1
[Total: 11]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 109
November Variant 3
2011 1 Question 1
An astronaut has a mass of 65 kg on Earth, where the gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg.
(a) Calculate the astronaut’s weight on Earth.
weight on Earth = ............................................................[2]
(b) Complete the following sentence.
The astronaut’s weight on Earth is the ................................................................... force
between the astronaut and ................................................................... . [1]
(c) The astronaut undertakes a Moon landing. On the Moon the gravitational field strength
is 1.6 N / kg.
(i) State the astronaut’s mass on the Moon.
mass = ...............................................................
(ii) Calculate the weight of the astronaut on the Moon.
weight on Moon = ...............................................................

[2]
[Total: 5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 110
November Variant 3
2013 2 Question 2
A spring S is suspended from a clamp stand in a school laboratory.
A student hangs various masses from the end of S and determines the extension x produced
by each mass.
(a) Calculate the weight of a 250 g mass.
weight = ................................................. [2]
(b) The student plots a graph of the force F applied to the spring against the extension x.
Fig. 2.1 is the student’s graph.
6.0
5.0
F /N P
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
x / cm
Fig. 2.1
At point P on the graph, the line begins to curve.
(i) State the name given to point P.

..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
Use the section of the graph where spring S obeys Hooke’s law (F = kx) to
(ii) determine the spring constant k of the spring.
k = ................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 111
(c) Fig. 2.2 shows a mass of 0.12 kg resting on the bottom of a box.
box mass spring
Fig. 2.2
A spring that is identical to S connects the mass and one side of the box. Ignore friction
between the mass and the box.
(i) The box and the mass are at rest.
State the resultant force acting on the mass.
force = ................................................. [1]
(ii) The box is firmly attached, in a horizontal position, to the body of a racing car.
As the car accelerates the spring stretches by 2.0 cm.
1. Using Fig. 2.1, determine the tension in the spring.
tension = ................................................. [1]
2. Calculate the acceleration of the mass produced by this tension.
acceleration = ................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 112
November Variant 2
2014 3 Question 3
Fig. 3.1 shows the speed- time graph of a firework rocket as it rises and then falls to the ground.
rocket
moving
upwards
speed
E
0
0 B time
rocket
moving C D
downwards
Fig. 3.1
The rocket runs out of fuel at A. It reaches its maximum height at B. At E it returns to the ground.
(a) (i) State the gradient of the graph at B. gradient = ............................................... [1]
(ii) State why the gradient has this value at B.

...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State and explain the relationship between the shaded areas above and below the time axis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Another rocket, of the same size and mass, opens a parachute at point B.
On Fig. 3.1, sketch a possible graph of its speed from B until it reaches the ground. [3]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 113
March Variant 2
2016 4 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a hammer being used to drive a nail into a piece of wood.
hammer head
nail
wood
Fig. 2.1
The mass of the hammer head is 0.15 kg.

The speed of the hammer head when it hits the nail is 8.0 m / s.
The time for which the hammer head is in contact with the nail is 0.0015 s.
The hammer head stops after hitting the nail.
(a) Calculate the change in momentum of the hammer head.
change in momentum = ...........................................................[2]
(b) State the impulse given to the nail.
impulse = ...........................................................[1]
(c) Calculate the average force between the hammer and the nail.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 114
June Variant 2
2016 5 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 shows two railway trucks on a track.
5.0 m / s
buffer truck B truck A

5000 kg 6000 kg track
Fig. 2.1
Truck A of mass 6000 kg is moving at 5.0 m / s. It is approaching truck B of mass 5000 kg, which is
stationary.
(a) Calculate the momentum of truck A.
momentum = ................................................................. [2]
(b) The trucks collide, their buffers compress and then they bounce off each other, remaining
undamaged.
After the collision, truck B has a momentum of 27 000 kg m / s.
(i) Determine the impulse applied to truck B.
impulse = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) The trucks are in contact for 0.60 s.
Calculate the average force on truck B.
force = ................................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 115
(iii) Calculate the final speed of truck A.
speed = ................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 116
June Variant 3
2016 6 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 shows two cars, A and B, before they collide.
18 m / s
stationary
car B car A
Fig. 2.1
Car B, of mass 1200 kg, is stationary. Car A, of mass 2000 kg, is travelling towards car B at 18 m / s.
(a) Calculate the momentum of car A.
momentum = ................................................................. [2]
The cars collide and car B experiences an impulse. Car A continues to move in the same
direction, with a momentum of 21 000 kg m / s.
(b) (i) Calculate the momentum of car B immediately after the collision.
momentum = ................................................................. [1]
(ii) Determine the average impulse experienced by car B during the collision.
impulse = ................................................................. [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 117
(iii) The cars are in contact for 0.20 s.
Calculate the average resultant force experienced by car B during the collision.
force = ................................................................. [2]
(c) A modern car is designed so that, during a collision, the front section of the car is crushed and
the time of contact increases.
Explain the benefit of increasing the time of contact for the people in the car.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 118
November Variant 2
2016 7 Question 2
(a) (i) State an expression for the kinetic energy of an object of mass m that is moving with a
speed v.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State and explain whether kinetic energy is a scalar quantity or a vector quantity.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows two fairground “bumper” cars.
stationary moving
empty car car
50 kg 2.5 m / s 200 kg
springs
Fig. 2.1
The car with passengers, of total mass 200 kg, is moving in a straight line. It is travelling at
2.5 m / s when it hits a stationary empty car of mass 50 kg.

After the collision, the empty car moves forwards in the same direction at a speed of 4.0 m / s.
For the car with passengers, determine
(i) its momentum when it is travelling at 2.5 m / s,
momentum = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the speed and direction of its motion immediately after the collision.
speed = ...............................................................
direction: ...............................................................
[3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 119
(iii) Fixed to the front and the back of the cars are large springs.
When the cars collide the springs compress.
The total kinetic energy of the cars after the collision is equal to the total kinetic energy
before the collision.
Describe the energy transfers that occur as the cars collide and then separate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 120
March Variant 2
2017 8 Question 2
(a) Explain why momentum is a vector quantity.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The crumple zone at the front of a car is designed to collapse during a collision.
concrete wall
crumple
zone
Fig. 2.1
In a laboratory test, a car of mass 1200 kg is driven into a concrete wall, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
A video recording of the test shows that the car is brought to rest in 0.36 s when it collides
with the wall. The speed of the car before the collision is 7.5 m / s.
Calculate
(i) the change of momentum of the car,
change of momentum = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the average force acting on the car.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 121
(c) A different car has a mass of 1500 kg. It collides with the same wall and all of the energy
transferred during the collision is absorbed by the crumple zone.
(i) The energy absorbed by the crumple zone is 4.3 × 105 J. Show that the speed of the car
before the collision is 24 m / s.
[2]
(ii) Suggest what would happen to the car if it is travelling faster than 24 m / s when it hits
the wall.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 122
June Variant 2
2017 9 Question 3
(a) Underline the pair of quantities which must be multiplied together to calculate impulse.
force and mass force and velocity mass and time
time and velocity weight and velocity force and time [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a collision between two blocks A and B on a smooth, horizontal surface.
A B A B
3.0 m / s v
2.4 kg 1.2 kg
before collision after collision

Fig. 3.1
Before the collision, block A, of mass 2.4 kg, is moving at 3.0 m / s. Block B, of mass 1.2 kg, is
at rest.
After the collision, blocks A and B stick together and move with velocity v.
Calculate
(i)
the momentum of block A before the collision,
1.
...........................................................[2]
momentum =
the velocity v,
2.
...........................................................[2]
velocity =
the impulse experienced by block B during the collision.
3.
...........................................................[2]
impulse =
Suggest why the total kinetic energy of blocks A and B after the collision is less than the
kinetic energy of block A before the collision.
(ii)
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 123
June Variant 3
2017 10 Question 2
(a) State the word equation that defines momentum.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A metal block A, travelling in a straight line at 4.0 m / s on a smooth surface, collides with a
second metal block B which is at rest. Fig. 2.1 shows the two metal blocks A and B before
and after the collision.
3.2 kg 1.6 kg
4.0 m / s at rest
before collision A B
1.5 m / s v
after collision A B
Fig. 2.1
The mass of A is 3.2 kg. The mass of B is 1.6 kg.

After the collision, the velocity of A is 1.5 m / s.
Calculate
(i) the momentum of A before the collision,
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the velocity v of B after the collision.
v = ...........................................................[3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 124
(c) In the collision that occurred in (b), block A and block B are in contact for 0.050 s.
Calculate the average force that is exerted on B during the collision.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
(d) After the collision in (b), the total kinetic energy of the two blocks is less than the kinetic
energy of block A before the collision.
Suggest one reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 125
November Variant 3
2018 11 Question 2
(a) Complete Fig. 2.1 by writing in the right-hand column the name of the quantity given by the
product in the left-hand column.
product quantity
mass × acceleration
force × time
[2]
Fig. 2.1
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows a man hitting a ball with a golf club.
golf club ball
Fig. 2.2
The ball has a mass of 0.046 kg. The golf club is in contact with the ball for 5.0 × 10–4 s and
the ball leaves the golf club at a speed of 65 m / s.
(i) Calculate:
the momentum of the ball as it leaves the golf club
1.
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
2. the average resultant force acting on the ball while it is in contact with the golf club.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) While the golf club is in contact with the ball, the ball becomes compressed and changes
shape.
State the type of energy stored in the ball during its contact with the golf club.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 126
November Variant 2
2009 12 Question 3
A student investigated the stretching of a spring by hanging various weights from it and
measuring the corresponding extensions. The results are shown below.
weight / N 0 1 2 3 4 5
extension / mm 0 21 40 51 82 103
(a) On Fig. 3.1, plot the points from these results. Do not draw a line through the points yet.
[2]
120
100
extension / mm
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
weight / N
Fig. 3.1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 127
(b) The student appears to have made an error in recording one of the results.
Which result is this?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Ignoring the incorrect result, draw the best straight line through the remaining points.
[1]
(d) State and explain whether this spring is obeying Hooke’s Law.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Describe how the graph might be shaped if the student continued to add several more
weights to the spring.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) The student estimates that if he hangs a 45 N load on the spring, the extension will be
920 mm.
Explain why this estimate may be unrealistic.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 128
November Variant 2
2009 13 Question 4
Fig. 4.1 illustrates an object on a string being whirled anticlockwise in a vertical circle.
A string
ground
Fig. 4.1
The lowest point of the circle is a small distance above the ground. The diagram shows the
object at the top A of the circle, and at B, when it is at the same height as the centre of the
circle.
(a) On Fig. 4.1, mark clearly
(i) the force of the string on the object
1. at A,
2. at B. [2]
(ii) the path the object would take until it hit the ground, if the string broke
1. at A,
2. at B. [3]
(b) The mass of the object is 0.05 kg. At A, the tension in the string is 3.6 N.
(i) Calculate the weight of the object.
weight = ................................................ [1]
(ii) Calculate the total force on the object at A.
total force = ................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 129
June Variant 2
2010 14 Question 2
Four students, A, B, C and D, each have a spring. They measure the lengths of their springs
when the springs are stretched by different loads.
Their results are shown in Fig. 2.1.
student A student B student C student D
load / N spring l ength / cm spring length / cm spring length / cm spring length / cm
0.5 6.7 9.2 9.1 10.0
1.0 7.7 10.0 9.9 11.1
1.5 8.7 10.8 10.7 12.2
2.0 9.7 11.6 11.5 13.3
2.5 10.7 12.6 12.3 14.4
3.0 11.7 13.8 13.1 15.5
3.5 12.7 15.2 13.9 16.6
4.0 13.7 16.8 14.7 17.7
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) State which student had loaded the spring beyond the limit of proportionality.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Explain how you obtained your answer to (a)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) For the spring used by student A, calculate
(i) the extra extension caused by each additional 0.5 N,
extra extension = ................................................ [1]
(ii) the unloaded length of the spring.
unloaded length = ................................................ [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 130
(c) Student A obtains a second spring that is identical to his first spring. He hangs the two
springs side by side, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
identical
springs
load
Fig. 2.2
Use the table to calculate the length of each of the springs when a load of 2.5 N is hung
as shown in Fig. 2.2. Show your working.
length = ................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 131
Mark Scheme
1 (a) mg in any form C1
650 N A1
(b) gravitational / attractive and the Earth B1
(c) (i) 65 kg B1
(ii) 104 OR 100 N ecf (i) B1 [5]
2 (a) (
W =) mg or 0.25 × 10 or 250 × 10 or 2500 C1
2.5 N A1 [2]
(b) (i) limit of proportionality or (the point where) proportionality between force and
extension stops or Hooke’s Law no longer obeyed (condone elastic limit) B1 [1]
(ii) gradient or numbers from graph divided e.g. 4.5 ÷ 10 C1

0.45 N / cm or 45 N / m A1 [2]
(c) (i) 0 (N) or zero or no net force etc. (ignore absent unit; wrong unit loses mark) B1 [1]
(ii) 1. 0.9 N (accept 0.8 N < value < 1.0 N) B1 [1]

2. (a =) F/m or 0.90/0.12 (e.c.f. from 2(c)(i)) C1
7.5 m / s2 (e.c.f. from 2(c)(i)) A1 [2]
[Total: 9]
3 (a) (i) 10 m / s2 ignore sign B1
(ii) (same as) acceleration (of rocket at B) OR gravitational acceleration B1
(b) same area B1

area represents distance travelled B1
distance up = distance down

OR overall displacement = 0
OR area above = distance up AND area below = distance below B1
(c) any three from:

• all of graph below x-axis after B
• final section horizontal and above CD AND gradient always < 0
• continuous graph from B until time > at DE
• new area not clearly different from old B3
[Total:
Physics O.L
Mechanics 132
4 (a) mv – mu OR m(v – u) OR mv OR 0.15 × 8.0 C1
1.2 N s or kg m / s A1
(b) 1.2 N s or kg m / s B1
(c) F = (mv – mu) / t OR F = mv / t OR impulse / t OR 1.2 / 0.0015 C1

800 N A1
OR
(F =) ma OR m[(v – u) / t] OR 0.15 × 8 / 0.0015 (C1)
800 N (A1)
[Total: 5]
5(a) momentum = mv C1
(=) 30 000 kg m / s OR N s A1
(b)(i) impulse same as momentum change C1

27 000 kg m / s OR N s A1
(b)(ii) F= impulse(mom ch) / t in any form C1

OR impulse(mom ch) / t
(F=27 000 / 0.6 = ) 45 000 N A1
(b)(iii) momentum loss truck A same as C1

momentum gain truck B / impulse
(final mom truck A=) C1
candidate’s (a) – candidate’s (b)(i)
(v= 3000/6000 =) 0.50 m/s A1
Total: 9
6(a) (p = )mv or 2000 × 18 C1

36 000 kg m / s (or N s) A1
(b)(i) 15 000 kg m / s (or N s) B1
(b)(ii) 15 000 kg m / s (or N s) (e.c.f.(i)) B1
(b)(iii) ( F =)p ÷ t or mv ÷ t or 15 000 ÷ 0.20 (e.c.f.(i)/(ii)) C1
75 000 N A1
(c) (increased time causes) decreased rate of: B1
change of momentum / acceleration / deceleration / impulse ÷ time
smaller forces on people / less injury B1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 133
7(a)(i) (K.E. =) ½ mv2 B1
(a)(ii) scalar AND direction does not matter B1
(b)(i) p = mv in any form OR mv C1

(p= 200 × 2.5 =) 500 kg m / s A1
(b)(ii) 500 – (50 × 4.0) or 500 – 200 C1
(v= 300 / 200 = ) 1.5 m / s A1
(in) same direction (as original motion) B1
(b)(iii) (during collision kinetic energy transferred to) elastic / strain energy M1
(elastic) energy transferred to kinetic energy or returned to car(s) A1
8(a) (Momentum) has direction B1

OR Momentum depends on velocity and velocity is a vector
(b)(i) (Change of momentum =) mv – mu OR m ∆v OR (-) mu C1

OR (–)1200 × 7.5
(–) 9000 kg m / s or N s A1
(b)(ii) (F =) change of momentum / time OR m(v – u) / t OR m∆v / t OR 9000 / 0.36 C1
25 000 N A1
OR
a = (v – u) / t OR (0 – 7.5) / 0.36 OR (–) 20.8 m / s2 (C1)
F = (ma OR 200 × 20.8 =) 25 000 N (A1)
(c)(i) ½ m v2 = 4.3 × 105 C1
v2 = 2 × 4.3 × 105 / 1500 OR v = (2 × 4.3 × 105 / 1500)1/2 C1
24 m / s A0
(c)(ii) Other parts of the car will deform / bend / break etc. OR more damage B1
Total: 8
Physics O.L
Physics O.L
9(a) ‘force and time’ B1


(b)(i)1. (momentum =) mv C1
(momentum = 2.4 × 3 =) 7.2 kg m / s OR Ns A1
(b)(i)2. (mA + mB)v = mA x 3 OR momentum conserved C1
(v = 7.2 / 3.6 = ) 2.0 m / s A1
(b)(i)3. (impulse / Ft =) m(v – u) C1
(impulse / Ft = 1.2 × (2–0) =) 2.4 kg m / s OR N s A1
(b)(ii) thermal/sound energy B1

(produced at collision/lost)
Total: 8
Mechanics
Dr. Mostafa Allam

134
10(a) (momentum =)mass × velocity B1
(b)(i) (p = )3.2 × 4.0 C1
13 kg m / s A1
(b)(ii) momentum conserved C1
Physics O.L
12.8 – (3.2 × 1.5) OR 12.8 – 4.8 OR 8.0 C1
OR 8.0 ÷ 1.6
5.0 m / s A1

(c) ∆p C1
(F = ) or 8.0 ÷ 0.050
∆t
160 N A1
(d) internal energy (of blocks) increase OR thermal energy/sound energy (lost/produced at collision) B1
Total: 9
11(a) 1st box: force B1
2nd box: impulse B1
(b)(i) 1 (p =) mv or 0.046 × 65 C1
3.0 kg m / s or 3.0 N s A1
C1
2 (F =) m(v – u) / t or or a = (v – u) / t and F = ma or
3.0 / 0.00050 0.046 × 65 / 0.00050 or
Mechanics
0.046 × 130 000
A1
Dr. Mostafa Allam

6000 N or 6000 N
(b)(ii) elastic (energy) or strain (energy) B1

135
Mechanics 136
12 (a) 5 points correctly plotted ±½ small square –1 e.e.o.o. (ignore 0,0) B2

(b) 3 N one, however identified OR 3rd value OR 4th value B1
(c) good straight line through origin and candidate’s remaining points B1
(d) straight line / constant gradient M1

does obey Hooke’s Law A1
OR
special case: obeys Hooke’s law because force ú extension or wtte B1
(e) graph becomes non-linear / curves / bends B1
Ignore reference to direction of curve or bend.
(f) will have exceeded / reached proportional / elastic limit

OR permanently deformed or equiv OR staightened
OR will have broken OR no longer elastic or wtte B1
[8]
13 (a) (i)1. force marked towards centre B1

2. force marked towards centre B1
(ii) 1. clearly horizontal at start to left or right M1

horizontal to the left curving down to reach ground to left of A B1
2. vertically down, not necessarily to reach ground B1
(b) Allow use of g = 9.81 or 9.8 throughout
(i) 0.5 N B1
(ii) 4.1 N or 3.1 N e.c.f. from (i) C1

4.1 N e.c.f. from (i) A1
[8]
14 (a) Mark (i) and (ii) together. Note both M1s required to score the A1 mark
(i) B M1
(ii) idea of greater / different (NOT less) increase in length for each additional load
accept load not proportional to extension or reverse argument M1
at 4th or 5th reading / value between 2.0 – 2.5 N / 11.6 – 12.6 cm A1
(b) (i) 1.0 cm B1
(ii) 5.7 cm B1
(c) 2.5 (cm) OR 1.25 (N) OR 5.0(cm) ignore 2.5N e.c.f. from (b) if clear C1
8.2 cm e.c.f. from (b) if clear A1
e.g. 10.7/2 (= 5.35) scores 0/2 [7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 137
4. Adding Vectors
November Paper 3
1994 1 Question 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 138
4. Adding Vectors
Physics O.L
Mechanics 139
4. Adding Vectors
Physics O.L
Mechanics 140
4. Adding Vectors
June Paper 3
1998 2 Question 1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 141
4. Adding Vectors
Physics O.L
Mechanics 142
4. Adding Vectors
Physics O.L
Mechanics 143
4. Adding Vectors
Physics O.L
Mechanics 144
4. Adding Vectors
June Paper 3
2003 3 Question 3
Physics O.L
Mechanics 145
4. Adding Vectors
November Variant 1
2012 4 Question 2
(a) State the factors which completely describe a vector quantity.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An aeroplane is flying towards the east in still air at 92 m / s. A wind starts to blow at
24 m / s towards the north.
Draw a vector diagram to find the resultant velocity of the aeroplane. Use a scale of
1.0 cm = 10 m / s.
resultant speed = ......................................................
angle between resultant and easterly direction = ......................................................

[5]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 146
4. Adding Vectors
June Variant 1
2014 5 Question 4
Fig. 4.1 shows a heavy ball B of weight W suspended from a fixed beam by two ropes P and Q.
beam
P Q
30 N 30 N
45° 45°
B
Fig. 4.1
P and Q are both at an angle of 45° to the horizontal. The tensions in P and Q are each 30 N.
(a) In the space below, draw a scale diagram to find the resultant of the tensions in P and Q. Use
a scale of 1.0 cm to represent 5.0 N. Label the forces and show their directions with arrows.
resultant = ............................................... [4]
(b) State the direction of the resultant. ...................................................................................... [1]
(c) State the magnitude of W. magnitude of W = ............................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 147
4. Adding Vectors
November Variant 1
2015 6 Question 2
(a) (i) Mass is a scalar quantity.

State another scalar quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Force is a vector quantity.
State another vector quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A boat is floating on still water.
The mass of the boat is 290 000 kg. A resultant force of 50 kN acts on the boat.
Calculate the acceleration of the boat.
acceleration = ...........................................................[3]
(c) Fig. 2.1, not to scale, shows the view from above of the boat, now on a fast-flowing river. The
boat accelerates.
Two forces are shown acting on the boat. The resultant of these forces is at right angles to the
river banks.
river bank
direction of
force from
engine
direction of
river current
direction of boat
force on boat
from river
current
river bank
Physics O.L
Mechanics 148
4. Adding Vectors
Fig. 2.2 is an incomplete vector diagram of the forces acting on the boat.
resultant force
force from river current
Fig. 2.2
The force from the river current is 80 kN.
(i) Determine the scale that has been used in the vector diagram.
scale is ...............................................................
(ii) On Fig. 2.2, complete the vector diagram to determine the magnitude and direction of the
force from the engine. Measure the angle between the direction of the current and the
force from the engine.
magnitude of force from engine = ...............................................................
angle = ...............................................................
[4]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 149
4. Adding Vectors
November Variant 1
2017 7 Question 2
(a) State Hooke’s Law.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) For forces up to 120 N, a spring obeys Hooke’s Law.
A force of 120 N causes an extension of 64 mm.
(i) On Fig. 2.1, draw the force-extension graph for the spring for loads up to 120 N. [1]
150
force / N
100
50
0
0 20 40 60 80
extension / mm
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Calculate the spring constant k of the spring.
k = ...........................................................[2]
(c) A student makes a spring balance using the spring in (b). The maximum reading of this
balance is 150 N.
The student tests his balance with a known weight of 140 N. He observes that the reading of
the balance is not 140 N.
Suggest and explain why the reading is not 140 N.

...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 150
4. Adding Vectors
June Variant 1
2009 8 Question 4
(a) In an accident, a truck goes off the road and into a ditch. Two breakdown vehicles A and
B are used to pull the truck out of the ditch, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
road
45°
A
B breakdown
vehicles
ditch
Fig. 4.1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 151
4. Adding Vectors
At one point in the rescue operation, breakdown vehicle A is exerting a force of 4000 N
and breakdown vehicle B is exerting a force of 2000 N.
(i) Using a scale of 1 cm = 500 N, make a scale drawing to show the resultant force on
the truck.
[4]
(ii) Use your diagram to find the magnitude and direction of the resultant force on the
truck.
magnitude of resultant force = ......................................................
direction of resultant force = ............................... to direction of road [2]
(b) (i) State why the resultant force is an example of a vector quantity.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Give an example of a vector quantity that is not a force.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 152
4. Adding Vectors
November Variant 1
2010 9 Question 1
An object of weight W is suspended by two ropes from a beam, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
86.6 N
30°
50.0 N 60°
Fig. 1.1
The tensions in the ropes are 50.0 N and 86.6 N, as shown.
(a) In the space below, draw a scale diagram to find the resultant of the two tensions.
Use a scale of 1.0 cm = 10 N.
Clearly label the resultant. [3]
(b) From your diagram, find the value of the resultant.
resultant = ......................................................... [1]
(c) State the direction in which the resultant is acting.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) State the value of W. W = ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 153
4. Adding Vectors
Mark Scheme
Physics O.L
Mechanics 154
4. Adding Vectors
Physics O.L
Mechanics 155
4. Adding Vectors
Physics O.L
Mechanics 156
4. Adding Vectors
3 (a) attempt to use triangle or parallelogram of forces M1

stated scale used A1
950 N and 1220 N in correct relative directions C1
correct resultant drawn in C1
weight = 1785 N [limits 1700 N to 1850 N] A1 5
(b) (i) work = force x distance or 1500 x 3.0 C1

work = 4500 J A1
(ii) power = work/time or 4500/2.5 C1
power = 1800 W A1 4
[9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 157
4. Adding Vectors
4 (a) Size / magnitude (NOT distance) and direction B1
(b) Vectors towards East and North with arrows correct by eye B1
Complete triangle or rectangle for candidate’s vectors B1
Resultant with correct arrow B1
Resultant 94 to 96 m/s by scale OR 95 m/s by calculation *Unit penalty applies B1
Angle measured 13.5° – 15.5° OR 15° by calculation *Unit penalty applies B1 [6]
5 (a) 2 lines at 90 ° to each other of same length labelled 30 N or 6 cm B1
both lines 6.0 ± 0.2 cm. B1
arrows on the two lines drawn, either head to tail B1

OR a complete square shown with diagonal and arrows on adjacent sides
resultant in range 40–45 N B1
(b) (vertically) upwards B1
(c) same as value in (a), only if answer to (a) is a force

OR 40–45 N B1
[Total: 6]
6 (a) (i) any scalar quantity other than mass B1

(ii) any vector quantity other than force B1
(b) F = ma in any form OR (a =) F / m C1

50 000 / 290 000 OR 50 / 290 C1
a = 0.17 m / s2 A1
(c) (i) 1 cm: 20 000 N / 20 kN B1
(ii) triangle completed B1

230 000 N OR 230 kN in range 220 000 N – 240 000 N / 220 kN – 240 kN B1
by calculation: 110o
OR by measurement: 108o – 112o B1
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
4. Adding Vectors
Physics O.L
Paper 4 - Variant 1
7(a) Extension of a spring is (directly) proportional to load / force / weight OR F = ke where e is extension B1
(b)(i) Straight line drawn from origin to (64 mm, 120 N) B1
(b)(ii) F = ke in any form OR 120 / 64 OR 120 / 6.4 OR 120 / 0.064 C1
c.a.o. 1.9 N / mm OR 19 N / cm OR 1900 N / m A1
(c) Above 120 N / at 140 N, the spring does not obey Hooke’s law B1
OR the extension is not proportional to the load / weight / force
The elastic limit / limit of proportionality of the spring has been exceeded B1

Mechanics
Dr. Mostafa Allam

158
Mechanics 159
4. Adding Vectors
8 (a) (i) (note: diagram may be drawn in any orientation)

sides correct length, by eye B1
forces drawn at 45°, by eye B1
parallelogram completed B1
correct diagonal drawn / correct resultant if intersecting arcs shown B1
(ii) magnitude: between 5500 N and 5700 B1

direction: between 28° and 32° B1
(b) (i) it has direction (as well as magnitude) B1
(ii) any example which is clearly a vector B1 [8]
9 (a) (parallelogram or triangle may have any orientation)

NOT a copy of Fig. 1.1
two sides at right angles, by eye B1
one side longer than the other B1
diagonal or completion of triangle drawn and labelled “resultant” OR R
Ignore numerical values. Condone arrows in wrong direction B1
(b) 98 N – 102 N B1
(accept value found by calculation)
(c) (vertically) up/opposite to W NOT North B1
(d) his (b) OR correct value calculated B1

ignore mass
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 160
4. Adding Vectors
November Variant 3
2011 1 Question 3
(a) (i) State the difference between a scalar quantity and a vector quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) State one example of a vector quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows the top of a flagpole.
100 N 60°
Fig. 3.1
The flagpole is held vertical by two ropes. The first of these ropes has a tension in it of 100 N
and is at an angle of 60° to the flagpole. The other rope has a tension T, as shown.
The resultant force is down the pole and of magnitude 200 N.
In the space below, using a scale of 1 cm = 20 N, draw a scale drawing to find the value of the
tension T. Clearly label 100 N, 200 N and T on your drawing.
tension T = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 161
4. Adding Vectors
November Variant 2
2012 2 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 is a head-on view of an airliner flying at constant speed in a circular horizontal path.
The centre of the circle is to the left of the diagram.
Fig. 2.1
(a) On Fig. 2.1, draw the resultant force acting on the airliner. Explain your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The weight of the airliner is 1.20 × 106 N and there is an aerodynamic lift force of
1.39 × 106 N acting at 30° to the left of the vertical.
By drawing a scale vector diagram, or otherwise, show that the resultant of these two
forces is in the same direction as the resultant force you drew in (a).
(c) The speed is constant as the airliner flies in this circular path.
State and explain what is happening to the velocity.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 162
4. Adding Vectors
November Variant 2
2013 3 Question 3
(a) (i) State one similarity and one difference between vector and scalar quantities.
similarity ...................................................................................................................
difference .............................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Give an example of each quantity.
vector quantity ..........................................................................................................
scalar quantity ...................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 is an overhead view of two tractors pulling a tree trunk.
tractors
30 000 N
20° tree trunk

20 000 N
Fig. 3.1
The force exerted by each tractor is indicated in the diagram.
In the space below, carefully draw a scale diagram to determine the resultant force on
the tree trunk. State the scale you use.
Write down the magnitude of the resultant force and the angle between the resultant
force and one of the original forces.
magnitude of resultant force = ......................................................
direction of resultant force = ......................................................

[4]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 163
4. Adding Vectors
June Variant 3
2016 4 Question 1
(a) State why force is a vector quantity.
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A 20 N force and a 15 N force act at the same time on an object of mass 14 kg.
Calculate
(i) the maximum possible force on the object due to these two forces,
force = ................................................................. [1]
(ii) the acceleration caused by a resultant force equal to this maximum force.
acceleration = ................................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 164
4. Adding Vectors
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows a river in which the velocity of the flowing water is 0.85 m / s parallel to the river
banks.
river bank
velocity of swimmer
velocity relative to water
of water NOT TO
45° 1.2 m / s
SCALE
0.85 m / s
Fig. 1.1
A swimmer sets off from one bank. The velocity of the swimmer relative to the water is 1.2 m / s
at 45° to the river banks, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
In the space below, draw a scale diagram to determine the resultant velocity of the swimmer
relative to the river banks. This velocity is the resultant of the two velocities shown on Fig. 1.1.
Label this resultant on your diagram.
resultant velocity = ................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 165
4. Adding Vectors
June Variant 2
2017 5 Question 1
(a) Speed is a scalar quantity and velocity is a vector quantity.
State how a scalar quantity differs from a vector quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Underline the two scalar quantities in the list below.
energy force impulse momentum temperature [1]
(b) A boat is moving at constant speed.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch a distance-time graph for the boat.
distance
time
Fig. 1.1
[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 166
4. Adding Vectors
(c) The boat in (b) is moving due west at a speed of 6.5 m / s relative to the water. The water is
moving due south at 3.5 m / s.
In the space below, draw a scale diagram to determine the size and direction of the resultant
of these two velocities. State the scale used.
scale ...............................................................
size of resultant velocity = ...............................................................
direction of resultant ...............................................................

[4]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 167
4. Adding Vectors
Mark Scheme
1 (a) (i) vector has direction OR scalar has no direction/only has size B1
(ii) any appropriate example B1
(b) NOTE: accept diagram in any orientation;

triangle or rectangle with hypotenuse/diagonal of
length ½ that of one side B1
100,
200 and T all correctly labelled B1

value in range 165 N – 180 N inclusive B1 [5]
2 (a) horizontal by eye M1

arrow to left A1
idea of airliner accelerating/changing direction AND caused by force in that
direction o.w.t.t.e. OR centripetal force
OR force/acceleration towards centre of circle B1 [3]
(b) 2 lines approximately length ratio 1.16:1 at 30°/150° to each other M1

parallelogram with line across short diagonal/triangle with original lines at 30° M1
resultant to the left, horizontal by eye A1 [3]
for first two marks ignore arrows, ignore labels unless they clarify an otherwise
confusing diagram
calculation route
both forces used in cosine rule (M1)
3rd force from previous line and correct angle used in sine rule (M1)
calculation shows horizontal resultant (A1)
(c) direction changing B1

(therefore) velocity changing or speed/magnitude constant B1 [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 168
4. Adding Vectors
3 (a) (i) (both have) magnitude o.w.t.t.e. B1
(only) vector has direction B1 [2]
(ii) valid example of vector quantity

e.g. displacement, weight, force, velocity B1
valid example of scalar quantity

e.g. distance, length, time, pressure, mass, energy accept height B1 [2]
(b) each vector to scale and correct angle,

larger vector clockwise by acute angle from smaller B1
parallelogram or correct two sides of triangle B1
resultant drawn correct, from his parallelogram or his sides of triangle M1
magnitude 4.5 – 5.4 ×104 N, accept 1 sig. fig. if exact

AND direction 4 – 12° from 3 × 104 N force OR 8 – 16° from 2 × 104 N force
accept values from diagram A1 [4]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
4. Adding Vectors
4(a) force / vector has size / magnitude and direction B1

(b)(i) 35 N B1
(b)(ii) (a =) F ÷ m or 35 ÷ 14 (e.c.f.(i)) C1
Physics O.L
2
2.5 m / s (e.c.f.(i)) A1
(c) both vectors to scale and correct angle (by eye) B1

resultant and parallelogram / two correct sides of triangle B1
value between 0.83–0.87 m / s (and angle between 88° and 92°) B1
5(a)(i) (a scalar) does not have direction B1
(a)(ii) energy and temperature B1
(b) straight line and non-zero gradient B1
(c) scale ⩾ 1 cm: 1 m / s B1
two arrows/lines and correct resultant OR rectangle and correct diagonal (towards bottom left) B1
7.2Æ7.6 m / s B1
26.0° ⩽ angle below E–W ⩽ 30.5° B1

OR 239.5° ⩽ bearing ⩽ 244°
Mechanics
Total: 7
Dr. Mostafa Allam

169
Mechanics 170
5. Moment ( Turning Effect )
November Variant 1
2011 1 Question 3
(a) State the two conditions required for the equilibrium of a body acted upon by a number of
forces.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a diagram of an arm with the hand holding a weight of 120 N.
2 cm
15 cm
20 N
120 N
33 cm
Fig. 3.1
The 20 N force is the weight of the forearm, acting at its centre of mass. F is the force in the
muscle of the upper arm. P is the point in the elbow about which the arm pivots. The distances
of the forces from point P are shown.
(i) By taking moments about point P, calculate the force F.
force F = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) A force acts on the forearm at point P. Calculate this force and state its direction.
force = ...............................................................
direction = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 171
November Variant 1
2012 2 Question 3
(a) A stationary body is acted upon by a number of forces. State the two conditions which
must apply for the body to remain at rest.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a device used for compressing crushed material.
380 mm 120 mm
lever arm
plunger
20 N
cylinder
cross-sectional crushed material

F
area A
Fig. 3.1
The lever arm rotates about the hinge H at its right-hand end. A force of 20 N acts
downwards on the left-hand end of the lever arm. The force F of the crushed material on
the plunger acts upwards. Ignore the weight of the lever arm.
(i) Use the clockwise and anticlockwise moments about H to calculate the upward
force F which the crushed material exerts on the plunger. The distances are shown
on Fig. 3.1.
force F = ................................................. [3]
(ii) The cross-sectional area A of the plunger in contact with the crushed material is
0.0036 m2. Calculate the pressure exerted on the crushed material by the plunger.
pressure = ................................................. [2]

[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 172
November Variant 1
2013 3 Question 3
(a) (i) Write down the names of three man-made devices in everyday use that depend,
for their action, upon the moments of forces.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Fig. 3.1 shows a uniform rod AB acted upon by three equal forces F.
F F
A B
F
Fig. 3.1
State two reasons why the rod is not in equilibrium.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 173
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows a uniform rod PQ, supported at its centre and held in a horizontal position.
The length of PQ is 1.00 m.
1.00 m
0.30 m
12 N S
Fig. 3.2
A force of 12 N acts at a distance of 0.30 m from the support. A spring S, fixed at its
lower end, is attached to the rod at Q.
(i) Calculate the force exerted on PQ by the spring.
force = .................................................. [2]
(ii) Explain why it is not necessary to know the weight of PQ.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 174
November Variant 1
2018 4 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a uniform plank AB of length 2.0 m suspended from two ropes X and Y.
P Q
1.5 m
rope X rope Y
A B
0.5 m
W = 210 N
Fig. 2.1
The weight W of the plank is 210 N. The force in rope X is P. The force in rope Y is Q.
(a) State, in terms of P, the moment of force P about B.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate:
(i) the moment of W about B
moment = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the force P
force P = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the force Q.
force Q = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 175
Mark Scheme
1 (a) 1. no resultant force acts / no net force acts
OR total force up / in any direction = total force down / in opposite direction B1
allow sum of forces or resultant force for total force
2. no resultant moment / couple / torque acts

OR (sum of) clockwise moments and (sum of) anti-clockwise moments
(about any point / axis) balance B1
(b) (i) (anti-clockwise moment =) F × 2 C1

(total clockwise moment =) (120 × 33) + (20 × 15) = 4260 (N cm) C1
2130 N A1
(ii) 1990 N OR candidate’s (b)(i) – 140 N B1

force is downwards B1 [7]
2 (a) No resultant/net force OR no resultant force in any direction

OR no resultant force in any two perpendicular directions B1
No resultant/net moment/turning effect/couple/torque
OR (total) clockwise moment = (total) anticlockwise moment B1
Either order
(b) (i) F × 120 / F × 0.12 C1

= 20 × 500 OR 20 × 0.5 C1
F = 83.3 N at least 2 significant figures. Allow 831/3 *Unit penalty applies A1
(ii) F/A or in words OR 83.3/0.0036 ecf from (b)(i) C1
= 23100 Pa / N/m2 OR 2.31 N/cm2 OR 23.1 kPa *Unit penalty applies A1 [7]
3 (a) (i) 3 appropriate examples: e.g. spanner, scissors, tap etc. –1e.e.o.o. B2
(ii) there is a resultant force OR more force down than up B1

there is a resultant moment OR clockwise moment is not equal to
anticlockwise moment B1
(b) (i) F × 0.5 = 12 × 0.3 C1

7.2 N A1
(ii) weight has no moment about centre of rod / has no perpendicular distance
from centre of rod
OR weight acts at centre of rod / pivot / centre of mass B1
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Physics O.L
Paper 4 - Variant 1
4(a) P × 1.5 B1
(b)(i) (W × 1.0 OR 210 × 1.0 =) 210 N m B1
(b)(ii) P × 1.5 = 210 OR P = 210 / 1.5 C1
140 N A1
(b)(iii) P + Q = 210 OR 140 + Q = 210 OR Q × 1.5 = 210 × 0.5 OR Q = 210 × 0.5 / 1.5 OR P × 0.5 = Q C1
Q = 70 N A1
Mechanics
Dr. Mostafa Allam

176
Mechanics 177
June Variant 2
2011 1 Question 3
(a) Complete the following statement:
The moment of a force about a point is ....................................................................................
multiplied by ..........................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a uniform iron bar B of weight 30 N and length 1.40 m. The bar is being used to
lift one edge of a concrete slab S. A stone, placed 0.20 m from one end of B, acts as a pivot.
A force of 40 N pushing down at the other end of B is just enough to lift the slab and hold it as
shown.
1.40 m
0.20 m force 40 N
concrete slab iron bar B
S
stone
Fig. 3.1
(i) On Fig. 3.1, draw an arrow to show the weight of bar B acting from its centre of mass. [1]
(ii) State the distance d of the centre of mass of bar B from the pivot.
d = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) Calculate the total clockwise moment, about the pivot, of the forces acting on bar B.
total clockwise moment = ...........................................................[3]
(iv) Calculate the downward force which the slab S exerts on the end of bar B.
force = ...........................................................[2]
(v) Suggest a change to the arrangement in Fig. 3.1 that would reduce the force required to
lift the slab.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 178
June Variant 2
2012 2 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a mobile bird sculpture that has been created by an artist.
tail
bird sculpture
pivot
M hole in sculpture E
for pivot
12 cm 30 cm
Fig. 2.1
M is the centre of mass of the bird sculpture, including its tail (but not including the
counter-weight that will be added later). The mass of the bird and tail is 1.5 kg.
The bird sculpture is placed on a pivot.
The artist adds the counter-weight at the end E of the tail so that the bird remains stationary
in the position shown.
(a) Calculate the mass of the counter-weight.
mass = ................................................. [2]
(b) The centre of mass of the sculpture with counter-weight is at the pivot.
Calculate the upward force acting at the pivot.
force = ................................................. [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 179
(c) The sculpture is rotated clockwise to the position shown in Fig. 2.2. It is held still, then
carefully released.
pivot
counter-weight
Fig. 2.2
(i) State whether the sculpture will stay in that position, rotate further clockwise or
rotate back anticlockwise.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain your answer to (i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 180
November Variant 2
2014 3 Question 1
(a) State the two conditions necessary for a system of forces acting on a body to be in equilibrium.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows a loaded wheelbarrow held in equilibrium by a gardener. The wheel of the
wheelbarrow is in contact with the ground at point C.
Fig. 1.1
In Fig. 1.1, there are three vertical forces acting on the wheelbarrow.
P is the upward force applied by the gardener.

Q is the upward force of the ground on the wheel at point C.
W is the weight of the wheelbarrow and its contents.
Explain why the force P is less than the force W
(i) by considering the forces P, Q and W,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) by considering the moments of the forces P and W about point C.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 181
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows a kitchen cupboard resting on a support and attached to a wall by a screw.
wall screw
cupboard
F
G
0.75 m
support 0.24 m
75 N
Fig. 1.2
The weight of the cupboard and its contents is 75 N. G is the position of the centre of mass of
the cupboard.
The clockwise and anticlockwise moments about point P are equal.
Calculate the force F exerted by the screw.
F = ............................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 182
November Variant 2
2015 4 Question 4
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a top view of a tourist vehicle in a game park and two elephants pushing
against the vehicle. The two forces indicated are at right angles to each other.
vehicle
4.0 kN
6.0 kN
elephant
elephant
Fig. 4.1
In the space below, draw a scale vector diagram to determine the magnitude of the resultant
force. Label the two forces applied and the resultant, and clearly state the scale you use.
magnitude of resultant force = ...........................................................[3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 183
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows another elephant pushing horizontally against a vehicle with a force of 11 kN at
a distance 1.8 m above the ground. Point M is the centre of mass of the vehicle.
elephant
vehicle
11 kN
M
1.8 m
A
1.25 m
Fig. 4.2
(i) Calculate the moment about point A of the force exerted by the elephant.
moment = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The mass of the vehicle is 1900 kg, and it does not slide when pushed by the elephant.
Determine whether the elephant tips the vehicle over. Show your working.
calculation
conclusion .....................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 184
November Variant 3
2016 5 Question 2
Two mechanics, A and B, are trying to use a two-person spanner (wrench) to loosen a nut on a
large wheel.
Fig. 2.1 shows the forces exerted by the two mechanics.
wheel
nuts
two-person
spanner (wrench)
500 N force 400 N force

exerted by exerted by
mechanic A mechanic B
1.2 m 1.2 m
Fig. 2.1
Mechanic A exerts a force of 500 N at a distance of 1.2 m from nut P. Mechanic B exerts a force of
400 N at a distance of 1.2 m on the other side of nut P.
(a) Calculate the magnitude and the direction of the resultant moment exerted by the mechanics
on nut P.
magnitude of resultant moment = ...............................................................
direction ...............................................................
[4]
(b) Mechanic B reverses the direction of the 400 N force that he exerts on the spanner.
Mechanic A continues to exert the same force of 500 N downwards.
(i) Calculate the magnitude of the new resultant moment exerted by the mechanics.
magnitude of resultant moment = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the magnitude of the resultant force now exerted by the mechanics on the spanner.
force = .......................................................... [1]

[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 185
March Variant 2
2017 6 Question 3
(a) A stationary object is acted upon by a number of forces.

State the conditions which must be true if the object
(i) does not accelerate,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) does not rotate.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a boat that has been lifted out of a river. The boat is suspended by two ropes.
It is stationary.
T1 T2
C P
1.20 m 0.40 m
24 kN
The weight of the boat, acting at the centre of mass, is 24 kN. The tensions in the ropes are
T1 and T2.
Determine
(i) the moment of the weight of the boat about the point P,
moment = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the tension T1,
T1 = ...........................................................[3]
(iii) the tension T2.
T2 = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 186
March Variant 2
2018 7 Question 3
(a) Complete the statement by writing in the blank spaces.
The moment of a force about a pivot is equal to ......................................................................
multiplied by .......................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a horizontal rod of length 2.4 m and weight 160 N. The weight of the rod acts
at its centre. The rod is suspended by two vertical ropes X and Y. The tension in each rope is
80 N.
80 N 80 N
2.4 m
rope X rope Y
rod
160 N
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the name given to the point at which the weight of the rod acts.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the mass of the rod.
mass = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) The rod is in equilibrium.
Using data from Fig. 3.1, explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 187
June Variant 2
2017 8 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a vehicle designed to be used on the Moon.
Fig. 2.1
The brakes of the vehicle are tested on Earth.

1
(a) The acceleration of free fall on the Moon is one sixth ( 6 ) of its value on Earth.
Tick one box in each column of the table to predict the value of that quantity when the vehicle
is used on the Moon, compared to the test on Earth.
mass of vehicle on weight of vehicle on deceleration of vehicle

Moon Moon on Moon with same
braking force
10 # value on Earth
6 # value on Earth
same as value on Earth
1
# value on Earth
6
1
# value on Earth
10
[3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 188
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the brake pedal of the vehicle.
pivot
piston
cylinder
7.0 cm
24 cm
link
oil force exerted
by driver
pedal
The driver exerts a force on the pedal, which increases the pressure in the oil to operate the
brakes.
The area of the piston in the cylinder is 6.5 # 10–4 m2 (0.00065 m2). The pressure increase in
the oil is 5.0 # 105 Pa (500 000 Pa).
Calculate the force exerted by the driver on the brake pedal.
force = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 189
November Variant 3
2010 9 Question 2
(a) A loose uniform wooden floorboard weighs 160 N and rests symmetrically on four supports P,
Q, R and S.
The supports are 0.50 m apart, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
floorboard
P Q R S
support
0.20 m 0.50 m 0.25 m
160 N
Fig. 2.1
Calculate the force exerted on the floorboard by each of the supports, and state the direction
of these forces. One value is already given for you.
force exerted by P = ...............................................................

40 N
force exerted by Q = ...............................................................
force exerted by R = ...............................................................
force exerted by S = ...............................................................
direction = ......................................................... [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 190
(b) A workman of weight W stands on the end of the floorboard described in (a).
This just causes the floorboard to tip up, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
The supports are each 0.060 m thick.
P Q R S
0.060 m 160 N
W
Fig. 2.2
(i) Calculate the weight W of the workman.
weight W = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) Calculate the force that each of the supports now exerts on the floorboard.
force exerted by P = ...............................................................
force exerted by Q = ...............................................................
force exerted by R = ...............................................................
force exerted by S = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 191
June Variant 2
2011 10 Question 3
(a) Complete the following statement:
The moment of a force about a point is ....................................................................................
multiplied by ..........................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a uniform iron bar B of weight 30 N and length 1.40 m. The bar is being used to
lift one edge of a concrete slab S. A stone, placed 0.20 m from one end of B, acts as a pivot.
A force of 40 N pushing down at the other end of B is just enough to lift the slab and hold it as
shown.
1.40 m
0.20 m force 40 N
concrete slab iron bar B
S
stone
Fig. 3.1
(i) On Fig. 3.1, draw an arrow to show the weight of bar B acting from its centre of mass. [1]
(ii) State the distance d of the centre of mass of bar B from the pivot.
d = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) Calculate the total clockwise moment, about the pivot, of the forces acting on bar B.
total clockwise moment = ...........................................................[3]
(iv) Calculate the downward force which the slab S exerts on the end of bar B.
force = ...........................................................[2]
(v) Suggest a change to the arrangement in Fig. 3.1 that would reduce the force required to
lift the slab.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 192
Mark Scheme
AND
1 (a) force perpendicular distance (of force) from the point. B1
(b) (i) downward arrow at centre of bar B1
(ii) 0.5(0) m / 50 cm B1
(iii) 40 × 1.2 OR 48 seen anywhere C1

(+) 30 × 0.5 0R 15 seen anywhere C1
= 63 N m A1
(iv) F × 0.2 = 63 C1
F = 63/0.2 = 315 N A1
(v) make bar / B longer

OR move pivot / stone to the left
OR increase distance between force and pivot (by moving pivot to left)
OR increase mass of the bar / B B1 [9]
2 (a) mass = (1.5 × 10 × 12)/(30 × 10) OR = (1.5 × 12)/30

OR any correct moment equation with force or mass but not mixture C1
= 0.6(0) kg A1 [2]
(b) 21 N ecf from (a) B1 [1]
(c) (i) stays in position B1
(ii) any two from: 2

• clockwise moment = anticlockwise moment B1
• centre of mass at pivot B1
• no (resultant) moment/turning force acting on sculpture
• balanced/in equilibrium
• relative distances from pivot unchanged [3]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 193
3 (a) no resultant/net force (acting) B1

no resultant/net moment (acting)
OR clockwise moment = anticlockwise moment B1
(b) (i) W = P + Q in any form

OR (total) upward force = (total) downward force B1
P = W – Q so P must be less than W

OR P is not the only upward force B1
(ii) P × its distance (from C)=W × its distance (from C)

OR P and W have equal moments (about C)
OR clockwise moment = anticlockwise moment B1
P is farther from C/pivot (than W so P must be less than W) B1
(c) clockwise moment = 75 × 0.24 C1

anticlockwise moment = F × 0.75 C1
(moments equated gives F =) 24 N A1
[Total: 9]
4 (a) 2 vectors correct direction AND relative length by eye B1

correct triangle OR rectangle with resultant on correct diagonal B1
7.2 kN tolerance 7.0 – 7.4 kN B1
(b) (i) (moment =) force × distance C1

(moment = 11 000 × 1.8 =) 20 kNm A1
(ii) (moment of weight = 19 000 x 1.25 =) 24 (kNm) B1

correct statement based on two moments seen B1
[Total: 7]
5(a) (moment = )F × x⊥r or F × x or 400 × 1.2 or 500 × 1.2 or 480 or 600 C1

600 and 480 C1
120 N m A1
anticlockwise B1
2(b)(i) 1080 / 1100 N m B1
2(b)(ii) 100 N B1
Total 6
Physics O.L
6(a)(i) No resultant force / net force OR Forces are balanced OR Forces in opposite directions are equal OR Forces cancel B1
(a)(ii) no resultant / net moment / torque / turning effect B1

OR (Sum of) clockwise moments = (sum of) anticlockwise moments
Physics O.L
(b)(i) B1
24 × 0.4 = 9.6 kN m OR 24 000 × 0.4 = 9600 N m
(b)(ii) T1 × 1.6 B1

= 9.6 OR = 9600 C1
(T1 =) 6 kN OR (T1 =) 6000 N A1
(b)(iii) T1 + T2 = 24 000 OR 6000 + T2 = 24 000 C1
(T2 =) 18 000 N A1
OR
T1 + T2 = 24 OR 6.0 + T2 = 24 (C1)
(T2 =) 18 kN (A1)
OR
T2 × 0.40 = 6000 × 1.2 (C1)
(T2 =) 18 000 N (A1)
OR
T2 × 0.40 = 6.0 × 1.2 (C1)

Mechanics
(T2 =) 18 kN (A1)
Dr. Mostafa Allam

Total: 8
194
Physics O.L
7(a) ...(the) force × its perpendicular distance from pivot / a point B1

(b)(i) centre of mass B1
(b)(ii) (mass =) 160 / 10 = 16 kg B1
(b)(iii) (Not moving up or down because) no resultant (vertical) force C1

OR upward force = downward force
80 N + 80 N = 160 N A1
(Not rotating because) no resultant moment (about any point) C1

OR (sum of) clockwise moments = (sum of) anticlockwise moments
clockwise moment (about centre) = 80 × 1.2 A1

anticlockwise moment (about centre) = 80 × 1.2
Mechanics
Dr. Mostafa Allam

195
Mechanics 196
8(a) Column 1 Box 3 mass same B1
Column 2 Box 4 weight 1/6 B1
Column 3 Box 3 deceleration same B1
(b) P=F / A in any form or (F=) PA C1
(F1 = 500 000 × 0.00065 = ) 330 (N) C1
F1d1 = F2d2 in any form or F1d1/d2 C1
(F2 = 325 × 7/24 = ) 95 N A1
Total: 7
9 (a) all four = 40 N OR all four add up to 160 N B1

upwards B1
(b) (i) W × 0.17/0.20/0.23 = 160 × 0.72/0.75/0.78 C1

W × 0.17 = 160 × 0.78 or 600 N C1
730/734 N A1
(ii) force by P = 160 + answer to (i) correctly evaluated B1
all others = 0 B1
[Total: 7]
10 (a) force AND

perpendicular distance (of force) from the point. B1
(b) (i) downward arrow at centre of bar B1
(ii) 0.5(0) m / 50 cm B1
(iii) 40 × 1.2 OR 48 seen anywhere C1

(+) 30 × 0.5 0R 15 seen anywhere C1
= 63 N m A1
(iv) F × 0.2 = 63 C1
F = 63/0.2 = 315 N A1
(v) make bar / B longer

OR move pivot / stone to the left
OR increase distance between force and pivot (by moving pivot to left)
OR increase mass of the bar / B B1 [9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 197
6. Energy, Work & Power
June Paper 3
1993 1 Question 1
(a) An alrcralt Is coming In to land. It Is at a point P 500 m above the ground and ha, a speed of
65 mis. The total mass ol the aircraft at P Is 150000kg.
Calculate
(I) the pofent!al energy ol the alrcra!t,
(ii) Its ldneUc energy.
[4)
Physics O.L
Mechanics 198
(b) Al P, the landlng wheels ol the alrcrart are lowered. The alrcralt then descends, touches
dov.n and rolls to a stop at the end ol the runway. Ths p,lot maintains a constant compass
course during the landlng.
Sketch on the axes below (fig. 1 . 1 ) graphs to show how the three quanUUes Indicated
change during the landing.
":, .
potenuaJ
energy
wheels touch slop
down
kloellc
�nergy
wheels touch slop
down
velocity
p
wheels touch stop
down
Fig. 1.1
Physics O.L
Mechanics 199
For each quantity write a br1ef explanation of !he changes you have shown.
po!entlal energy
n•••••••• •• •-••-••-•-•••u-ooo••••••••••••••••onooo•••••••••••••,00000,,00,0, •. ou, ••••••••••-•-•••u•-·•-on-••••••••••oHMooo
.................. -.. - ·--- -- - .
kinetic energy
··-·----·-·--·· ..·······-········-·-······-··-· ..······-··- .. ···········-··-··-··-·--·· .. ·············-···

•• _ ...... ,... ,..., ,_,,_ •• ,,,,,,.,,,, •.•• _. ... ,, ... unu-uo,,,,, ...,.._, .• ,,.,,, ...,, ..,_ •• ,o_,_,,_,., ..,_ .... ,.,._,,,.,
00
veloclty
uoo••-••uo ...,-,..--,,-, ..,u ...,,,u,oouooooouuooooa,ooouoo, ...,...,,,o,o ....... ,,,uo,uoo•-• ...•••••---•-• •• o-•,oooouoo•o•-•••
•.._•• _ --••-••-·•--••o•-••-••••••"•••••.,.••••••u•N•-•••••••-••••-••••••----••-••-•--••-•••••••••••••-•••
··--·--·-----·-·············-·········-······-··----·-···-··-·--·---·--··-···[SJ
(c) A pendulum hangs from the roof of the cabin of the aircraft. A vertical angular scale was
placed alongside the pendulum, as shown ln Fig. 1.2, before !he .alrcraft began lo land.
front of
plane
pendulum
Rg.1.2
Describe how the reading of the pointer would vary (If at all) as the alra-aft b'avefied between
P and the end of the runway. Give reasons for your answers.
··-··--·---·- ..··-·····-··-··--··-·-··-·-·-··--·-······-··--···-·--· ..··-· ..·---··- ....
-·•••-•••••-••••·---·-•••onHo•o•oo••oOOooO •onoO•UHO•UOOOoo••oo•ooo-o•HOOo•ooOOO-Oo-o ...•o-ouooo- • ·-·-U-o•OU ..... 0.0 •• 0000 ..
U o • • • h • • • • • - • • - • • • • • • Oo • - - • • • • • • • • • • • • o • • o • • o • • • o o o o o • o , o o o o o o 0 . o o o o o o o •• o o • o • • o o o o , o o o o o o , o u o o , , ...ooooo-oo .. ,o ... , ... o, ... ooOoOOO-Uoon•
•........ ----------------····· .. --- ·-··-········-·········- .. , .{4}
Physics O.L
Mechanics 200
170
Mechanics
November Paper 3
1996 2 Question 1
. 1 Safety tes1S were canled out on a hotel lift. The tests Involved llndng the veloelly Vof the lift
at vanous times t lhrOughout Its Journey tlvough three floors without stopping at either or the
lntermedlale lloors.
The veloci'ly was determined by a series of ser.sors at various points connected to a
computer.
&It
· floor3
floor2
ftocr 1
I around.
Fig. '1.1
Physics O.L
Power
Energy,
. Work &
Mechanics 201
The wt results ant presented in graphical 1..rrn on Fig. 1.2.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IJS
Fig.1.2
(a) Descnbe ths motion of the filt over the t\'O periods of time below:
(I) O lo 2 s .
-----·-·······--·- ..- ····-·····-·-·· __ , _

----·.. --········----·····--····--·-·-·-··-·-···-·-------·
(!1) S lo 1 � s.
---···-·--······--·· .. ···-·-····---···--·· ..-··---··------
-··-·· .. ·--······ ·-··---····- ..-···-···-·-·-··--·------

(5)
(b) Usa 11'

.a ,�.aph t:, estimate t:ie d"is:ance .."a·,elted over the whole Journey, and
hence fmd me average distance between !he floors of the hotel. [4}
Physics O.L
Mechanics 202
(c) The mass ot the Ult, without passeng�rs. ls 350 kg.
The acceleratfon of free tan Is 10mls2. A normal load Is six passengers.

.
The average mass o/ a passenger Is 65 kg.
Calculale
(I) the total weight of the Ult and a noimaJ load of passengers,
Q!) the Increase · In potential energy of the fill and passengers after having risen
through three noors to the position shown In Fig. 1.1,
Qli) the power of the electric: motor needed to raise the fift and passenge,s,- (Assume
that only potential enel'Qy ne!!ds to be supplled and !hat there are no power
:-'SSSS.)
lSJ
(d) The hotel lift actually completes ..ie Journey in 10s. Give three:reasons why the electric
motor, wolidng !he lit., should have a higher power tl'..an the.allS'.ver you·have-calc:ulated
in (c)QI!) •
........... _ - ,-·-·· ..··-- .. ··-·· ··-········-············· ..··- ..-·---·--
.......... - -
.. - _ _ _ _
.......................... _ - .. _ _ .... ...... [3]
(e) One of the passengers In the lift noticed, at the start ol lhe upwards journey, that the
noor er the Utt seemed to be p::shlng 1-.ard upwards on her feel Alter about IWo
sec:cnds, she could no longer feel an upward lorce. On approaching the third ftoor, after
aboat eight seconds, she fell as t!:ough her feet were coming off the floor. Explain these
observaticns, using 'physics-terms'. Yau may find It helpful to refer to the graph.
.................•..........•........... _ - -····-·--····
................................................................................................................. -······--·--·- ..
.........................•...................................... - -·····---·· .
Physics O.L
Mechanics 203
(I) In a fullher 1�1 on the nn. the velocity reduced from 1.9 rrJs to zero In 2.2 s.
Caladale lhe average deceleration.

(2)
Physics O.L
Mechanics 204
November Paper 3
1999 3 Question 1
Fig. 1 . 1 shows the oulfine of a machine for driving steel pillars (called piles} into the ground.
t-----suspenslon
-+-----steel moss
1-----lube
steel pile
ground
Flg.1.1
The steef mass ts raised by an electrtc motor and then falls under gravity.
The falltng steel has a mass of 200 kg and falls a distance of 6.0 m.
2•
(a) The acceleration of free fall is 1 0 m/s Calculate
(i) the potential energy gained by the mass each time it is raised,
potential energy gained = .••••••••..••••••••.•.••......•..•••..
(II) the maximum speed at which the mass hits the pile.
speed= ..........••.................•.......
[7)
Physics O.L
Mechanics 205
(b) When the mass hits the pile, it has kinetic energy. This energy is transformed into other
forms of energy as the speed ol the falling mass rapidly reduces to zero. As this
happens, the pile Is forced a small distance Into the ground.
(I) State the energy conversions which lake place, starting from the kinetic energy of
the falling mass .
... · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(II) Explain how a large force is produced when the pile is driven a short distance into
the ground •
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(8]
(c) In ra1s1ng the steel mass 6.0 m, the electric motor uses more energy than that
calculated in (a)(i).
Write down and explain two causes of this higher energy requirement.
, . . .
2. ·····································································································································
..........................................................................................................................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [4]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 206
( d) The equipment design is changed so that when the mass falls once, the pile is driven
further into the ground than before the design was changed.
Suggest three changes that could be made to do this.
1 ....................••........•...•...............................•......•......•....•..•.•.•.....•...................•...............
•• ••••• •• • • ••• •• •• •• •• ••• •• ouuou•••• ,,,,u, uou,o,, ••••• u , , , , , , 0 0 , , , , , , u , , , ••• ,, ounooo••••n•• •••• ••• •• •••••• • °''', ••••• ,, ,,, , •••
2..........................................•.•............•....................................•...•...................................
·············································································································· ····························
3....................................................................................................•.................................
•..•.•...••••••...••••••..•....•...•..••.•..••..•••..••.••..••....••••••.•..••••..•.•..•••••.•••••..••••..•••...••.....•....•....•.•.. (3)
Physics O.L
Mechanics 207
June Variant 1
2011 4 Question 2
Some builders decide to measure their personal power ratings using apparatus they already have
on site. Fig. 2.1 shows the arrangement they use.
pulley
rope
load
pulley
Fig. 2.1
(a) In the table below, list the three quantities they must measure in order to calculate one man’s
power, and the instrument they would use for each measurement.
quantity to be measured instrument used for measurement
1.
2.
3.
[3]
(b) One workman is measured as having a power of 528 W. His weight is 800 N.
He can develop the same power climbing a ladder, whose rungs are 30 cm apart.
How many rungs can he climb in 5 s?
number of rungs = ...........................................................[3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 208
(c) The human body is only about 15% efficient when climbing ladders.
Calculate the actual energy used from the body of the workman in (b) when he climbs 20
rungs.
energy used = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 209
November Variant 1
2011 5 Question 2
(a) Energy from the Sun evaporates water from the sea. Some of this water eventually drives a
hydroelectric power station. Give an account of the processes and energy changes involved.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) In a hydroelectric power station, 200 000 kg of water per second fall through a vertical distance
of 120 m. The water passes through turbines to generate electricity, and leaves the turbines
with a speed of 14 m / s.
(i) Calculate the gravitational potential energy lost by the water in 1 second. Use g = 10 m / s2.
potential energy lost = ............................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the kinetic energy of the water leaving the turbines in 1 second.
kinetic energy = ............................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 210
November Variant 1
2012 6 Question 4
(a) State what is meant by the centre of mass of a body.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows an athlete successfully performing a high jump.
Fig. 4.1
The height of the bar above the ground is 2.0 m. The maximum increase in gravitational
potential energy (g.p.e.) of the athlete during the jump is calculated using the expression
g.p.e. = mgh.
Explain why the value of h used in the calculation is much less than 2.0 m.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 211
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows, in order, five stages of an athlete successfully performing a pole-vault.
Fig. 4.2
Describe the energy changes which take place during the performance of the pole-
vault, from the original stationary position of the pole-vaulter before the run-up, to the
final stationary position after the vault.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [6]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 212
June Variant 1
2013 7 Question 3
Fig. 3.1 shows the descent of a sky-diver from a stationary balloon.
2000 m
sky-diver
parachute
500 m

The sky-diver steps from the balloon at a height of 2000 m and accelerates downwards.
His speed is 52 m / s at a height of 500 m.
He then opens his parachute. From 400 m to ground level, he falls at constant speed.
(a) The total mass of the sky-diver and his equipment is 92 kg.
(i) Calculate, for the sky-diver,
1. the loss of gravitational potential energy in the fall from 2000 m to 500 m,
loss of gravitational potential energy = .................................................. [2]

2. the kinetic energy at the height of 500 m.
kinetic energy = .................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 213
(ii) The kinetic energy at 500 m is not equal to the loss of gravitational potential energy.
Explain why there is a difference in the values.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State
2000 m to 500 m,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the value of the air resistance during the fall from 400 m to ground.
air resistance = .................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 214
November Variant 1
2013 8 Question 2
A train has a total mass of 7.5 × 105 kg.
(a) The train accelerates from rest at a constant rate along a straight, horizontal track.
It reaches a speed of 24 m / s in 60 s.
Calculate
(i) the train’s acceleration,
acceleration = .................................................. [2]
(ii) the resultant force acting on the train.
force = .................................................. [2]
(b) The train now travels with a constant speed of 24 m / s along a straight, horizontal track.
The total force opposing the motion due to friction and air resistance is 7.2 × 104 N.
(i) By considering the work done by the train’s engine in 1.0 s, calculate its output
power.
power = .................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 215
(ii) The train begins to travel up a slope.
Explain why the power of the train’s engine must be increased to maintain the
speed of 24 m / s.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 216
June Variant 1
2014 9 Question 3
(a) On a day with no wind, a fountain in Switzerland propels 30 000 kg of water per minute to a
height of 140 m.
Calculate the power used in raising the water.
power = ............................................... [4]
(b) The efficiency of the pump which operates the fountain is 70%.
Calculate the power supplied to the pump.
power = ............................................... [3]
(c) On another day, a horizontal wind is blowing. The water does not rise vertically.
Explain why the water still rises to a height of 140 m.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 217
November Variant 1
2014 10 Question 2
A diver climbs some steps on to a fixed platform above the surface of the water in a swimming-pool.
He dives into the pool. Fig. 2.1 shows the diver about to enter the water.
8.0 m
Fig. 2.1
The mass of the diver is 65 kg. The platform is 8.0 m above the surface of the water.
(a) Calculate
(i) the increase in the gravitational potential energy of the diver when he climbs up to the
platform.
increase in gravitational potential energy = ................................................[1]
(ii) the speed with which the diver hits the surface of the water. Ignore any effects of air
resistance.
speed = ................................................[4]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 218
(b) In another dive from the same platform, the diver performs a somersault during the descent.
He straightens, and again enters the water as shown in Fig. 2.1.
Discuss whether the speed of entry into the water is greater than, less than or equal to the
speed calculated in (a)(ii). Ignore any effects of air resistance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 219
June Variant 1
2015 11 Question 3
Fig. 3.1 shows an early water-powered device used to raise a heavy load. The heavy load rests on
piston B.
cylinder A cylinder B
water load
piston A piston B
connecting rod connecting rod
pivot beam
Initially, a large weight of water in cylinder A pushes piston A down. This causes the left-hand end
of the beam to move down and the right-hand end of the beam to move up. Piston B rises, lifting
the heavy load.
(a) The weight of water in cylinder A is 80 kN.
Calculate the mass of water in cylinder A.
mass = ................................................ [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 220
(b) The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
Calculate the volume of water in cylinder A.
volume = ................................................ [2]
(c) Piston A moves down a distance of 4.0 m.
Calculate the gravitational potential energy lost by the water.
loss of gravitational potential energy = ................................................ [2]
(d) The heavy load lifted by piston B gains 96 kJ of gravitational potential energy.
Calculate the efficiency of the device.
efficiency = ................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 221
November Variant 1
2015 12 Question 3
Fig. 3.1 shows a skier taking part in a downhill race.
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mass of the skier, including his equipment, is 75 kg. In the ski race, the total vertical
change in height is 880 m.
Calculate the decrease in the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the skier.
decrease in g.p.e. = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The skier starts from rest. The total distance travelled by the skier during the descent is
2800 m. The average resistive force on the skier is 220 N.
Calculate
(i) the work done against the resistive force,
work done = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the kinetic energy of the skier as he crosses the finishing line at the end of the race.
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Suggest why the skier bends his body as shown in Fig. 3.1.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 222
November Variant 1
2017 13 Question 8
(a) Describe a renewable process by which electrical energy is obtained from the energy stored
in water. You may draw a diagram in the space.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Explain why the process described in (a) can be regarded as renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain whether the Sun is the source of the energy stored in the water in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 223
June Variant 1
2018 14 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a fork-lift truck lifting a box.
box
Fig. 2.1
The electric motor that drives the lifting mechanism is powered by batteries.
(a) State the form of the energy stored in the batteries.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The lifting mechanism raises a box of mass 32 kg through a vertical distance of 2.5 m in 5.4 s.
(i) Calculate the gravitational potential energy gained by the box.
gravitational potential energy = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The efficiency of the lifting mechanism is 0.65 (65%).
Calculate the input power to the lifting mechanism.
input power = ...........................................................[3]
(c) The batteries are recharged from a mains voltage supply that is generated in an oil-fired
power station.
By comparison with a wind farm, state one advantage and one disadvantage of running a
power station using oil.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 224
Mark Scheme
1. a- (i) Potential energy of the plane = m g h
- 1 SQ 000 x 1 0 x 500
- 7.5 x 10' J
(ii) Its kinetic energy - l m v1.

l
- l x 150 000 (65)'i

potential l
energy
= 3.17 x 10' J
p
wheels touch stop
down
kinetic
energy
p
wheels touch stop
down ·
velocity
p
wheels touch stop
Physics O.L
Mechanics 225
Potential Energy of the plane decreases gradually

as its height decreases. The P .E. reaches zero at the
point of the wheels 'touch down because the height of
the plane from the ground is zero.
Kinetic Energy of the plane decreases gradually, but

it does not reach zero except when the plane. reaches a
complete stop. The curve representing the K.E. is a
parabola because the K.E. is proportional to v- .

Yelodty of the plane decreases gradually until it
becomes zero when the plane comes to a complete stop.
c - During the deceleration of the plane, the pendulum
moves to the right towards the front of the plane. This is
because the pendulum maintains its momentum or inertia
while the plane is decelerating. When the plane
completely stops, the pendulum returns back making few
oscillations before it finally stops in its vertical position.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 226
2.
Physics O.L
Mechanics 227
3. (a) (i) Potential energy = m . g . h
= 200 x 10 x 6
= 12000 J
(ii) K . E . = _!_ x mv'

2
1 2
12000 = -x200xv
2
v = 10.95 m / s
(b) (i) Kinetic energy of the falling mass is converted to work done to drive the
pile into the ground; also some energy is changed to sound energy and to
heat energy in the falling mass, in the pile and in the ground.
(ii) When the falling mass is suddenly stopped, its large momentum rapidly
reaches zero which produces a large force.
(force = rate of change of momentum)
( c) l. Some energy is lost due to friction in the ropes, pulleys and suspension
system; it is converted to heat and sourd.
2. The efficiency of the motor is less than 100 % due to energy lost in the
1
c o i l s of the motor and is wasted as heat rt. sound.
( d) I . Increase the falling mass.
2. Increase the distance of fall.
3 . Decrease the cross section of the pile.
4 (a) distance/height AND tape measure/(metre) rule(r) B1

weight OR load OR force
AND balance/scale(s) OR newton-meter/spring balance/force meter 1
B1
time AND watch/clock/timer B1
(b) power = work/time OR energy/time in any form

OR Pt words or numbers seen anywhere e.g. 528 x 5 C1
(work =) force × distance in any form C1
11 A1
•
2
(c) efficiency = Eout/Ein OR Pout/Pin seen anywhere, clearly identified

2 1
OR 520 × (20/11) × 5
OR (work done =) 800 × 20 × 0.3 OR 800 × 20 × 30 OR 4800 (J) OR 720 (J) C1
(energy used =) 32,000 J A1 [8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 228
5 (a) two processes from:

vapour rising
condensation
rain falling
water falling from lake / through pipes
water turns turbine / generator
electricity generated. max B2
energy changes:
PE to KE matched to a process B1
KE to electricity energy for turbine / power station B1
(b) (i) (PE =) mgh OR 2 × 105 × 10 × 120 allow g = 9.8 or 9.81 C1

2.4 × 108 J A1
(ii) (KE of water =) ½mv2 OR ½ × 2 × 105 × 142 C1

1.96 × 107 J OR 2.0 × 107 J A1 [8]
6 (a) (The point in the body) where (all) the mass / weight / gravity acts / appears to act B1
(owtte)
(b) h is the height through which the centre of mass/rises

OR centre of mass/rises (much) less than 2.0 m
OR centre of mass/of athlete is above the ground level

OR centre of mass/gravity passes under bar B1
Allow centre of gravity in place of centre of mass
(c) Standing: has chemical energy B1

Run-up: kinetic energy gained B1
Pole bent: has strain / elastic energy B1
Rise: potential energy gained B1
Fall: kinetic energy gained B1
On mat: has thermal / heat / sound / strain / elastic energy B1 [8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 229
7 (a) (i) 1. (loss of P.E. =) mgh OR 92 × 10 × 1500 C1

1.38 × 106 J A1
correct use of mgh with h = 500 or 2000 gains 1 mark only
(ii) 2. (K.E. =) ½ mv2 OR ½ × 92 × 522 C1

1.244 × 105 J at least 2 sig. figs A1
(a) (ii) difference is due to:

(work done in overcoming) air resistance/drag
OR energy converted to/lost as heat (by air resistance/drag) B1
(b) (i) increases B1
(ii) 920 N B1
[Total 7]
8 (a) (i) v = u + at OR (a =) (v – u) / t OR 24 = a × 60 OR 24 / 60 C1
0.4(0) m / s2 A1
(ii) (F =) ma OR 7.5 × 105 × 0.40 C1

300 000 N OR 300 kN A1
(b) (i) in words or symbols (P =) W / t OR F x d / t OR Fv

OR 7.2 × 104 × 24 / 1 OR OR 7.2 × 104 × 24 C1
1.7 × 106 W A1
(ii) gravitational/potential energy of train has to be increased

OR force acts down the slope / backward force acts (on train) B1
(for the same distance moved) more work done has to be done OR energy
has to be provided (by the engine) B1
in the same time (so needs more power) B1
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 230
9 (a) Fd OR weight × d OR mgh OR 30 000 × 10 × 140 OR 4.2 × 107 seen anywhere C1
(P = ) E / t OR W / t OR mgh / t symbols or words C1
4.2 × 107 / 60 C1
7.0 ×105 W / 700 kW / 0.7 MW A1
(b) efficiency = output / input OR (Pin =) 100 × Pout / efficiency C1
(Pin =) 100 × 7 × 105 / 70 C1
1.0 × 106 W OR 1 000 000 W OR 1.0 MW A1
(c) (horizontal) wind has no effect on P.E gained / vertical force on water
OR same upward / vertical force acts on water
OR force from wind is horizontal B1
[Total: 8]
10 (a) (i) (increase in g.p.e. = mgh OR 65 × 10 × 8 =) 5200 J B1

(ii) EITHER
k.e. gained = g.p.e. lost C1
½ mv2 = 5200 in any form C1
v2 = 5200 / (0.5 × 65) OR 160 C1
v = 12.6 m / s e.c.f. (a)(i) A1
OR
v2 = u2 + 2as / v2 = 2 gh (C1)
v2 = 2 × 10 × 8 (C1)
v2 = 160 (C1)
v = 12.6 m / s e.c.f. (a)(i) (A1)
(b) speed is the same B1
EITHER
loss in g.p.e. is the same B1
k.e. gained is the same B1
OR
acceleration is the same (B1)
distance fallen is the same (B1)
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 231
11 (a) W = m g in any form OR (m =) W ÷ g OR 80 000 ÷ 10 C1

8000 kg A1
(b) ρ = m ÷ V in any form OR (V =) m ÷ ρ OR 8000 ÷ 1000 C1
= 8.0 m3 ecf (a) A1
(c) m g h OR weight × h OR 8000 × 10 × 4 C1
= 320 000 J OR 320 kJ ecf (a) A1
(d) (efficiency = ) output (energy) ÷ input (energy) (× 100)
OR 96 ÷ 320 (× 100) C1
= 0.30 OR 30% ecf (c) A1

[Total: 8]
12 (a) (g.p.e.=) mgh OR 75 × 10 × 880 C1

= 6.6 × 105 J / Nm OR 660 kJ / kNm A1
(b) (i) (work =) Fs / Fd OR 220 × 2800 C1
= 6.2 × 105 J / Nm OR 620 kJ / kNm A1
(ii) answer to (a) – answer to (b)(i) C1
e.g. (k.e.=) 6.6 × 105 – 6.2 × 105 = 4.0 × 104 J OR 44 kJ
OR 6.6 × 105 – 6.16 × 105 = 4.0 × 104 J OR 44 kJ A1
(c) (to go faster by) reduced air resistance / drag / resistive force
OR to lower centre of mass OR increase stability / balance B1
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
13 Hydroelectric
(a) Hydroelectric named OR water from behind dam B1

Physics O.L
K.E. of (falling) water used / P.E. of stored water B1
Paper 4 - Variant 1
Turbine / waterwheel / paddle wheel operated B1
(Turbine) turns / drives a generator (that produces electricity) B1
(b) Rain (fills lakes in high places) B1
Cause of rain is the Sun, so renewable B1
(c) Sun evaporates water from sea etc. to fall (later) as rain B1
Sun is the source of energy. B1
13 Tidal flow
(a) Tides / tidal flow named B1
K.E. of water used B1
(b) Moon (and Sun) causes tides B1
Moon (and Sun) permanently in place, so renewable B1

Mechanics
(c) Attraction due to Moon’s (and Sun’s) gravity causes tides B1
Dr. Mostafa Allam

Sun is a source of (part of) the energy OR Sun is not the primary source of energy B1
232
13 Waves
(a) Waves on surface of sea B1
K.E. of water used to oscillate a floating mechanism B1

Physics O.L
Paper 4 - Variant 1
(b) Wind causes waves B1
Sun causes wind, so renewable B1
(c) Winds are air currents caused by thermal energy / heat from the Sun B1
Sun is the source of energy B1
14(a) Chemical (potential energy) 1
(b)(i) (E =) m × g × h OR 32 × 10 × 2.5 1
800 J 1
(b)(ii) Output power = E÷ t OR 800 ÷ 5.4 OR 148.148 (W) 1
Eff. = output (power) ÷ input (power) OR Pout ÷ Pin OR Eout ÷ Ein OR output power ÷ 0.65 OR 148.148 ÷ 0.65 OR 800 ÷ 0.65 1
= 230 W 1
Mechanics
(c) Advantage: not dependent on weather/wind blowingOR always available 1
Dr. Mostafa Allam

Disadvantage: pollutingOR CO2/SO2/greenhouse gases emitted OR leads to global warming OR oil must be transported 1
OR not renewable OR oil will run out/be used up
233
Mechanics 234
June Variant 2
2011 1 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a conveyor belt transporting a package to a raised platform. The belt is driven by a
motor.
conveyor belt
package
motor
Fig. 2.1
(a) State three types of energy, other than gravitational potential energy, into which the electrical
energy supplied to the motor is converted.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ...........................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The mass of the package is 36 kg. Calculate the increase in the gravitational potential energy
(p.e.) of the package when it is raised through a vertical height of 2.4 m.
increase in p.e. = ...........................................................[2]
(c) The package is raised through the vertical height of 2.4 m in 4.4 s. Calculate the power needed
to raise the package.
power = .......................................................... [2]
(d) Assume that the power available to raise packages is constant. A package of mass greater
than 36 kg is raised through the same height. Suggest and explain the effect of this increase
in mass on the operation of the belt.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 235
November Variant 2
2011 2 Question 2
The racing car shown in Fig. 2.1 uses a Kinetic Energy Recovery System (KERS). This system
stores within the car some of the kinetic energy lost when the car slows down for a corner. The
driver can later release the stored energy when maximum power is required.
Fig. 2.1
(a) The car approaches a corner and decelerates from 82 m / s to 61 m / s in 0.90 s.

Calculate the deceleration.
deceleration = .......................................................... [2]
(b) (i) The energy lost during the braking in (a) is 8.4 × 105 J. 40% of this lost energy is directed
to the KERS system. Determine the amount of energy stored.
energy stored = ...............................................................
(ii) The driver later uses all of this stored energy to give 60 kW of useful extra power for 3.0 s.
Calculate the energy released.
energy released = ...............................................................
(iii) Calculate the efficiency of the KERS system.
efficiency = ...............................................................
[4]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 236
(c) Suggest a possible device to store energy when a moving vehicle slows down. For this device,
state the change that occurs as more energy is stored.
device .......................................................................................................................................
change ......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 237
June Variant 2
2012 3 Question 3
Fig. 3.1 shows a water turbine that is generating electricity in a small tidal energy scheme.
barrage
sea-water level at high tide
3.0 m
water level in tidal basin
turbine connected to
electricity generator
Fig. 3.1
At high tide, 1.0 m3 of sea-water of density 1030 kg / m3 flows through the turbine every
second.
(a) Calculate the loss of gravitational potential energy when 1.0 m3 of sea-water falls
through a vertical distance of 3.0 m.
loss of gravitational potential energy = ................................................. [3]
(b) Assume that your answer to (a) is the energy lost per second by the sea-water passing
through the turbine at high tide. The generator delivers a current of 26 A at 400 V.
Calculate the efficiency of the scheme.
efficiency = ..............................................% [3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 238
(c) At low tide, the sea-water level is lower than the water level in the tidal basin.
(i) State the direction of the flow of water through the turbine at low tide.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest an essential feature of the turbine and generator for electricity to be
generated at low tide.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 239
November Variant 2
2012 4 Question 6
Solar panels are positioned on the roof of the house shown in Fig. 6.1. They use thermal
energy from the Sun to provide hot water in an environmentally friendly way.
solar
panels
Fig. 6.1
Cold water flows to the panels at 15 °C. During the day, the panels supply 3.8 kg of hot water
at 65 °C every hour.
(a) Calculate the average energy that the solar panels deliver to the water in one hour.
Specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J / (kg °C).
energy = ................................................. [3]
(b) The solar power incident on the roof during this heating period is 170 W / m2. The solar
panels have a total area of 8.0 m2.
Calculate the solar energy incident on the panels in one hour.
solar energy = ................................................. [2]
(c) Calculate the efficiency of the solar panels, stating the equation you use.
efficiency = ................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 240
(d) Explain why solar energy is called renewable energy.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) State one disadvantage of using solar energy.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 241
November Variant 3
2012 5 Question 3
Fig. 3.1 shows an aeroplane of mass 3.4 × 105 kg accelerating uniformly from rest along a
runway.
Fig. 3.1
After 26 s it reaches a speed of 65 m / s.
(a) Calculate
(i) the acceleration of the aeroplane,
acceleration = ................................................. [2]
(ii) the resultant force on the aeroplane.
force = ................................................. [2]

(b) Just after taking off, the aeroplane continues to accelerate as it gains height.
(i) State two forms of energy that increase during this time.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State one form of energy that decreases during this time.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) State why the total energy of the aeroplane decreases during this time.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) When the aeroplane reaches its maximum height, it starts to follow a curved path at a
constant speed.
State the direction of the resultant force on the aeroplane.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 242
June Variant 2
2014 6 Question 3
When a salmon swims up a river to breed, it often has to jump up waterfalls. Fig. 3.1 shows a
salmon jumping above the surface of the water. On this occasion the salmon falls back down into
the river.
salmon
waterfall
river
Fig. 3.1
The salmon has a mass of 2.0 kg.
(a) The salmon leaves the water vertically with a kinetic energy of 16.2 J.
(i) Calculate the speed of the salmon as it leaves the water.
speed = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) Calculate the maximum height gained by the salmon. Ignore air resistance.
gain in height = ........................................................ [3]
(iii) After the salmon has re-entered the river, it has lost nearly all its original kinetic energy.
State what has happened to the lost energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 243
(b) Another salmon, of much greater mass, leaves the water vertically with the same speed.
State and explain how the height of this salmon’s jump compares to the height reached by the
first salmon.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 244
June Variant 2
2015 7 Question 3
An athlete of mass 64 kg is bouncing up and down on a trampoline.
At one moment, the athlete is stationary on the stretched surface of the trampoline. Fig. 3.1 shows
the athlete at this moment.
springs
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the form of energy stored due to the stretching of the surface of the trampoline.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The stretched surface of the trampoline begins to contract. The athlete is pushed vertically
upwards and she accelerates. At time t, when her upwards velocity is 6.0 m / s, she loses
contact with the surface.
(i) Calculate her kinetic energy at time t.
kinetic energy = .........................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the maximum possible distance she can travel upwards after time t.
maximum distance = .........................................................[3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 245
(iii) In practice, she travels upwards through a slightly smaller distance than the distance
calculated in (ii).
Suggest why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The trampoline springs are tested. An extension-load graph is plotted for one spring. Fig. 3.2
is the graph.
extension
0
0 load
Fig. 3.2
(i) State the name of the point X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the name of the law that the spring obeys between the origin of the graph and
point X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 246
November Variant 2
2015 8 Question 3
(a) (i) Define power.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) In the following list, tick the two boxes next to the two quantities needed to calculate the
work done on an object.
mass of the object
force acting on the object
speed of the object
acceleration of the object
distance moved by the object [1]
(b) A lift (elevator) in a high building transports 12 passengers, each of mass 65 kg, through a
vertical height of 150 m in a time of 64 s.
(i) Calculate the power needed to transport the passengers through this height.
power = ...........................................................[4]
(ii) The lift (elevator) is driven by an electric motor.
State a reason, other than friction, why the power supplied by the motor is greater than
the power needed to transport the passengers.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 247
June Variant 2
2016 9 Question 3
Fig. 3.1 shows a cabin used to transport passengers up a hillside.
NOT TO
SCALE C
drive pulley
connected to
electric motor
pulley 50 m
cable
pulley A B
pulley
cabin
support cabin
Fig. 3.1
The cabin is attached to a cable which moves horizontally from A to B, then up the hill from B to C.
(a) There is an electrical input of energy to the motor which moves the cable.
Place two ticks against types of energy that increase as the cabin moves horizontally at
constant speed from A to B.
kinetic energy of the cabin
gravitational potential energy of the cabin
gravitational potential energy of the cable
internal energy of the surroundings
internal energy of the wires of the motor

[2]
(b) The cabin and passengers have a total mass of 800 kg. The vertical distance between
B and C is 50 m.
Calculate the increase of gravitational potential energy of the cabin and passengers when they
move from B to C.
energy = ................................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 248
(c) The cabin then descends back from C to B.

The weight of the cabin pulls the cable, which rotates the motor. The electric motor acts as a
generator when rotated in this way.
Explain the environmental and economic benefits of this arrangement.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 249
November Variant 2
2017 10 Question 3
(a) State the name of a fuel that is burnt to produce large amounts of electrical energy.
Describe a process by which electrical energy is obtained from the chemical energy stored in
this fuel.
Name of fuel: ............................................................................................................................
Description of process: .............................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Explain why the Sun is the source of the energy stored in the fuel in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain whether the process in (a) is renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 250
November Variant 3
2017 11 Question 3
Fig. 3.1 shows solar cells that use radiation from the Sun to generate electricity.
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State the name of the process which releases energy in the Sun.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A reaction takes place in the Sun as energy is released.
Describe what happens in this reaction.

...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Apart from solar cells, there are other energy resources used on Earth for which the radiation
from the Sun is the source.
State the name of one of these energy resources and explain whether it is renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State two advantages and two disadvantages of using solar cells to generate electricity.
advantage 1 ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
advantage 2 ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage 1 .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage 2 .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 251
June Variant 2
2018 12 Question 3
Fig. 3.1 shows an aircraft on the deck of an aircraft carrier.
Fig. 3.1
The aircraft accelerates from rest along the deck. At take-off, the aircraft has a speed of 75 m / s.
The mass of the aircraft is 9500 kg.
(a) Calculate the kinetic energy of the aircraft at take-off.
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[3]
(b) On an aircraft carrier, a catapult provides an accelerating force on the aircraft. The catapult
provides a constant force for a distance of 150 m along the deck.
Calculate the resultant force on the aircraft as it accelerates. Assume that all of the kinetic
energy at take-off is from the work done on the aircraft by the catapult.
force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 252
June Variant 3
2018 13 Question 2
A rifle fires a bullet of mass 0.020 kg vertically upwards through the air. As it leaves the rifle, the
speed of the bullet is 350 m / s.
(a) Calculate
(i) the kinetic energy of the bullet as it leaves the rifle,
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) the maximum possible height that the bullet can reach.
maximum height = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The actual height reached by the bullet is less than the value calculated in (a)(ii).
(i) Explain, in terms of the forces acting on the bullet, why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) As the bullet rises through the air, its kinetic energy decreases.
State what happens to this energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 253
Mark Scheme
1 (a) kinetic energy (of the package / belt / motor)
heat / thermal / internal energy / work done against friction
sound energy B2
(b) mgh OR 36 × 10 × 2.4 C1

= 864 J OR N m A1
(c) P = E/t in any form: words, symbols or numbers

OR E/t OR 864 / 4.4 C1
= 196 W OR J / s A1
(d) P = E/t in any form, words or symbols

OR mass is increased AND power is constant B1
increase in potential energy of mass is greater

OR work done / energy used (to raise mass) is greater B1
speed reduced / time taken is longer B1 [9]
2 (a) (i) use of a = ∆v/t in any form C1

23.3 m/s2 ignore sign A1 [2]
(b) (i) 336 000 J B1 [1]

2
(ii) use of power × time C1
= 180 000 J A1 [2]
(iii) 54% OR 0.54

ecf from (i) and (ii) B1 [1]
accept (= 180 000/840 000) 21% OR 0.21
(c) anything sensible for a moving vehicle, e.g. flywheel / capacitor / battery M1
appropriate change for this device, for example:
flywheel: speed or kinetic energy
capacitor: voltage or charge or electrical energy
battery: voltage or charge or electrical or chemical energy A1 [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 254
3 (a) (mass flow rate =) 1030 (kg/s) C1

use of mgh C1
loss of GPE = 1030 × 10 × 3 = 30 900 J or Nm ecf from 1st line A1 [3]
(b) output power = (26 × 400 =) 10 400 (W) C1

efficiency = output (power)/input (power) with/without 100
OR= output/input with/without 100 OR any numbers
that clearly show relationship the correct way up is intended C1
efficiency = (100 × 10 400/30 900 = ) 33.7% at least 2 s.f. A1 [3]
allow ecf from (a) and 1st line of (b)
(c) (i) from basin/to sea/from right/to left B1
(ii) turbine design allows rotation in both directions

OR meaningful comment on change of pitch
OR generator works when rotating in either direction B1 [2]
[Total: 8]
4 (a) Q = mc∆T in any form or mc∆T C1

∆T = 50 C1
Q = 798 000 J A1 [3]
(b) use of E = Pt OR 170 × 8 OR see 1 360 OR see 81 600 (= 1 360 × 60) C1

energy = (170 × 8 × 3 600) = 4 896 000 J A1 [2]
(c) efficiency = output(energy)/input (energy) OR his (a)=÷ his (b)

accept power for energy but not wrong/mixed quantities. Accept useful for output,
ignore total for input C1
efficiency = 0.16 or 16% ecf from 6(a) and 6(b) A1 [2]
(d) source not finite/will not run out ignore can be re-used/replaced
Give for right idea e.g. accept sun always shines B1 [1]
(e) one point from:

doesn’t work at night/cloud cover/no sun/variable output
high (initial) cost (of panels)
do not accept too low unless appropriate for a clearly stated context B1 [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 255
5 (a) (i) (a =) v/t or 65/26 C1

2.5 m/s2 *Unit penalty applies A1
(ii) (F =)ma or 3.4 × 105 × 2.5 ecf from 3(a)(i) C1

8.5 × 105 N *Unit penalty applies ecf from 3(a)(i) A1
(b) (i) any two of: KE or GPE or heat/internal energy/thermal energy B2
(ii) chemical energy not heat B1
(iii) thermal energy/sound is lost (to the atmosphere) or KE of air B1
(c) perpendicular to path or towards centre of circle or centripetal B1 [9]
6 (a) (i) ½mv2 in words, symbols or numbers C1
(v = √(2 × ½ × 16.2) =) 4.0 m / s accept 4 A1
(ii) mgh or KE / mg or v = √(2gh) or v2 = u2 + 2as words, symbols or numbers C1
correct substitution e.g. h = 16.2 / 2 × 10 C1
0.81 m allow e.c.f. from 3(a)(i) A1
(iii) heating of water o.w.t.t.e. B2

compensation mark: award B1 for one of heat, internal energy, sound, KE of water
ignore intermediate states throughout 3(a)(iii) e.g. KE / PE of splashed water
(b) same height M1
m affects both KE and GPE (in same way) / v2 = u2 + 2as applies in both cases
ignore “height doesn’t depend on mass” A1
special case : M1 for logical argument about not all KE becoming GPE
A1 for consequent statement about height gained
Physics O.L
Mechanics 256
7 (a) strain / elastic (potential) (energy) B1
(b)
(i) (KE =) ½ m v2 in any form C1
1200 J A1
(ii) (G)PE (gained) = KE (lost) in any form C1
(G)PE = m g h OR h = PE ÷ mg in any form C1
1.8 m e.c.f. from (b)(i) A1
(iii) friction with air OR air resistance OR thermal energy / heat produced/lost B1
(c) (i) limit of proportionality B1
(ii) Hooke’s law B1
8 (a) (i) (power =) work (done) / time (taken) OR energy (supplied) / time (taken) OR rate of doing
work OR rate of supplying energy B1
(ii) box 2 (force acting on the object) AND box 5 (distance moved by the object) B1
(b) (i) multiplies mass of all passengers by h C1

(increase in gpe =) mgh OR uses 12 × 650 × 150 C1
(power = increase in) gpe / time C1
1.8 × 104 W OR 18 kW A1
(ii) energy to raise the lift OR weight / load / mass of lift OR more weight / load / mass B1
[Total: 7]
9(a) internal energy of surroundings Box 4 B1

internal energy of wires of motor Box 5 B1
(b) (change of g.p.e. =) mgh C1
(800 × 10 × 50 = ) 400 000 J OR 400 kJ A1
(c) electrical energy generated } any B3
sensible use of electrical energy } three
}
}
sensible economic comment } from
}
sensible environmental comment } four
Total: 7
Physics O.L
10(a) suitable fuel for a power station B1
any three from five: B3

• thermal energy / heat (from fuel)
Physics O.L
• water / steam / gas heated OR steam produced
• (steam / gas) turns / moves / drives turbine
• (turbine) turns / moves / drives generator

• 2 correct energy transfers
(b) sun is energy source for plants / living matter (to grow) o.w.t.t.e. B1
plant / animal (remains compressed) into fuel OR carbon / chemical energy stored / trapped in plant / animal (remains) B1
(c) not renewable (as fuel is consumed) M1
could only be replaced over very long time period (e.g. clearly > 50 years) A1
11(a)(i) nuclear fusion B1
(a)(ii) nuclei combine / join together B1
small nuclei to larger nuclei or hydrogen to helium (in some way) or loss of mass B1
(b) any suitable resource e.g. fossil fuels; hydroelectric; wave; wind M1
renewable or not (according answer) and matching explanation A1

Mechanics
(c) two advantages from: no polluting gases / quiet / low maintenance / can be placed on roofs / clean / cheap to run B2
two disadvantages from: intermittent supply / unattractive / takes up space / uses land / d.c. output B2
Dr. Mostafa Allam

257
12(a) (KE = ) ½ × m × v2 1
(KE = ) ½ × 9500 × 752 1

(KE = ) 2.7 × 107 J 1
Physics O.L
(b) KE = F × l OR (F = )KE ÷ l 1
OR (F =) 2.671875 × 107 × 150

OR v2 – u2 = 2ax OR (a =) v2 – u2 ÷ (2 × x)
OR (a = ) 752 ÷ (2 × 150) = 18.75
(F = ) 1.8 × 105 N 1
OR ((F =) m × a = 9500 × 18.75) = 1.8 × 105 N
13(a)(i) (KE =) ½ × m × v2 C1
½ × 0.020 × 3502 C1
1200 J A1
(a)(ii) (∆h =) KE ÷ mg OR 1200 ÷ (0.020 × 10) OR 1225 ÷ (0.020 × 10) C1
6000/6100 m A1
(b)(i) (force of) air resistance acts downwards M1
adds to gravitational force/resultant force increases/deceleration increases/deceleration > g A1

Mechanics
(b)(ii) (kinetic energy) to gravitational potential energy B1
Dr. Mostafa Allam

(kinetic energy) to thermal/internal energy B1
258
Mechanics 259
November Paper 3
1994 1 Question 2
7
(a) A fully loaded, flat-bottomed tanker with vertical sides has a weight of 135x 10 N. It Is
3,
floating In sea-water of density 1.05x 1D3kg/m and the keel of the tanker Is 18m
below the surface ol lhe sea.
Assume g . 1 o rn1 s 2 .
Calculate the water pressure at a depth of 18 m. (3]
(b) The tanker, unloaded, Is taken Into a dry dock and settled on to keel blocks of total
7
area 1ooom2. The unloaded weight of the tanker ls GOx 10 N.
Calculate the pressure which the tanker exerts on each, Le. any one, of the keel
blocks. (2)
Physics O.L
Mechanics 260
(c) Sea-water Is gradually aUowed Into the dry dock until the keel blocks, which are each
2 mhlgh, are Immersed and the sea-water reaches a final depth ol 20 m (see Fig. 2.1 )•
keel blocl<s
... .
these diagrams are not to scale
Ag. 2.1
On the axes of Fig. 2.2. sketch a graph to show how the pressure on each of the keel
blocks changes as the depth of water Increases. [5]
pressure on
a block
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
depth of water In dock/ m
Ag. 2.2
(d) The power of the tanker's engines Is 45000kW whilst the tanker Is travelling at a
constant speed of 7 mis. Calculate the magnitude of the forces resisting the tanker's
motion. [3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 261
June Variant 1
2011 2 Question 3
During a period of hot weather, the atmospheric pressure on the pond in Fig. 3.1 remains constant.
Water evaporates from the pond, so that the depth h decreases.
force due to
air pressure
Fig. 3.1
(a) Study the diagram and state, giving your reason, what happens during this hot period to
(i) the force of the air on the surface of the pond,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the pressure at the bottom of the pond.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On a certain day, the pond is 12 m deep.
(i) Water has a density of 1000 kg / m3.
Calculate the pressure at the bottom of the pond due to the water.
pressure due to the water = ...........................................................[2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 262
(ii) Atmospheric pressure on that day is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
Calculate the total pressure at the bottom of the pond.
total pressure = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) A bubble of gas is released from the mud at the bottom of the pond. Its initial volume is
0.5 cm3.
Ignoring any temperature differences in the water, calculate the volume of the bubble as
it reaches the surface.
volume = ...........................................................[2]
(iv) In fact, the temperature of the water is greater at the top than at the bottom of the pond.
Comment on the bubble volume you have calculated in (b)(iii).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 263
November Variant 1
2011 3 Question 4
(a) Complete Fig. 4.1 to show a simple mercury barometer. Insert the correct labels in the
boxes. Label with the letter h the measurement required to calculate the pressure of the
atmosphere.
[3]
Fig. 4.1
(b) The value of h taken using this barometer is 0.73 m. The density of mercury is 13 600 kg / m3.
Calculate the value of the atmospheric pressure suggested by this measurement.
Use g = 10 m / s2.
atmospheric pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Standard atmospheric pressure is 0.76 m of mercury. Suggest a reason why the value of h in
(b) is lower than this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 264
June Variant 1
2012 4 Question 4
Fig. 4.1 represents part of the hydraulic braking system of a car.
piston X piston Y
F1
F2
Fig. 4.1
The force F1
pistons X and Y is filled with oil which cannot be compressed. The force F2
moves piston Y. This force is applied to the brake mechanism in the wheels of the car.
The area of cross-section of piston X is 4.8 cm2.
(a) The force F1 is 90 N. Calculate the pressure exerted on the oil by piston X.
pressure = ................................................. [2]
(b)
the force F2 is greater than the force F1.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Piston Y moves a smaller distance than piston X. Explain why.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest why the braking system does not work properly if the oil contains bubbles of air.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 265
June Variant 1
2014 5 Question 5
(a) A water tank has a rectangular base of dimensions 1.5 m by 1.2 m and contains 1440 kg of
water.
Calculate
(i) the weight of the water,
weight = ............................................... [1]
(ii) the pressure exerted by the water on the base of the tank.
pressure = ............................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows two water tanks P and Q of different shape. Both tanks are circular when
viewed from above. The tanks each contain the same volume of water. The depth of water in
both tanks is 1.4 m.
1.4 m
P Q
Fig. 5.1
(i) The density of water is 1000 kg / m3. The pressures exerted by the water on the base of
the two tanks are equal.
Calculate this pressure.
pressure = ............................................... [2]
(ii) Equal small volumes of water are removed from each tank.
State which tank, P or Q, now has the greater water pressure on its base. Explain your
answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 266
November Variant 1
2014 6 Question 3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows an oil can containing only air at atmospheric pressure.
can
Fig. 3.1
Atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
The pressure of the air in the can is reduced by means of a pump. The can collapses when
the pressure of the air in the can falls to 6000 Pa.
(i) Explain why the can collapses.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The surface area of face X of the can is 0.12 m2.
Calculate the resultant force on face X when the can collapses.
force = ................................................[3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 267
(b) Mercury is poured into a U-shaped glass tube. Water is then poured into one of the limbs of
the tube. Oil is poured into the other limb until the surfaces of the mercury are at the same
level in both limbs.
Fig. 3.2 shows the result.
oil
water
0.32 m
0.25 m
mercury
Fig. 3.2
(i) State a condition that must be true in order for the mercury surfaces to be at the same
level in both limbs of the tube.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The height of the water column is 0.25 m. The height of the oil column is 0.32 m. The
density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
Calculate
1. the pressure exerted by the water on the surface of the mercury,
pressure = ................................................[2]
2. the density of the oil.
density = ................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 268
June Variant 1
2015 7 Question 2
A large stone block is to be part of a harbour wall. The block is supported beneath the surface of
the sea by a cable from a crane. Fig. 2.1 shows the block with its top face a distance h beneath the
surface of the sea.
cable
surface of sea
h
block
Fig. 2.1
The force acting downwards on the top face of the block, due to the atmosphere and the depth h
of water, is 3.5 × 104 N.
(a) The top face of the block has an area of 0.25 m2.
(i) Calculate the pressure on the top face of the block.
pressure = ................................................ [2]
(ii) The atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
Calculate the pressure on the top face of the block due to the depth h of water.
pressure = ................................................ [1]
(iii) The density of sea water is 1020 kg / m3.
Calculate the depth h.
h = ................................................ [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 269
(b) Suggest two reasons why the tension force in the cable is not 3.5 × 104 N.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The block is lowered so that it rests on the sea-bed.
State what happens to the tension force in the cable.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 270
June Variant 1
2016 8 Question 3
Fig. 3.1 shows an oil tank that has a rectangular base of dimensions 2.4 m by 1.5 m.
oil
depth of oil
1.5 m
1.5 m
2.4 m
Fig. 3.1
3
The tank is filled with oil of density 850 kg / m to a depth of 1.5 m.
(a) Calculate
(i) the pressure exerted by the oil on the base of the tank,
pressure = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) the force exerted by the oil on the base of the tank.
force = ................................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 271
(b) The force calculated in (a)(ii) is the weight of the oil.
Calculate the mass of oil in the tank.
mass = ................................................................. [1]
(c) When he is checking the level of oil in the tank, a man drops a brass key into the oil and it
sinks to the bottom of the oil.
(i) State what this shows about the density of brass.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Explain how attaching the key to a piece of wood could prevent the key from sinking.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 272
November Variant 1
2016 9 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 represents the cross-section of an oil tanker in a river.
tanker
15 m river
water
Fig. 2.1
(a) The bottom of the tanker is 15 m below the surface of the water. The area of the bottom of the
tanker is 6000 m2. The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3.
(i) Calculate the pressure due to the water at the depth of 15 m.
pressure =
...........................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the force due to the water pressure on the bottom of the tanker.
force =
...........................................................[2]
(iii) Deduce the weight of the tanker.
weight =
...........................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 273
(b) The tanker sails out onto a calm sea. The density of sea-water is greater than the density of
river water.
State and explain any change in the depth of the bottom of the tanker below the surface.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 274
November Variant 1
2016 10 Question 3
(a) A closed container holds a quantity of gas.
Explain, in terms of momentum, how molecules of the gas exert a force on a wall of the
container.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a glass tube containing mercury.
mercury
h
air
Q
Fig. 3.1
The mercury traps a fixed mass of air in the left-hand arm of the tube. The right-hand arm of
the tube is open to the atmosphere. The difference in mercury levels in the two arms is h.
(i) The pressure of the atmosphere on the surface of the mercury in the right-hand arm of
the tube is 760 mm Hg. The distance h is 120 mm.
Calculate the total pressure at level Q, in mm of mercury (mm Hg), due to the atmosphere
and the mercury above Q.
pressure = .............................................. mm Hg [1]
(ii) State the pressure exerted by the air in the left-hand arm of the tube.
pressure = .............................................. mm Hg [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 275
(iii) Initially, the volume of air trapped in the left-hand arm of the tube is 12 cm3.
More mercury is poured into the right-hand arm of the tube. The volume of the trapped
air decreases. The temperature does not change. The difference in levels, h, becomes
240 mm.
Calculate the new volume of the trapped air.
volume = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 276
November Variant 1
2017 11 Question 3 -C.ii
(ii) In a laboratory on the Moon, the plastic cube is held stationary, using a clamp, in a
beaker of the oil of density 850 kg / m3.
The arrangement is shown in Fig. 3.2.
clamp
cube
3.0 cm clamp
stand
oil
bench
Fig. 3.2
The lower face of the cube is 3.0 cm below the surface of the oil.
Use your answer to (c)(i) to calculate the pressure due to the oil on the lower face of the
cube.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 277
June Variant 1
2018 12 Question 3
A rectangular container has a base of dimensions 0.12 m × 0.16 m. The container is filled with a
liquid. The mass of the liquid in the container is 4.8 kg.
(a) Calculate
(i) the weight of liquid in the container,
weight = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the pressure due to the liquid on the base of the container.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Explain why the total pressure on the base of the container is greater than the value calculated
in (a)(ii).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The depth of liquid in the container is 0.32 m.
Calculate the density of the liquid.
density = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 278
November Variant 1
2018 13 Question 4
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows liquid in a cylinder.
cylinder
liquid
Fig. 4.1
The depth of the liquid is 10 cm and the radius of the cylinder is 3.0 cm. The weight of the
liquid in the cylinder is 2.5 N.
Calculate the density of the liquid.
density = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a device that measures the pressure of a gas supply.
gas supply
liquid
Fig. 4.2
(i) State the name of the device. .......................................................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 279
(ii) The difference h between the two liquid levels is 2.0 cm. The density of the liquid is
800 kg / m3.
Calculate the difference between the pressure of the gas and atmospheric pressure.
pressure difference = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) A similar device with a tube of smaller cross-sectional area is connected to a gas supply
at the same pressure.
State and explain any effect on the value of h.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 280
Mark Scheme
1. (a) Water pressure = h p g
3)
= 18 (1.05 x 10 10
5 2
= 1.89 x 10 N/ m
(b) Pressure of tanker= FIA

7
= (60 x 10 )/1000
5 2
= 6 x 10 N/m
(c)
pressure on
a block
2
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
depth of water in dock/ m
(d) Power = Force x Velocity

7)
(4.S x 10 == Force x 7
6
Force = 6.43 x 10 N
Physics O.L
Mechanics 281
2 (a) (i) smaller because area smaller B1
(ii) smaller because depth/height smaller ignore less water B1
(b) (i) hρg OR 12 × 1000 × 10 C1

1.2 × 105 Pa OR 1.1772 × 105 Pa OR 1.176 × 105 Pa accept N/m2 A1
(ii) candidate’s (i) + 1.0 × 105 Pa correctly evaluated with unit (correct value
2.2 × 105) B1
(iii) p1V1 = p2V2 in any form C1

1.1 cm3
OR 0.5 × candidate’s (ii)/105 correctly evaluated A1
(iv) value in (iii) too small OR volume larger o.w.t.t.e. B1 [8]
3 (a) surfaces shown at realistic levels in dish and tube AND vertical height h between
levels clearly shown B1
top label: vacuum / mercury vapour B1
bottom label: mercury B1
(b) (P =) hdg OR 0.73 × 13600 × 10 C1
99280 Pa at least 2 s.f. B1
(c) one from:
abnormal weather / atmospheric conditions o.w.t.t.e.
air in space above mercury in tube
barometer is in a high altitude location o.w.t.t.e.
space above mercury is not a vacuum B1 [6]
ignore atmospheric pressure varies ignore temperature
4 (a) (p =) F/A OR in words OR 90/4.8 OR 90 / 0.00048 C1

= 18.75 N/cm2 OR 1.875 × 105 Pa OR 187500 Pa
OR 187.5 kPa OR 0.1875 MPa at least 2 s.f. A1
(b) Area of Y bigger (than area of X so force greater) B1
(c) Volume of oil moved at Y = volume of oil moved at X B1
Area of Y × distance moved by Y = Area of X × distance moved by X (so distance
move by Y smaller) B1
OR
Work done by piston X = work done on piston Y (B1)
Work = force × distance and F2 is greater than F1 so distance moved by Y smaller
(than distance moved by X) (B1)
(d) Air bubbles compress when pressure applied M1
More movement of piston X required for same movement of piston Y
OR Y moves less (for same movement of X)
OR Driver must push the brake pedal further / do more work
OR Pressure reduced / force on Y reduced
OR System is less efficient A1
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 282
5 (a) (i) (W = mg =1440 × 10 =) 14 400 N B1
(ii) (P =) F / A OR 14 400 / (1.5 × 1.2) C1
8000 Pa OR N / m2 A1
(b) (i) (P =) hρg OR 1.4 × 1000 × 10 C1
14 000 Pa OR N / m2 A1
(b) (ii) pressure on base of P smaller / Q greater M1
(with same volume removed) smaller decrease in depth in Q
OR height in Q is greater A1
[Total: 7]
6 (a) (i) force / pressure greater on outside surface owtte B1

(ii) p = F / A in any form OR (F =) pA C1
= (1.0 × 105 – 6000) × 0.12 C1
11280 N to at least 2 sig. figs. A1
(b) (i) pressure of oil = pressure of water B1
(ii) 1. (p=) hρg C1

(= 0.25 × 1000 × 10 =) 2500 Pa A1
2. hρg = 2500 C1
(ρ = 2500 / (0.32 × 10) =) 781 kg / m3 to at least 2 sig. figs. A1
[Total: 9]
7 (a) (i) (P =) F÷A OR 3.5 × 104 ÷ 0.25 C1

= 1.4 × 105 Pa ecf (i) A1
(ii) (1.4 × 105 – 1.0 × 105 =) 4(.0) × 104 Pa ecf (ii) B1
(iii) P = h ρ g in any form OR (h =) P÷ρ g OR 4.0 × 104 ÷ (1020 × 10) C1

= 3.9 m OR 4 m A1
(b) any 2 from: max. B2
• weight of block
• upward force of water (on block) / upthrust (of water on block)
• weight of cable
(c) (tension force) becomes smaller or zero B1

[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 283
8(a)(i) (P =) hdg OR 1.5 × 850 × 10 C1

OR
mg / area of base OR 850 × 2.4 × 1.5 × 1.5 × 10 / (2.4 × 1.5) (C1)
13 000 Pa or N/m2 A1
(a)(ii) P = F/A OR (F =) PA OR 12 750 × 1.5 × 2.4 OR 12 750 × 3.6 C1
46 000 N A1
OR
(Force = ) weight of oil = mg = 2.4 × 1.5 × 1.5 × 850 × 10 (C1)
46 000 N (A1)
(b) (46000 / 10 = ) 4600 kg
OR m = Vd = (2.4 × 1.5 × 1.5) × 850 = 4600 kg B1
(c)(i) (density of brass) greater than that of oil / 850 kg / m3
OR brass denser than oil B1
c)(ii) (It won’t sink as average) density of wood + key less than density of oil B1
Total: 7
9(a)(i) (P =) hdg OR 15 × 1000 × 10 C1

1.5 × 105 or 150 000 Pa or N / m2 or 150 kPa or kN / m2 A1
(a)(ii) (F =) PA OR 150 000 × 6000 C1
9.0 x 108 N / 9.0 × 105 kN A1
(a)(iii) Same value as (a)(ii) or 9.0 × 108 N B1
(b) Weight of tanker has to be equal to upward force of water B1
Depth (below surface) is / becomes less OR Tanker rises M1
(Tanker rises) because pressure / force on bottom of tanker
is greater OR because upthrust greater
OR At same depth as in river, pressure / force on bottom of
tanker is higher so tanker rises A1
Total: 8
10(a) (Molecules / they) collide with / hit walls of container OR B1

rebound from walls of container
Change of momentum OR Rate of change of momentum
occurs OR F = (mv – mu) / t B1
(b)(i) (760 + 120 =) 880 mmHg B1
(b)(ii) Same value as (b)(i) or 880 mmHg B1
(b)(iii) New pressure = (760 + 240 =) 1000 (mmHg) C1
PV = constant OR P1V1 = P2V2 OR 12 × 880 = V × 1000 C1
11 cm3 A1
Total: 7
Physics O.L
11(c)(ii) (P =) hdg OR 0.030 × 850 × 1.6 C1
41 Pa A1
Physics O.L
Paper 4 - Variant 1
12(a)(i) W = (4.8 × 10 =) 48 N 1
(a)(ii) (P = ) F ÷ A OR 48 ÷ (0.12 × 0.16) 1
2500 Pa 1
(b) Atmospheric pressure (in addition to liquid pressure) 1
(c) P = hdg or in words OR (d =) P ÷ hg OR 2500 ÷ (0.32 × 10) 1
780 kg / m3 1
OR d = M ÷ V = 4.8 ÷ (0.12 × 0.16 × 0.32) (1)
780 kg / m3 (1)
Mechanics
Dr. Mostafa Allam

284
13(a) mass = 0.25 (kg) OR ρ = m / V C1
volume = (π × 0.032 × 0.1 = 2.8 × 10–4 (m3)) C1
Physics O.L
density = (0.25 / 2.8 × 10–4) = 890 kg / m3 A1
Paper 4 - Variant 1
OR
mass = 250 (g) OR ρ = m / V
volume = (π × 32 × 10 =) 280 cm3
density = (250 / 280 =) 0.89 g / cm3
OR
ρ = F / A = hρg
ρ = F / Ahg OR 2.5 / π × 0.032 × 0.1 × 10
= 890 kg / m3
(b)(i) manometer B1
(b)(ii) (P =) hdg OR 0.02 × 800 × 10 C1
160 Pa A1
(b)(iii) Value of h stays the same M1

Mechanics
Difference in height not dependent on cross-sectional area of tube A1

OR Pressure of a liquid column depends only on values of h, d and g
Dr. Mostafa Allam

285
Mechanics 286
November Variant 3
2011 1 Question 4
A soldier wears boots, each having an area of 0.016 m2 in contact with the ground.
The soldier weighs 720 N.
(a) (i) Write down the equation that is used to find the pressure exerted by the soldier on the
ground.
(ii) Calculate the pressure exerted by the soldier when he is standing to attention, with both
boots on the ground.
pressure = ...............................................................
[2]
(b) The soldier is crossing a sandy desert.
Explain, stating the relevant Physics, why this soldier is at an advantage over another soldier
who has the same weight but smaller feet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The soldier’s unit is sent to a cold country, and on one occasion he has to cross a frozen lake.
Suggest one way that the soldier can reduce the risk of the ice breaking under his weight.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 287
June Variant 2
2013 2 Question 1
Fig. 1.1 shows a side view of a large tank in a marine visitor attraction.
sea-water
viewing
panel
M
tank
The tank is 51 m long and 20 m wide. The sea-water in the tank is 11 m deep and has a
density of 1030 kg / m3.
(a) Calculate the mass of water in the tank.
mass = ................................................. [3]
(b) The pressure at point M, halfway down the large viewing panel, is 60 kPa more than
atmospheric pressure.
Calculate the depth of M below the surface of the water.
depth = ................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 288
(c) The viewing panel is 32.8 m wide and 8.3 m high.

Calculate the outward force of the water on the panel. Assume that the pressure at M is
the average pressure on the whole panel.
force = ................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 289
June Variant 3
2013 3 Question 4
A large crane has a mass of 8500 kg. Fig. 4.1 shows the crane on a muddy building-site.
lifting-arm
hook
axle
caterpillar tracks
Fig. 4.1
(a) Calculate the weight of the crane.
weight = .................................................. [1]
(b) The crane rests on two caterpillar tracks each of which has a contact area with the
ground of 3.4 m2.
(i) Calculate the pressure that the crane exerts on the ground.
pressure = .................................................. [2]
(ii) As the crane driver walks towards the crane, he starts to sink into the mud. He lays
a wide plank of wood on the mud and he walks along the plank.
Explain why he does not sink into the mud when he walks along the plank.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 290
(c) When the crane lifts a heavy load with its hook, the load exerts a moment on the
lifting-arm about the axle.
(i) Explain what is meant by moment of a force.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Despite the moment exerted on the lifting-arm, the crane remains in equilibrium.
State the two conditions required for any object to be in equilibrium.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 291
June Variant 2
2016 4 Question 4
An archaeologist is investigating a shipwreck and discovers a wooden box on the seabed.
surface of sea
NOT TO
SCALE
15 m
lid
wooden box
0.80 m
1.2 m
Fig. 4.1
The dimensions of the lid of the box are 1.2 m by 0.80 m and the pressure of the atmosphere
5
is 1.0 × 10 Pa. The lid is 15 m below the surface of the sea.
3
(a) The density of sea-water is 1020 kg / m .
Calculate
(i) the pressure on the lid of the box due to the sea-water,
pressure = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) the total pressure on the lid,
pressure = ................................................................. [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 292
(iii) the downward force that the total pressure produces on the lid.
force = ................................................................. [2]
(b) The force needed to open the lid is not equal to the value calculated in (a)(iii).
Suggest two reasons for this.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 293
November Variant 2
2016 5 Question 3
Fig. 3.1 shows a mercury barometer correctly set up to measure the atmospheric pressure in
mm Hg (millimetres of mercury).
tube
mercury
dish
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State what is in the space labelled P.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 3.1, mark carefully the length which gives the atmospheric pressure. [1]
(iii) The tube containing mercury is pushed further down into the dish.
State what happens, if anything, to the vertical distance between the mercury surface in
the tube and the mercury surface in the dish.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Another barometer is set up incorrectly. The space P contains some air which exerts a
pressure equivalent to 15 mm Hg. The true atmospheric pressure is 760 mm Hg.
(i) Calculate the reading of atmospheric pressure given by the barometer.
reading = ............................................. mm Hg [1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 294
(ii) The tube is now pushed down into the dish so that the volume of the space P is reduced
from 12.0 cm3 to 4.0 cm3.
Calculate the new reading of atmospheric pressure given by the barometer.
reading = ............................................. mm Hg [4]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 295
November Variant 3
2016 6 Question 4
A manometer containing a liquid X, is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply. Fig. 4.1
shows the manometer.
gas
supply
liquid X
Fig. 4.1
Atmospheric pressure is 9.9 × 104 Pa.
(a) The height h is 0.36 m. The density of liquid X is 840 kg / m3.
Calculate
(i) the pressure due to a column of liquid X of height 0.36 m,
pressure = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the pressure of the gas supply.
pressure = .......................................................... [1]
(b) The pressure of the gas supply stays constant.

Describe what happens to the liquid levels when
(i) the liquid X is replaced by the same volume of a liquid of greater density,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) a manometer tube with a slightly smaller area of cross-section, containing an identical
volume of liquid X, is used.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 296
June Variant 2
2017 7 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a vehicle designed to be used on the Moon.
Fig. 2.1
The brakes of the vehicle are tested on Earth.

1
(a) The acceleration of free fall on the Moon is one sixth ( 6 ) of its value on Earth.
Tick one box in each column of the table to predict the value of that quantity when the vehicle
is used on the Moon, compared to the test on Earth.
mass of vehicle on weight of vehicle on deceleration of vehicle

Moon Moon on Moon with same
braking force
10 # value on Earth
6 # value on Earth
same as value on Earth
1
# value on Earth
6
1
# value on Earth
10
[3]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 297
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the brake pedal of the vehicle.
pivot
piston
cylinder
7.0 cm
24 cm
link
oil force exerted
by driver
pedal
The driver exerts a force on the pedal, which increases the pressure in the oil to operate the
brakes.
The area of the piston in the cylinder is 6.5 # 10–4 m2 (0.00065 m2). The pressure increase in
the oil is 5.0 # 105 Pa (500 000 Pa).
Calculate the force exerted by the driver on the brake pedal.
force = ........................................................... [4]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 298
June Variant 3
2017 8 Question 4
In the braking system of a car, the brake pedal rotates about a pivot when the pedal is pressed.
Fig. 4.1 shows part of the braking system.
pivot
piston
cylinder
8.0 cm
22 cm
link
oil 200 N
pedal
The driver exerts a force of 200 N on the pedal at a distance 22 cm from the pivot. As the pedal
rotates about the pivot, a force is exerted on the piston and the pressure of the oil increases.
The area of the piston in the cylinder is 5.0 × 10 –4 m2 (0.00050 m2).
Calculate the increase in the pressure of the oil.
increase in pressure = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 4]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 299
June Variant 3
2017 9 Question 6
Fig. 6.1 shows a child releasing a balloon filled with helium.
Fig. 6.1
The pressure of the helium in the balloon keeps the balloon inflated.
(a) Explain how the particles of helium produce this pressure.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) As the balloon travels upwards through the atmosphere, the volume of the helium increases.
The temperature of the helium remains constant.
(i) State an equation that relates the volume of the helium to its pressure.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 300
(ii) Fig. 6.2 shows how the air pressure in the atmosphere changes with the height above
ground level.
120
pressure
kPa 100
80
60
40
20
0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000
height / m
Fig. 6.2
1. Using Fig. 6.2, determine the pressure at ground level. Give the unit.
pressure = ............................................ unit = ......................... [2]
2. Using Fig. 6.2, determine the height at which the volume of the helium in the balloon
is twice the volume at ground level.
height = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 301
June Variant 2
2018 10 Question 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a hollow metal cylinder containing air, floating in the sea.
surface
of sea air
1.8 m
1.2 m
seawater
bottom
Fig. 2.1
(a) The density of the metal used to make the cylinder is greater than the density of seawater.
Explain why the cylinder floats.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The cylinder has a length of 1.8 m. It floats with 1.2 m submerged in the sea. The bottom of
the cylinder has an area of cross-section of 0.80 m2.
The density of seawater is 1020 kg / m3. Calculate the force exerted on the bottom of the
cylinder due to the depth of the seawater.
force = ...........................................................[4]
(c) Deduce the weight of the cylinder. Explain your answer.
weight = ...............................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 302
June Variant 3
2018 11 Question 3
On a particular day, the atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. A bubble of gas forms at a point
5.0 m below the surface of a lake. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
(a) Determine
(i) the total pressure at a depth of 5.0 m in the water,
pressure = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) the pressure of the gas in the bubble.
pressure = ...........................................................[1]
(b) As the bubble rises to the surface, the mass of gas in the bubble stays constant. The
temperature of the water in the lake is the same throughout.
Explain why the bubble rises to the surface and why its volume increases as it rises.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 303
November Variant 3
2018 12 Question 3
The density of mercury is 1.4 × 104 kg / m3.

(a) Fig. 3.1 shows an instrument that is being used to determine the atmospheric pressure.
space A
760 mm
mercury

(i) State the name of the instrument.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State what is in space A.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Calculate the atmospheric pressure.
atmospheric pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows mercury stored in a cylindrical glass jar of internal radius 4.0 cm. The depth of
mercury in the jar is 12 cm.
mercury
12 cm
8.0 cm

Calculate the weight of mercury in the jar.
weight = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 304
Mark Scheme
1 (a) (i) ( P =) F/A words or symbols B1
(ii) 22 500 Pa B1
(b) less pressure B1

less sinking B1
(c) any suggestion which involves increasing the area in contact with the ice
e.g. snow shoes / skis B1 [5]
2 (a) V = W × L × D in any form words, symbols or numbers C1

use of M = ρV in any form OR ρV words, symbols or numbers C1
(M = 51 × 20 × 11 × 1030 = 11 556 600 =) 1.2 × 107 kg A1 [3]
(b) p = ρg(∆)h in any form words, symbols or numbers C1

(∆h = 60 000 / (1030 × 10) =) 5.8(25) m A1 [2]
(c) use of F = pA in any form or pA words, symbols or numbers C1

(F = 60 000 × 32.8 × 8.3 = 60 000 × 272.2 =) 1.6(33) × 107 N A1 [2]
e.c.f. from (b)
[Total: 7]
3 (a) 85 000 N (accept 83 300 N) B1
(b) (i) (P = )F/A OR 85 000/3.4 OR 85 000/3.4 × 2 OR 85 000/6.8 (e.c.f. from (a)(i)) C1

1.2/1.25/1.3 × 104 Pa (e.c.f. from (a)(i)) A1
(ii) larger area M1

smaller pressure A1
(c) (i) (measure of) turning effect OR F × x B1
(ii) no resultant/net force B1

no resultant/net turning effect/moment B1 [8]
Physics O.L
Mechanics 305
4(a)(i) P = hρg in any form or hρg C1

(15 × 1020 × 10 =) 150 000 Pa / 150 kPa A1
(a)(ii) 250 000 Pa / 250 kPa B1
(a)(iii) use of P = F / A in any form or PA C1
(253 000 × 1.2 × 0.8 =) 240 000 N A1
(b) weight of lid } any B2
(there is a) pressure inside box }
OR upthrust on lid } two
moment of force changes } from
friction (of hinge) } five
drag of water }
Total: 7
5(a)(i) vacuum / mercury vapour B1
(a)(ii) (arrowed) line between mercury surfaces B1
(a)(iii) (distance stays the) same B1
(b)(i) (760 – 15 =) 750 (mm Hg) B1
(b)(ii) p1V1 = p2V2 in any form OR p1V1/V2 C1

correct substitution of 12.0 and 4.0 C1
correct calculation of p2 from cand’s p1 and correct V1 and V2 A1
(reading = 760 – 45 = 715 = ) 720 mm Hg B1
6(a)(i) (p = )hρg or 0.36 × 840 × 10 C1

3.0(24) × 103 Pa A1
(a)(ii) 1.0(2024) × 105 Pa (allow 1.0 × 105 Pa with evidence of addition) B1
(b)(i) left level not as low B1

right level not as high B1
or
one level higher and one level lower
smaller h / height (difference)
(b)(ii) both / liquid levels higher B1

same / 0.36 m h / height (difference) B1
Total 5
Physics O.L
Mechanics 306
7(a) Column 1 Box 3 mass same B1

Column 2 Box 4 weight 1/6 B1
Column 3 Box 3 deceleration same B1
(b) P=F / A in any form or (F=) PA C1
(F1 = 500 000 × 0.00065 = ) 330 (N) C1
F1d1 = F2d2 in any form or F1d1/d2 C1
(F2 = 325 × 7/24 = ) 95 N A1
Total: 7
8 F1d1 C1
F1d 1 = F2d 2 OR (F2 = )
d2
OR 200 × 22 ÷ 8.0
550 (N) or 200 × 22 ÷ 8.0 C1
F C1
(p = ) OR 550 ÷ 0.00050
A
OR 200 × 22 ÷ (8.0 × 0.00050)
1.1 × 106 Pa A1
Total: 4
9(a) molecules/they move/collide B1
molecules/they move/collide with walls B1
change of momentum OR force on area B1
(b)(i) pV = constant OR p1V1 = p2V2 B1
(b)(ii)1 100 (kPa) OR 1.0 × 105 (Pa) M1
Pa OR kPa A1
(b)(ii)2 (p = )50 (kPa) C1
3700 m < p < 3900 m A1
Total: 8
Physics O.L
10(a) average/overall/combined density (of the metal and air contained) less (than density of sea water) 1
(b) (P =) h × ρ × g OR (V=) A × l in any form 1
Physics O.L
(P= 1.2 × 1020 × 10 =) 12 000 (Pa) OR (V= 0.8 × 1.2 = ) 0.96 (m3) 1
P = F ÷ A OR (F =) P × A OR (W =) V × ρ × g 1

(F = 12240 × 0.80 =) 9800 N OR (F = W = ) 9800 N 1
(c) same numerical answer as (b) 1
resultant/net (vertical) force = 0 OR downward force = upward force OR forces are balanced 1
11(a)(i) (p =) h × ρ × g or 5.0 × 1000 × 10 C1
50 000 (Pa) C1
(total pressure = 50 000 + 1.0 × 105 =) 1.5 × 105 Pa A1
(a)(ii) 1.5 × 105 Pa B1
(b) (rises because) density of gas is less than density of OR resultant upward force on bubble B1
(as bubble rises) pressure (of gas in bubble) decreases B1

Mechanics
(volume of bubble increases because) p × V = constant OR V∝ 1 ÷ p B1
Dr. Mostafa Allam

307
Physics O.L
12(a)(i) (mercury) barometer B1
(a)(ii) vacuum or nothing or (low pressure) mercury vapour B1
(a)(iii) (p) = hρ g or 0.76 × 1.4 × 104 × 10 C1
1.1 × 105 Pa A1
(b) (m =)ρ V or ρ πr 2l or ρ πd2l / 4 or in numbers C1
(W =)ρ Vg or ρ πr 2l g or ρ πd 2l g / 4 or in numbers C1
84 N A1
Mechanics
Dr. Mostafa Allam

308

Physics (M.allam) Classified Mechanics P2&amp;4&amp;6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physics (M.allam) Classified Mechanics P2&amp;4&amp;6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physics

Dr. Mustafa Allam

8 The diagram shows the level of liquid in a measuring cylinder.

What is the volume of the liquid?

A 24 cm3 B 28 cm3 C 29 cm3 D 32 cm3

9 A cylindrical can is rolled along the ruler shown in the diagram.

starting position final position

The can rolls over twice.

What is the circumference (distance all round) of the can? June2002

What is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?

What is the area of the plate?

A 14.0 cm2 B 14.7 cm2 C 16.0 cm2 D 16.8 cm2

12 Diagram 1 shows a measuring cylinder containing water.

What is the volume of each steel ball?

A 6 cm3 B 14 cm3 C 30 cm3 D 70 cm3

to find the to find the to find the

before after before after before after

A measuring cylinder, metre rule

D metre rule, stopwatch

A Use a micrometer screw gauge.

D Use the displacement method with water in a measuring cylinder.

16 A student measures the volume of a cork.

cm3 cm3 cm3

diagram 1 diagram 2 diagram 3

A 30 cm3 B 40 cm3 C 50 cm3 D 100 cm3

17 A length of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.

six turns of cotton

What is the distance once round the pen?

A 2.2 cm B 2.6 cm C 13.2 cm D 15.6 cm

18 The diagram shows part of a micrometer screw gauge.

A 0.0001 mm B 0.01 mm C 0.1 mm D 1 mm

They balance as shown.

How does the density of X compare with the density of Y?

C density of X = 2 × density of Y Question 7

20 A metre rule is used to measure a length.

Which reading is shown to the nearest millimetre?

2 A student measures the length of a rod XY by holding it next to a metre rule.

A The value is correct.

3 A cyclist rides round a track three times.

at the after at the end of

A larger one bottom of meniscus

start of lap end of lap

What is the volume of the water?

A 47.0 cm3 B 47.5 cm3 C 49.0 cm3 D 49.5 cm3

A 1.0 cm B 2.0 cm C 3.0 cm D 4.0 cm

At which time does the oven need to switch on?

What is the volume of the stone?

A 8 cm3 B 9 cm3 C 14 cm3 D 26 cm3

10 A student uses a measuring cylinder to measure the volume of a quantity of water.

A making sure her eye is level with the water surface

D using the largest measuring cylinder possible

11 The diameter of a copper wire is thought to be approximately 0.3 mm.

What is the length of the feather?

13 The diagram shows the height of a stack of identical coins.

What is the thickness of one coin?

A 0.20 mm B 2.0 mm C 0.24 cm D 2.0 cm

What is the average period of the pendulum? June

metal block metal block

What is the volume of the piece of plastic?

A 10 cm3 B 25 cm3 C 70 cm3 D 80 cm3

C metre rule Question 1

D micrometer screw gauge

What is the density of the cheese?

A 0.42 g / cm3 B 0.83 g / cm3 C 1.2 g / cm3 D 2.4 g / cm3

Physics (M.allam) Classified Mechanics P2&4&6

Physics (M.allam) Classified Mechanics P2&4&6